manualshive.com logo in svg

Autodesk 24000-000000-9860 - Revit Architecture - PC, User Manual

The "Autodesk 24000-000000-9860 - Revit Architecture - PC" is a powerful design software for architects and designers. With its intuitive interface, this software enables users to create stunning building designs. Enhance your experience with the free and downloadable user manual available at manualshive.com, providing comprehensive instructions and essential tips for optimal usage.

Share
Download
background image

Description

Name

Sets the top of the stairs.

Top Level

Sets the stairs's offset from the top level.

Top Offset

Sets the top of the stairs in a multi-story building. The advantage to using this
parameter (as opposed to sketching individual runs) is that if you change the railing

Multistory Top Level

on one run, that railing is changed on all the runs. Also, if you use this parameter,
the Revit Architecture project file size does not change as significantly as it would if
you sketched individual runs.

NOTE

The levels in the multi-story building should be a uniform distance apart. For

example, each level should be 4 meters apart.

Graphics

Sets the text for the Up symbol in plan. The default value is UP.

Up Text

Sets the text for the Down symbol in plan. The default value is DN.

Down Text

Displays or hides the Up label in plan.

Up Label

Displays or hides the Up arrow in plan.

Up Arrow

Displays or hides the Down label in plan.

Down Label

Displays or hides the Down arrow in plan.

Down Arrow

Displays the Up arrow in all project views.

Show Up arrow in all views

Dimensions

Width of the stairs.

Width

The number of risers is calculated based on the height between levels.

Desired Number of Risers

Normally, the same as Desired Number of Risers. However, it may be different if
you do not complete adding the correct number of risers for the given run of the
stairs. This is a read-only value.

Actual Number of Risers

Displays the actual riser height. The value is equal to or less than the value specified
in Maximum Riser Height. This is a read-only value.

Actual Riser Height

You can set this value to change the tread depth without having to create a new
stair type. Also, the Stair Calculator can change this value to satisfy the stair equation.

Actual Tread Depth

Identity Data

Stair Properties | 675

Summary of Contents for 24000-000000-9860 - Revit Architecture - PC

Page 1: ...Revit Architecture 2009 User s Guide April 2008 240A1 050000 PM02A ...

Page 2: ...and other countries Backburner Discreet Fire Flame Flint Frost Inferno Multi Master Editing River Smoke Sparks Stone and Wire All other brand names product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright 1989 2001 Spatial Corp Portions Copyright 2002 Autodesk Inc Flash is a registered trademark of Macromedia Inc in the United States and or...

Page 3: ...aphics Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that i the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation and ii the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the softwa...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...Redundant License Server Model 11 Network License Client Setup 12 Licensing from Previous Versions of Revit Architecture 12 Network License Cascading 12 License Server Reporting 12 Licensing Extension 13 License Transferring 13 License Borrowing 13 Subscription Center 14 Using Help 14 Autodesk Training Programs and Products 15 Memory Usage 15 3 GB Feature Considerations 16 Enabling the 3 GB Featur...

Page 6: ...ume Enhancements 39 Building Pads Are Room Bounding 40 Room Boundaries in Linked Models 40 Tag Enhancements for Rooms and Areas 40 Unplace and Place Rooms and Areas 41 Color Fill in Section View 41 Modelling Enhancements 41 Preventing a Join on a Mid End Wall Face 41 Slope a Building Pad 42 Beam Cutback 42 Slab Shape Edit 42 Sketching and Snapping 42 Details and Annotations 43 Text Note Styles 45 ...

Page 7: ...es Dialog 75 Chapter 4 Project Views 79 Plan Views 79 Creating a Plan View 80 Creating a Reflected Ceiling Plan View 80 Cutting a Plan View by the Back Clip Plane 81 Plan View Properties 83 Displaying a Plan View 83 Plan Region 83 Creating a Plan Region 84 Controlling Visibility of Plan Regions 84 Elevation Views 85 Creating an Elevation View 85 Displaying an Elevation View 86 Changing the Elevati...

Page 8: ...ing an Orthographic 3D View 110 Using a Section Box in a 3D View 111 Rotating a 3D View 112 Displaying a 3D View 113 Specifying Camera Location in a 3D View 113 Modifying the Camera Position in a Perspective 3D View 113 Turning Off the Camera in a 3D View 115 3D View Properties 115 Walkthrough Views 116 Creating a Walkthrough Path 117 Editing a Walkthrough Path 118 Editing Walkthrough Frames 119 C...

Page 9: ...f Individual Elements 151 Overriding Graphic Display of Element Categories 152 Removing Graphic Display Overrides for Element Categories 153 Specifying Element Category Visibility 154 Applying Transparency to Faces of Model Element Categories 155 Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters 156 Creating a Filter 156 Applying a Filter 159 Modifying Filter Criteria 159 Modify...

Page 10: ...ews 205 Finding a View Symbol 205 Managing Views 206 Customizing Project View Organization in the Project Browser 206 Sorting Views or Sheets in the Project Browser 206 Creating a Project Browser Sort Group 207 Editing a Project Browser Sort Group 207 Adding a Filter to a Project Browser Sort Group 207 Editing a Project Browser Filter 208 Using View Lists 208 Creating a View List 209 Adding a View...

Page 11: ...the EQ Label to the Dimension Value 248 Controlling Visibility of Constraints 249 Removing Constraints 249 Constraints and Worksets 250 Chapter 6 Sketching 251 Sketching Terminology 251 Sketching Elements 252 Sketching a Line 254 Sketching a Rectangle 255 Sketching a Circle 255 Sketching a Polygon 256 Sketching Arcs 256 Sketching an Arc Passing through Three Points 257 Sketching an Arc from the Ce...

Page 12: ...up Using the Group Editor 286 Creating an Attached Detail Group 287 Duplicating Group Types 287 Loading Groups 287 Placing Groups 288 Specifying the Position of a Group by its Origin 289 Modifying Groups 289 Adding or Removing Elements in a Group 290 Excluding Elements from a Group Instance 290 Editing a Group Externally 291 Renaming a Group 291 Detaching an Attached Detail Group from a Model Grou...

Page 13: ...omponent Types Using the Match Tool 325 Changing the Line Style of Elements 326 Linework Overview 326 Using the Linework Tool 328 Changing Line Styles in a Linked Model 328 Changing the Line Style of a Projection Edge 329 Changing Line Styles for a View Underlay 329 Using Hidden Lines 329 Using Linework for Coincident Edges 330 Changing the Cut Profile of Elements 330 Measuring Elements with the T...

Page 14: ...ty During Sketching 363 Setting Detail Level 363 Instance Parameters and Shape Handles 363 Creating Instance Parameters 363 Adding Shape Handles to a Component Family 364 Family Types 366 Creating Family Types 366 Using Formulas for Numerical Parameters 366 Adding a Formula to a Parameter 367 Valid Formula Syntax and Abbreviations 367 Conditional Statements in Formulas 368 Adding a Website Link to...

Page 15: ...amilies 406 Creating a Work Plane based Family 407 Nested Families 407 Family Loading Restrictions 408 Creating a Nested Family 408 Visibility of Nested Families 408 Creating a Nested Family with Interchangeable Subcomponents 409 Creating and Applying a Family Type Parameter 409 Shared Families 410 Creating Shared Families 411 Creating a Nested Family of Shared Components 411 Loading Shared Famili...

Page 16: ...8 Transferring Project Standards 438 Specifying Project Information 439 Specifying Energy Analysis gbXML Settings 439 Custom Parameters 440 Shared Parameters 440 Categories Allowing Shared Parameters 441 Setting up Shared Parameter Files 442 Adding Shared Parameters to Families 444 Shared and Family Parameters 444 Exporting Shared Parameters to a Shared Parameter File 445 Tagging with Shared Param...

Page 17: ...pearance Library 482 Searching for a Render Appearance 482 Entering Search Text 484 Object Styles 484 Creating Object Style Subcategories 484 Modifying Object Styles 484 Deleting an Object Style 485 Renaming an Object Style 485 Line Styles 485 Creating a Line Style 485 Deleting a Line Style 486 Modifying Line Styles in the Family Editor 486 Line Weights 486 Specifying Line Weights 486 Adding Scale...

Page 18: ...y 518 Massing Studies and Building Maker 518 Creating a Mass Family 519 Creating an In Place Mass Family 519 Creating a Mass Family Outside of a Project 520 Mass Instance Parameters 520 Placing a Mass Instance from a Mass Family 521 Using Multiple Mass Instances in a Project 521 Joining Mass Instances in a Project 521 Overlapping Mass Faces 521 Mass Instances in Design Options Phases and Worksets ...

Page 19: ...ions for Imported Geometry in Mass or Generic Model Families 555 Best Practices When Importing Masses 556 Importing a Design to a Mass Family Outside a Revit Project 556 Importing a Design as an In Place Mass 557 Example of Importing a Massing Study 558 Printing Mass Elements 560 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components 561 Walls 561 Adding Interior and Exterior Walls 562 Exterior Interior...

Page 20: ...eep Properties 597 Wall Reveals 599 Adding a Wall Reveal 599 Changing the Wall Reveal Profile 600 Moving Wall Reveals Away from or Towards the Wall 600 Changing Wall Reveal Types 600 Wall Reveal Properties 600 Modifying Walls 601 Changing Wall Types 601 Resizing Walls 602 Wall Properties 603 Wall Type Properties 603 Wall Instance Properties 604 Roofs 606 Adding a Roof 606 Adding a Roof by Footprin...

Page 21: ...eating a Sloped Floor by Sketching a Slope Arrow 643 Creating a Sloped Floor by Setting Parallel Sketch Line Properties 644 Creating a Sloped Floor by Setting Single Sketch Line Properties 644 Floor Slab Edges 644 Resizing or Flipping Slabs 645 Adding or Removing Segments of the Slab 645 Changing Horizontal and Vertical Offset 645 Floor Slab Edge Properties 646 Floor Properties 646 Modifying Floor...

Page 22: ...77 Ramp Properties 677 Modifying Ramp Properties 678 Ramp Type Properties 678 Ramp Instance Properties 679 Railings 680 Adding a Railing 681 Changing the Railing Type 681 Modifying Railing Structure 681 Modifying Railing Joins 682 Modifying Railing Height and Slope 682 Controlling Placement of Balusters and Posts 683 Creating a Custom Baluster Pattern 683 Overriding the Main Baluster Pattern for S...

Page 23: ...e Properties 725 Corner Mullion Type Properties 726 Mullion Instance Properties 727 Model Text 727 Adding Model Text 728 Editing Model Text 729 Moving Model Text 729 Model Text Properties 729 Modifying Model Text Properties 729 Model Text Type Properties 730 Model Text Instance Properties 730 Hosted Components 731 Doors 732 Adding Doors 733 Door Tags 734 Changing the Door Type 734 Modifying the Do...

Page 24: ...tance Properties 764 Openings in a Structural Beam Brace or Structural Column 766 Beams 768 Structural Usage of Beams 770 Beam Tips 771 Creating Beams 772 Sketching Individual Beams 772 Using the Grid Tool to Place Beams 773 Sketching Beams with the Chain Option 775 Sloped Beam Modeling 776 3D Snapping 776 Editing Beams 777 Beam Graphical Controls 777 Beam Cutback 782 Cutback Default Settings 782 ...

Page 25: ...ons 854 Doors and Windows 854 Wall Foundation Properties 855 Modifying Wall Foundation Properties 855 Wall Foundation Type Properties Retaining 855 Wall Foundation Type Properties Bearing 856 Wall Foundation Instance Properties Retaining 857 Wall Foundation Instance Properties Bearing 858 Isolated Foundations 859 Adding Isolated Foundations 861 Isolated Foundation Properties 862 Modifying Isolated...

Page 26: ... Properties 899 Property Lines 899 Sketching Property Lines 900 Converting Sketched Property Lines to Table Based Property Lines 900 Creating Property Lines with Survey Data 900 Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site 901 Viewing the Cut Fill Volumes 901 Cut and Fill in a Schedule 902 Cut and Fill Reporting with Building Pads 902 Building Pads 902 Adding a Building Pad 903 Modifying Building Pads...

Page 27: ...934 Phase Specific Rooms and Boundaries 934 Scheduling Phase Specific Rooms 935 Copying Rooms Between Phases 936 Phase Specific Rooms and Linked Models 936 Removing Rooms 936 Unplacing or Moving Rooms 937 Placing an Unplaced Room 938 Viewing a List of Unplaced Rooms 938 Hiding Unplaced Rooms in a Room Schedule 938 Deleting Rooms 938 Rooms and Areas as Polylines 939 Exporting Rooms and Areas as Pol...

Page 28: ...inked Models 961 Applying the Linked Model Color Scheme to Rooms and Areas in Linked Models 961 Removing the Color Scheme Display 962 Color Scheme Legend 962 Adding a Color Scheme Legend 963 Modifying a Color Scheme Legend 963 Color Scheme Legend Properties 964 Chapter 15 Preparing Construction Documents 967 Construction Documents Overview 967 Sheets 968 Sheets Overview 968 Digital Cartoon Sets 96...

Page 29: ...moving a View Title from a Sheet 999 View Title Types 999 Modifying a View Title Type 1000 Loading a View Title Type into a Project 1000 Applying a View Title Type to a Viewport Type 1001 Schedules on Sheets 1001 Adding a Schedule to a Sheet 1002 Formatting a Schedule on a Sheet 1002 Splitting a Schedule on a Sheet 1003 Moving Schedule Sections 1004 Joining Split Schedules 1004 Adjusting Schedule ...

Page 30: ...m the Windows Character Map 1030 Adding or Removing Leader Lines from a Text Note 1030 Text Note Properties 1031 Modifying Text Note Properties 1031 Text Note Type Properties 1031 Text Note Instance Properties 1032 Leader Arrowhead Properties 1032 Grids 1033 Adding Grids 1033 Modifying Grids 1034 Changing the Grid Type 1034 Changing Grid Value 1034 Offsetting a Grid Line from Its Bubble 1034 Showi...

Page 31: ...ote Values 1061 Assigning Keynote Values to Materials 1061 Assigning Keynote Values to Elements 1061 Assigning Keynote Values Using Tags 1061 Keynote Legend 1061 Filtering Keynotes by Sheet 1062 Filtering Keynotes by CSI Heading 1062 Adding Additional Categories 1063 Keynote File Locations 1063 Keynote File Versions 1064 Resolving Keynote File Errors 1064 Keynote Tag Ends 1064 Tags 1064 Tag Labels...

Page 32: ... Adding a Lighting Fixture to a Building Model 1127 Displaying a Wall Based Lighting Fixture in a Floor Plan 1128 Changing a Lighting Fixture in a Building Model 1129 Displaying Light Sources in a View 1129 Aiming a Spotlight 1130 Controlling the Brightness of a Light Source 1133 Light Groups 1134 Opening the Artificial Lights Dialog 1136 Creating a Light Group 1136 Adding and Removing Lights in a...

Page 33: ...g Best Practices 1172 The Rendering Process 1172 Render Performance and the Building Model 1173 Render Performance and Lighting 1173 Render Performance and Materials 1174 How Colors and Patterns Affect Render Performance 1174 How Reflection Types Affect Render Performance 1175 How Refractions and Reflections Affect Render Performance 1175 Render Performance and Image Size Quality 1175 Troubleshoot...

Page 34: ...d Offline 1207 Upgrading Workshared Projects 1207 Workshared Project Rollback 1208 Rolling Back Workshared Projects 1208 Saving a Specific Backup Version as a New File 1209 Viewing Workshared File History 1209 Creating a Central File from an Existing Workshared File 1209 Moving the Central File 1210 Worksharing Monitor 1211 Chapter 19 Working with Linked Models 1213 Linking Revit Models 1213 Linki...

Page 35: ... Elements in Design Options and the Main Model 1247 Duplicating a Design Option 1248 Annotating and Detailing Design Options 1249 Deleting Design Options and Option Sets 1249 Deleting Views Associated with Design Options 1251 Incorporating a Design Option into the Main Model 1251 Viewing Design Options 1252 Dedicating Views to Design Options 1252 Viewing the Main Model Without Design Options 1253 ...

Page 36: ...Files 1278 Export Options 1278 Exporting Part of a 2D View 1283 Exporting Part of a 3D View 1284 Exporting Intersecting Geometry 1285 Exporting Layers 1285 Creating or Modifying a Layer Mapping File 1286 Custom Layer Mapping Files 1286 Exporting to ODBC 1287 Supported ODBC Drivers 1287 Exporting to an ODBC Database 1288 Exporting Multiple Times to the Same ODBC Database 1288 Editing the Database A...

Page 37: ...d Images 1316 Deleting Raster Images 1317 Importing Industry Foundation Class IFC Files 1317 Selecting a Template for Imported IFC Files 1317 Loading an IFC Class Mapping File 1317 Overriding Categories and Subcategories for Imported IFC Objects 1318 Linking AutoCAD Files to a Revit Project 1318 How Linking to AutoCAD Files Works 1319 Linking to an AutoCAD File 1319 Location of the Linked File 132...

Page 38: ... 1342 Using Macro Manager and the Revit VSTA IDE 1344 Creating Your First Set of Macros 1346 Using the StepInto Option 1352 Revit SDK API Reference Documentation VSTA Samples 1353 Using the Revit VSTA Samples from SDK 1354 Integrating Macros into Revit VSTA 1355 Revit API Differences 1361 Migrating SDK Samples to Revit VSTA 1362 Revit Macros FAQ 1364 Related Information about Revit Macros 1367 Glo...

Page 39: ...nsing and instructions on how to set up one or more network license servers if you plan to use them To set up network deployment 1 Start the Revit Architecture installation program If you are installing from a Revit Architecture CD the installation program starts automatically when you insert the CD If you need to start it manually navigate to the root directory of the CD and double click Setup ex...

Page 40: ...s list If desired click Print to print a copy of the deployment settings Change settings for the deployment If you want to change settings for the network deployment perform the following steps If the deployment settings are correct skip to the steps for Create the Network Deployment 10 Click Configure 11 In the Application Preferences dialog do the following a Select appropriate values for Langua...

Page 41: ...t deployments It applies the current deployment only Multiple service packs may be appended to a deployment The service pack file is included in the deployment and the service pack is applied after the product is deployed Merge the service packs into the administrative image MSI file This option is for general deployment only Once merged a service pack may not be removed from the administrative im...

Page 42: ...and License Information dialog displays when you first start Revit Architecture If you have already run Revit Architecture in trial mode click Help menu Product and License Information To enter a standalone license 1 In the Product and License Information dialog select Standalone Locked 2 Click Register 3 In the Product Activation dialog select Activate the product and click Next 4 In the Register...

Page 43: ...nation Folder dialog accept the default folder or click Browse to specify a different location Click Next If you enter a path that does not exist a new folder is created using the specified name and location WARNING Do not install the Network License Manager on a remote drive When you install the Network License Manager files you must provide a path to a local drive Specify the drive letter The Un...

Page 44: ... previously entered information might be displayed Make sure that the serial number that is displayed is the one you want to license If it is not enter the correct product serial number 10 In the License Server Model section click a license server model For more information about each license server model click the button 11 For Server Host Name enter a server host name or click the button to loca...

Page 45: ...se file with the new license information Select this option only if you no longer require any part of the existing license file contents 21 Click Next 22 On the License Activation Successful dialog click Print to save a printed copy of the license information 23 Click Done to complete the transaction and exit the Network License Activation utility If you cannot register the product using the Netwo...

Page 46: ...esk Autodesk Network License Manager LMTOOLS 2 Click the Service License File tab 3 Select Configuration using Services 4 Click the Config Services tab 5 For Service Name do one of the following If a service name is selected verify that it is the one you want to use to manage licenses If no service name exists enter the service name to use to manage licenses Revit Architecture suggests that you en...

Page 47: ...on page 6 To add licenses to the license server you can either combine the license files into one file or put all of the license files into one folder and then point the license server to that folder not to a specific file To combine license files for Autodesk products into one license file edit the existing license file and add lines from the new license file to the existing license file To edit ...

Page 48: ...7 47D9 C59D FAAB DC45 CC51 1414 A8AB 29F4 2773 CE33 59EC 0397 B326 29FE 16EC 5C95 8213 BE5C A88F 25F5 3FC1 8CB4 C0CD 65D4 C7E5 40BB SIGN2 1261 B3BF 7D54 0CF4 C84D 9EFD B041 D91A A56D 015B 9A30 20B7 BF73 0766 3674 019F 5D8B 36EE 5B75 86B2 D219 6C86 9900 B297 DD3C C34B 5303 DB46 2533 2222 Rereading the Network License File To initiate the license server open LMTOOLS and click the Start Stop Reread t...

Page 49: ...er while the other 2 servers provide backup if the master server fails With this configuration licenses continue to be monitored and issued as long as at least 2 servers are functional The license file on all 3 servers is the same You must install the Network License Manager on each server In the redundant license server model all servers must reside on the same subnet and have consistent network ...

Page 50: ...To license a client machine 1 Click Help menu Product and License Information 2 Select Network 3 Enter the network server name 4 Click Apply 5 Click Close Licensing from PreviousVersions of Revit Architecture Each new release of Revit Architecture requires the current version of the standalone or network license Standalone or network licenses from previous versions do not work with the latest rele...

Page 51: ...rtable License Utility This transfers a product license from one computer to another and ensures that the product works only on the computer that has the license Access the Portable License Utility by clicking Start menu Programs Autodesk Revit Architecture 2009 Portable License Utility For more information on the Portable License Utility see its online help License Borrowing If you are running a ...

Page 52: ...Architecture with a network license the install requires that you enter the network license serial number to enable your subscription access Using Help This section provides information on navigation of the online help HelpViewerTabs Contents The Contents tab resembles a Table of Contents in a printed book Instead of chapter and page numbers there are books and pages with headings Click a closed b...

Page 53: ...aining Courseware AATC is developed by Autodesk partners including titles in a growing number of languages Autodesk Official Certification Courseware AOCC teaches the knowledge and skills assessed on the Certification examinations Visit http www autodesk com aotc to browse the Autodesk Courseware catalog Autodesk Certification Gain a competitive edge with your career by obtaining Autodesk Certific...

Page 54: ...ork with 3 GB This is ATI Fire GL 8800 driver version 6 12 10 3035 If you experience a crash restart your computer without the 3GB option and check whether upgrading to the latest graphics card driver resolves the issue Enabling the 3 GB Feature on 32 Bit Machines Revit Architecture is a 32 bit application which is limited to 4 GB of virtual address space Typically on a 32 bit machine Microsoft Wi...

Page 55: ...cation To verify virtual memory allocation on Windows XP 1 Click Start menu Settings Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click System 3 In the System Properties dialog click the Advanced tab 4 In the Performance field click Settings 5 In the Performance Options dialog click the Advanced tab 6 In the Virtual Memory field click Change To verify virtual memory allocation on Windows Vista 1 Cl...

Page 56: ...18 ...

Page 57: ...tal ray rendering engine With this change Revit Architecture 2009 provides an overall higher quality of rendering Improved lighting effects and more accurate render appearances for materials result in more photorealistic rendered images For details on specific improvements related to rendering enhancements in Revit Architecture 2009 see the following topics Image generated using the AccuRender ren...

Page 58: ...w improved defaults and clear terminology make it easier for users to generate realistic images with a minimum of effort even if they have limited rendering experience Improved user interface for rendering For more experienced users Revit Architecture 2009 offers control over advanced settings to refine a rendered image and achieve the desired result 20 Chapter 2 What s New in This Release ...

Page 59: ...s When working with materials you can enter search text to locate the desired material or render appearance quickly based on its name description keywords or other information Material definitions are stored as part of the project file Render appearances are stored in a local read only library If you change settings for render appearances many changes are stored as part of the project If you speci...

Page 60: ...ribe the light source you can specify real world lighting variables based on manufacturer information These improvements provide more accurate realistic lighting in the rendered image See Lights on page 1100 During the rendering process daylighting is performed automatically For advanced lighting quality in interior views you can enable daylight portals if needed See Daylight Portals on page 1165 ...

Page 61: ... Decal Enhancements Revit Architecture 2009 provides a more accurate rendering of decals The user interface has been enhanced to provide more control over the appearance of decals in rendered images See Decals on page 1152 Enhancements for Export to 3ds Max When you export a 3D view to Autodesk 3ds Max to use its higher level rendering capabilities Revit Architecture 2009 passes rendering settings...

Page 62: ...render appearance Save changes to the project Lighting Migrating Lighting Fixtures on page 26 Lights on page 1100 Open the family in Revit Architecture 2009 and save it a lighting fixture family Migrating Lighting Fixtures on page 26 Lights on page 1100 Open each lighting fixture family in Revit Architecture 2009 and save it Then reload each family into the lighting fixture families in a project p...

Page 63: ...it releases are converted to have no glow no smoothness and no shininess For more information see Materials on page 459 Render Appearances that Migrate Automatically In Revit Architecture 2009 new render appearances have been assigned to all materials that are used in Revit families or templates and that previously used AccuRender definitions When you upgrade a project that uses these materials th...

Page 64: ...ies for the render appearance See Render Appearance Properties on page 468 8 Click Apply 9 Repeat Steps 4 through 8 for other materials whose render appearances were not upgraded 10 In the Materials dialog click OK 11 Save changes to the project Migrating Lighting Fixtures In Revit Architecture 2009 all 2008 lighting fixture families including spot lights and linear lights display and render as sp...

Page 65: ...Manager See Using the ArchVision Content Manager on page 1149 Migrating Plants Many Revit 2008 plant families were defined using AccuRender procedures In Revit Architecture 2009 render appearances for plant families are defined using RPC files There is no one to one strategy for mapping Revit 2008 plants to Revit 2009 plants When you open a Revit 2008 project in Revit Architecture 2009 existing Ac...

Page 66: ...mental ray rendering engine is designed to produce more photorealistic rendered images than in Revit 2008 It provides renderings of comparable quality to AccuRender in a similar amount of time However in Revit Architecture 2009 you have more control over the quality settings for rendered images For example you can generate a quick draft quality image to check material settings or use a higher qual...

Page 67: ...page 482 Transferring Material definitions are stored as part of the pro ject file Render appearances are stored in a local External material libraries Project Standards on page 438 Render ing Options on page 506 read only library If you change attributes for render appearances many changes are stored as part of the project If you specify image files for render appearances store the image files in...

Page 68: ...l You can pan zoom or manipulate the current view of a model in different ways There are several SteeringWheels wheels are specific to the context that a model is being viewed in Full Navigation Wheel SteeringWheels can be accessed from the toolbar Click in 2D views or in 3D views to access the SteeringWheels For more information on ViewCube and SteeringWheels see Navigating Views on page 169 Dyna...

Page 69: ... Options In ViewCube SteeringWheels In Dynamic View SteeringWheels Orbit ViewCube Click and drag the ViewCube Spin SteeringWheels Rewind Rewind offers enhanced undo options for view orientation changes See Rewind Tool on page 188 Undo view orientation changes Right click SteeringWheels or ViewCube and click Save View Save View Click faces edges or corners on the ViewCube or right click the ViewCub...

Page 70: ...Orient to a Plane Orient to a Plane PerspectiveView Navigation Options In SteeringWheels In Dynamic View Walkthrough Tab Options Pan Dolly Full Navigation Wheel Walk Tour Building Wheel Forward Forward Back Look Turn Field of View Tab Options 32 Chapter 2 What s New in This Release ...

Page 71: ...pen one of these click it If you hold the cursor over the image a tooltip displays the path size and date the project or family was modified To open a file that is not listed in the Recent Files window click Browse for additional project files or click Create new project The Recent Files window provides fast access to your recent projects and families After you have worked in a Revit file you can ...

Page 72: ...ngs This topic describes the new and enhanced features for project settings in Revit Architecture 2009 SuppressingTrailing Zeros and Spaces You can format project units to suppress trailing zeros for example 123 400 displays as 123 4 and suppress spaces for example 1 2 displays as 1 2 See Setting Project Units on page 492 Decimal Display and Digit Grouping The decimal display option for project un...

Page 73: ...for the exterior of the building based on linear dimensions or surface area HVAC heating ventilation air conditioning requirements for different levels of the building See Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 522 Related topics Swept Blend ProjectViews This topic describes the new and enhanced features for project views in Revit Architecture 2009 ProjectViews 35 ...

Page 74: ... Cutting an Elevation Section or CalloutView by the Far Clip Plane You can cut an elevation section or callout view at the far clip plane See Cutting an Elevation Section or Callout View by the Far Clip Plane on page 87 CustomView Scale The view scale is the proportional system used to represent objects in a drawing You can assign a different scale to each view in a project In Revit Architecture 2...

Page 75: ...notations is preserved when necessary for example text does not mirror to retain readability See Mirroring a Project on page 1236 Rotate Project North You can rotate project north for the entire project See Rotating Project North on page 1235 Families Swept Blend Modeling complex geometry can be achieved using the Swept Blend tool The tool allows massing or family geometry to be defined by 2 diffe...

Page 76: ...page 1267 Visibility and Graphics This topic describes the new and enhanced features for visibility and graphics in Revit Architecture 2009 Hiding an Element in a Join In Revit Architecture 2008 when you hid an element that was joined to another element in a view the joined to element that remained visible might look incomplete For example when you hid a wall that was joined to another wall in a v...

Page 77: ...re now computed to the wall face See Room Volume on page 928 Changes to Room Computation Height The computation height is a defined height above the base level of a room Revit Architecture measures the perimeter of the room at this height and uses this information when computing the room area and volume In previous releases the room computation height was a project wide setting In Revit Architectu...

Page 78: ...in the linked model In Revit Architecture 2009 you can now make the software recognize the room bounding elements of a linked model See Room Boundaries in Linked Models on page 920 Placing rooms in a host project building exterior using walls in a linked model building interior Tag Enhancements for Rooms and Areas In Revit Architecture 2009 you can do the following Use the Tag All Not Tagged tool ...

Page 79: ...areas In Revit MEP this feature applies to rooms areas spaces and zones See Color Schemes on page 956 In plan views and section views you can specify whether the color scheme displays in the background or the foreground of the view This option is a property of the view See Applying a Color Scheme on page 960 Modelling Enhancements This topic describes the new and enhanced modelling features for ar...

Page 80: ...ge 782 Slab Shape Edit You can modify the split lines that Revit Architecture creates in the slab when it is warped See Shape Editing for Slabs Roofs and Floors on page 881 Slabs containing arc segments can be modified with the slab shape editing tools The curved edge slabs can be set to have either concave or flat surfaces See Using the Curved Edge Condition Tool on page 886 Sketching and Snappin...

Page 81: ...ntersection points of lines grids reference planes and location lines for walls The center of arcs when placing a linear dimension The center mark of the arc does not need to be visible to dimension to it AddingText to DimensionValues You can add supplemental text above below or to the left or right of a permanent dimension value You can also replace permanent dimension values with text See Overri...

Page 82: ...gments When defining a grid type you can specify that grid lines display a center segment or a gap You can specify the default length of end segments For a center segment you can specify a different line color weight and style See Customizing Grid Lines on page 1037 You can adjust the length of the gap or center segment in an individual grid line For example you may want to adjust the gap so the g...

Page 83: ...model elements Cut edges of model elements Edges in imported CAD files Edges in linked Revit models See Changing the Line Style of Elements on page 326 Revisions and Sheets This topic describes the new and enhanced features for revisions in Revit Architecture 2009 Rotating aView on a Sheet After placing a view a drawing or a schedule on a sheet you can rotate it 90 degrees in either direction See ...

Page 84: ...gs and revision rows starting at the bottom of the schedule A new feature allows you to specify how Revit Architecture builds revision schedules See Building a Revision Schedule from the Top Down or Bottom Up on page 991 Numbering for Revisions Previous versions of Revit Architecture used numeric numbering for revisions In Revit Architecture 2009 you can specify numeric numbering alphabetic number...

Page 85: ...e 2009 Batch Printing You can use Batch Print for Revit 2009 to print many drawings at one time unattended See Batch Printing on page 1025 Linked Models This topic describes the new and enhanced features for linked models in Revit Architecture 2009 Phase Mapping You can set up a correspondence between phases in the host Revit model and phases in the linked Revit model To do this you set up the pha...

Page 86: ...it was IFC 2x2 You also have the following export options for all IFC file formats Current view only This option allows you to export elements that are visible in the current view Visible elements include those that are hidden by hidden line or shaded mode any underlays in the view and elements that are cropped from view by the crop region Elements temporarily hidden using temporary hide isolate w...

Page 87: ...hitecture 2009 Worksharing Monitor The Worksharing Monitor is a utility that allows you to find out information about a workshared project Who is currently working on this project Is my local copy of the project up to date When will my Save to Central operation finish Has my request to borrow elements been granted Are any issues interfering with my work on a Revit Architecture project The Workshar...

Page 88: ...en restructured and revised to improve usability In addition images have been added to illustrate and clarify important concepts Look for further improvements to the documentation in future releases Families Guide Documentation for family creation has been restructured revised and enhanced with more detailed conceptual information and tutorials Download the Families Guide here http www autodesk co...

Page 89: ...ng system Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows it features menus with commands toolbars with buttons dialogs and windows in which you complete tasks In the Revit Architecture interface many of the components such as walls windows and doors are available at the click of a button You can drop these components into the drawing and immediately determine whether they meet your de...

Page 90: ... rarely use so they do not clutter the interface You can also display several project views at one time or layer the views to see only the one on top Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface Then experiment with them hiding showing and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to all ...

Page 91: ...Defining and managing different options for a design such as setting the active option and adding and removing options Design Options To modify toolbars to suit your needs To hide a toolbar click Window menu Toolbar and clear the check mark for the toolbar to hide To show a hidden toolbar click Window menu Toolbar and select the toolbar to display To hide or display text labels on toolbar buttons ...

Page 92: ...ds for Design Bar Tab Building design such as walls windows and doors Basics Creating views in Revit Architecture View The same building components as the Basic tab plus others that help you to develop a more complex project Modelling Annotation symbols such as tags and dimensions and creating detail views Drafting Rendering 3D views Rendering Site design such as toposurface graded region and prop...

Page 93: ... the tab to display and click OK NOTE You can also right click anywhere on the Design Bar and from the shortcut menu select a tab to show or hide To change the width of the Design Bar click and drag its right border For example you may want to expand its width to see more text or reduce its width to increase the size of the drawing area When you exit Revit Architecture the Design Bar settings are ...

Page 94: ...e desired location To float the Project Browser in the drawing area double click the Project Browser title bar You can then move the Project Browser to the desired location and drag its borders to resize it You can customize the organization of project views in the Project Browser See Customizing Project View Organization in the Project Browser on page 206 Changing Multiple Items in the Project Br...

Page 95: ...s a viewport As you move the cursor the viewport add a view to a sheet moves with it When the viewport is in the desired location on the sheet click to place it under the sheet name right click the view name and click Remove from Sheet remove a view from a sheet right click the Sheets branch and click New Sheet create a new sheet right click the view name and click Duplicate View Duplicate copy a ...

Page 96: ...click Create Instance This command activates the appropriate tool and selects the appropriate type to create the selected family in the drawing area create a new family instance in a view right click a loaded family and click Reload In the Open dialog navigate to the family location select it and click Open See Reloading Families on page 354 reload a family right click a loaded family and click Ed...

Page 97: ...ne of the following commands modify group types Delete Deletes the group type Rename Renames the group type Select All Instances Selects all instances of a group type in the project Properties Changes type properties under Groups navigate to the desired group right click the group name and click Duplicate The new group type displays in the Project Browser See Duplic ating Group Types on page 287 d...

Page 98: ...e drawing area on top of other open views The other views are still open but they are underneath the current view Use commands of the Window menu to arrange project views to suit your work style The default color of the drawing area background is white you can invert the color to black To manage views in the drawing area To display a project view that has not yet been opened navigate to the view i...

Page 99: ...ea 1 Click Settings menu Options 2 In the Options dialog click the Graphics tab 3 Select or clear the Invert background color option 4 Click OK Status Bar The status bar is in the lower left corner of the Revit Architecture window When you are using a command the status bar provides tips or hints on what to do When you are highlighting an element or component the status bar displays the name of th...

Page 100: ...s on page 160 Communication Center Communication Center provides quick access to resources at Autodesk including the following Live Update Maintenance Patches Receive automatic notifications whenever new maintenance patches are released from Autodesk Subscription Information and Extension Announcements Receive announcements and subscription program news if you are an Autodesk subscription member a...

Page 101: ...ou are using Communication Center Product Release Number The version of the product Product Language The language version of your product Country Region The country region that was specified in the Communication Center settings Your Subscription Contract Number The information sent to Autodesk if you entered it in the Error Report dialog Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from...

Page 102: ... roll the IntelliMouse wheel backward Type ZO for Zoom Out Press F8 and while pressing CTRL click and drag the cursor upwards type ZF for Zoom to Fit or type ZA for Zoom All to Fit zoom out to fit the entire model in the drawing area do one of the following scroll or pan around the drawing area Press and hold the IntelliMouse wheel and drag the mouse in the direction to scroll or pan Press F8 then...

Page 103: ...ype and type SA for Select All Instances select all elements of a particular type draw a pick box around the elements and click Filter Selection Select the desired types and click OK select all elements belonging to several types SHIFT click each element to deselect that element from a group of selected ele ments deselect an element press CTRL left arrow re select the previously selected elements ...

Page 104: ... you start a command such as Rotate and are not sure what to do next check the status bar It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command In addition a tool tip appears next to the cursor displaying the same information To cancel or exit the current command do either of the following Press ESC twice On the Design Bar click Modify Entering Dimensions As you draw a line...

Page 105: ... Imperial or Metric Revit Architecture creates a new project file using the default settings The default project name displays in the title bar of the Revit window To assign a different file name use File menu Save As Starting a New Project Using aTemplate 1 Start Revit Architecture 2 Click File menu New Project or in the drawing area under Projects click Create a new project 3 In the New Project ...

Page 106: ...t the appropriate file type to see those files in the folder 3 If desired select Audit to scan all elements in the project The Audit option can detect and fix corrupt elements in the project However it can greatly increase the time required to open files Use this option only for periodic maintenance of large workset enabled files or when you are preparing to upgrade 4 If you are opening a worksets...

Page 107: ... into and click OK Navigate to the Families branch of the Project Browser to see the new family Opening Revit Files from Windows Explorer To open files in Revit Architecture from Windows Explorer use any of the following methods In an Explorer window double click a project or family file Drag a project from Windows Explorer into an active session of Revit Architecture Drag a family file from Windo...

Page 108: ...rkshared projects have 3 backups and workshared projects have up to 20 backups See Backup and Journal Files on page 71 Make this a Central File after save Sets the current workset enabled file to be the central file See Creating a Central File from an Existing Workshared File on page 1209 Compact File Reduces file sizes when saving workset enabled files During a normal save Revit Architecture only...

Page 109: ...the same folder as the project file You can specify the maximum number of backup files that Revit Architecture saves See Specifying the Number of Backup Files on page 71 If the number of backup files exceeds the maximum then Revit Architecture purges the oldest files For example if the maximum is 3 backup files and the project folder contains 5 backup files then Revit Architecture deletes the olde...

Page 110: ...ems during a Revit session your support provider may ask you to send the journal file and any backup files to help with the troubleshooting process If you do not encounter problems during a Revit session the journal file is of little use and can be deleted To automate the deletion of old journal files see General Options on page 505 Closing Revit Files 1 Click File menu Close 2 If you have not sav...

Page 111: ...ss Using levels and grids You can begin the design process by defining levels and grids for the structure See Levels on page 1041 and Grids on page 1033 Importing data If you started the design process using another CAD program such as AutoCAD you can import existing data Revit Architecture imports various CAD formats including DWG DXF DGN and ACIS SAT files as well as SketchUp SKP files and Indus...

Page 112: ...es are classes of elements in a category A family groups elements with a common set of parameters properties identical use and similar graphical representation Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties but the set of properties their names and meaning is the same For example six panel colonial doors could be considered one family although the doors that co...

Page 113: ...ents in a project To access the dialog click Element Properties on the Options Bar or right click an element and click Element Properties on the shortcut menu The content of the Element Properties dialog varies depending on the type of element The following image shows the Element Properties dialog for a wall Building with Elements 75 ...

Page 114: ... for a selected family Select a type from the list Type Parameters In the Element Properties dialog under Type Parameters you can see parameters that apply to all elements of the same type as the selected instance element Use the scroll bar to see more parameters To change a type parameter click Edit New When you change a type parameter it applies to all instances of this type Instance Parameters ...

Page 115: ...dow updates accordingly To preview a family type 1 In the project select an element and click Element Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New The Type Properties dialog displays 3 To see or hide a preview of the family type click the Preview button at the bottom of the dialog As you change type parameters the preview image updates to reflect the changes Manipulating the previe...

Page 116: ...78 Chapter 3 Revit Essentials ...

Page 117: ...r information on detail views and drafting views see Detailing on page 1074 For information on area plans see Area Analysis on page 945 For information on linked Revit models see Linking Revit Models on page 1213 PlanViews The floor plan view is the default view in a new project Most projects include at least one floor plan Floor plan views are created automatically as you add new levels to your p...

Page 118: ...appropriate view scale for the new view 5 Click OK NOTE If you create duplicate plan views the duplicate view displays in the Project Browser with the following notation Level 1 1 where the value in parentheses increases with the number of duplicates Creating a Reflected Ceiling PlanView 1 Click View menu New Ceiling Plan or on the View tab of the Design Bar click Ceiling Plan 2 In the New RCP dia...

Page 119: ... range of level 3 you can clip the wall from view using the Depth Clipping parameter The following image illustrates this You activate this feature using the Depth Clipping parameter for the plan view The back clip plane is defined by the View Depth parameter which is part of the view s View Range properties NOTE Plan views include floor plan views reflected ceiling plan views detail plan views an...

Page 120: ...s affect printing To cut by the back clip plane 1 In the Project Browser right click the plan view you want to cut by the back clip plane and click Properties Alternatively if the view is active in the drawing area right click and click View Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog find the Depth Clipping parameter The Depth Clipping parameter is available for plan and site views 3 Click the ...

Page 121: ...Displaying a PlanView Double click its name in the Project Browser If the view is open but hidden behind another view click Window menu view name Plan Region The Plan Region command lets you define a region within a plan view that has a different view range from the overall view Plan regions are useful for split level plans or for displaying inserts above or below the cut plane Plan regions are cl...

Page 122: ...fset cannot be lower than the cut plane offset and the cut plane offset cannot be lower than the bottom offset For more details about view range options see View Range on page 198 7 Click Finish Sketch You do not have to enter sketch mode to edit the shape of a plan region Each boundary line of the plan region is a shape handle as shown in the following image Select the shape handle and drag it to...

Page 123: ...d bathrooms ElevationTags You designate elevations with an elevation tag The tag snaps to walls as you drag it around with the cursor You can set different properties for the tag See Modifying Elevation Symbol Properties on page 91 The elevation view arrowhead is visible in a plan view provided the elevation view s crop region intersects the view range of the plan view If you resize the crop regio...

Page 124: ...k the arrowhead once to view the clip plane Elevation symbol with clip plane The end points of clip planes snap and join to walls You can resize the width of the elevation by dragging the blue controls 9 In the Project Browser select the new elevation view The elevation view is designated by a letter and number for example Elevation 1 a Displaying an ElevationView There are several ways to display...

Page 125: ...Far Clipping parameter and select an option For more information see Cutting an Elevation Section or Callout View by the Far Clip Plane on page 87 2 Drag the blue dots or the arrows to resize the clip plane Cutting an Elevation Section or CalloutView by the Far Clip Plane You can cut an elevation section or callout view at the far clip plane You activate this feature using the Far Clipping paramet...

Page 126: ...roperties dialog find the Far Clipping parameter The Far Clipping parameter is available for elevation section and callout views To use this parameter in a callout view for the Far Clip Settings parameter specify Independent 3 Click the button in the Value column The Far Clipping dialog displays 4 In the Far Clipping dialog select an option and click OK 5 Enter a value for Far Clip Offset This is ...

Page 127: ...5 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the reference elevation The reference elevation appears in the drawing area with the default reference label as shown in the following image To change the label text select the reference elevation symbol and click Edit the Reference Label type parameter 6 On the Design Bar click Modify to exit the Elevation command 7 Optionally select the e...

Page 128: ...2 Place the framing elevation symbol perpendicular to the selected grid line and in the direction of view to display 3 Press ESC to finish 4 Double click the callout head to open the framing elevation The view represents a full height view of the area at the work plane of the grid or of the reference plane The view is constrained to the surrounding grids or limits of the reference plane 90 Chapter...

Page 129: ...e model You can draw them in plan section elevation and detail views Section views display as section representations in intersecting views You can create building wall and detail section views Each type has a unique graphical display and each is listed in a different location in the Project Browser Building and wall section views appear in the Sections Building Section branch and Sections Wall se...

Page 130: ...double click the section header or select the section view from the Sections leaf of the Project Browser The section view changes when the design changes or the section line is moved SectionTagVisibility The section tag is visible in plan elevation and other section views provided its crop region intersects the view range For example if you resize the crop region of the section view so that it no ...

Page 131: ...iew specific It affects the display of the section only in the view where the break was made Controlling the Line Style of Broken Section Lines 1 Click Settings menu View Tags Section Tags 2 Change the value of the Broken Section Display Style property to Continuous or Gapped Gapped is the default If you select Continuous the section line displays according to the Broken Section Line style defined...

Page 132: ...onView You can split sections into segments that are orthogonal to the view direction This allows you to vary a section view to show disparate parts of the model without having to create a different section In the following figure a typical section is drawn on the model The section produces the following view Modify the section as shown and the resulting section view changes 94 Chapter 4 ProjectVi...

Page 133: ...he Options Bar click Split Segment 3 Place the cursor on the section line at the point it is to be segmented and click 4 Move the cursor to the side of the split to move and move the cursor in a direction orthogonal to the view direction 5 Click to place the section Segmented SectionView 95 ...

Page 134: ...nts The break control displays as a Z on the section line Click it to break up the section even further When you do the section has more controls for resizing segments Merging Segmented SectionViews To change the segmented line into a continuous line move segments toward one another so that they form a continuous line and merge Reference Sections Reference sections are sections that reference an e...

Page 135: ...effect on the crop region of the referenced view If you double click the reference section head the referenced view opens The reference section head includes a label To change the label text edit the Reference Label parameter It is a type parameter of the section family Any sections placed in a drafting view must be reference sections They do not create a new section view The Ref This View option ...

Page 136: ...n is a reference section Modifying SectionView Properties 1 Select the section line 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog edit Type or Instance properties as desired 4 When finished click OK NOTE You cannot modify the Detail Number and Sheet Number properties for a section Those values are automatically filled in when the section view is added to a sheet CalloutViews A callout shows part of a...

Page 137: ...Callout views accessed from tags in the parent view CalloutTag Parts A callout tag is an annotation element that marks the location of a callout in a parent view Callouts Overview 99 ...

Page 138: ...See Detail Views on page 1075 The detail view displays in the Project Browser under Views all Detail Views For a detail callout you can specify whether its callout tag displays in the parent view only or displays in the parent view and intersecting views For intersecting views you can automatically hide the callout tag if the scale is coarser than a specified value Furthermore you can specify whet...

Page 139: ...d a detail callout or a view callout to a plan section detail or elevation view When you draw the callout bubble in a view Revit Architecture creates a callout view You can then add details to the callout view to provide more information about that part of the building model NOTE To create a reference callout see Creating a Reference Callout on page 107 1 In a project click View menu New Callout o...

Page 140: ...rties for Callout Tags on page 106 change the line color weight or style see Creating a Callout Tag Family on page 106 change the radius of the corners For the leader line see Changing Display Properties for Callout Tags on page 106 change the line color weight or style see Adjusting the Callout Leader Line on page 103 change the location of the leader line Changing the CalloutTag Family for a Cal...

Page 141: ...s of the callout bubble define the part of the building model that displays in the callout view To change the callout boundaries do either of the following In the callout view drag the crop region boundaries In the parent view of the callout select the callout bubble Drag a blue dot to change a boundary of the callout If you change a callout boundary in one view Revit Architecture automatically up...

Page 142: ...callout bubble and leader line See Callout Tag Parts on page 99 Use the Family Editor to create a callout head family to define the shape of the callout head and the information that it contains In a project create a callout tag family to specify the callout head family to use and the radius of the corners of the callout bubble To define the line weight color and style for the callout bubble and l...

Page 143: ...sheet number When you place the callout view on a sheet the callout head in the parent view updates to show the detail number and the sheet number for the callout To add a label to the callout head do the following a In the Family Editor click Label b Move the cursor to the drawing area and click where you want the information to display in the callout head c On the Edit Label dialog under Categor...

Page 144: ...olor and pattern used for callout bubbles and leader lines The settings that you specify here apply to all callouts in the project To change the line styles for callout bubbles and leader lines 1 In a project click Settings menu Object Styles 2 Click the Annotation Objects tab 3 Under Category expand Callout Boundary 4 Use the Line Weight Line Color and Line Pattern columns to specify the desired ...

Page 145: ...an elevation section callout and drafting views Multiple reference callouts can point to the same view When using reference callouts consider the following Reference callouts in section plan elevation or callout views can reference cropped views of the same type as the view in which the reference callout is placed Reference callouts in drafting views can reference any plan section elevation or cal...

Page 146: ...plays in the Project Browser under Views all Drafting Views Create the drafting view as desired For instructions see Drafting Views on page 1079 Changing the Reference Label By default the callout head for a reference callout includes a label such as Sim an abbreviation of Similar You can change this label to meet project needs or corporate standards For example you can use Mirror or Reverse as th...

Page 147: ... OK Related topics Detail View Instance Properties on page 1077 View Properties on page 210 3DViews You can create perspective and orthographic 3D views in Revit Architecture Perspective 3DViews Perspective 3D views show the building model in a 3D view where components that are further away appear smaller and components that are closer appear larger You can select elements in a perspective view an...

Page 148: ...a name to the view 3D View1 3D View2 and so on To rename the view in the Project Browser right click it and select Rename You can use a section box to limit the viewable portion of a 3D view See Using a Section Box in a 3D View on page 111 Creating an Orthographic 3DView Click View menu New Default 3D View or on the toolbar click This places the camera above the southeast corner of the model with ...

Page 149: ... See Using a Section Box in a 3D View on page 111 Using a Section Box in a 3DView You can use a section box to clip the viewable portion of a 3D view When you enable a section box in a 3D view the only change to the view is the addition of the section box The following image shows a 3D view with a section box enabled After you enable the section box you can modify its extents using drag controls i...

Page 150: ...View menu Visibility Graphics 2 In the Visibility Graphics dialog click the Annotation Categories tab 3 Clear the check box for Section Boxes and click OK This hides the section box extents in the view Select the check box to show the extents Rotating a 3DView The target point defines the axis of rotation for a 3D view You can rotate a 3D view about this axis by modifying the camera level and its ...

Page 151: ...th east west northeast northwest southeast or southwest Top places the camera at the top of the model By Plane opens the Select Orientation Plane dialog where you can select a work plane to orient the view to For more information about work plane options see Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 To Other View opens the Orient to Other View dialog where you can select another view The camera moves ...

Page 152: ... is selected in all views where the camera is visible such as plan elevation and other 3D views Selected camera in plan view Selected camera in 3D view Selected camera in elevation view 3 In the Project Browser double click the view you want to modify the camera position in for example plan or elevation 114 Chapter 4 ProjectViews ...

Page 153: ... value of Custom for the view scale you can enter a ratio in the value field for this property Scale Value Applies the detail level setting to the view coarse medium or fine Detail level Opens the Visibility Graphics dialog where you can set visibility options for the view Visibility Graphics Overrides Changes the display to Hidden Line Wireframe Shading or Shading with Edges Model Graphics Style ...

Page 154: ...age of the 3D view See Changing Render Settings for a View on page 1170 Render Settings Indicates whether the 3D view is Perspective See Creating a Perspective 3D View on page 110 This is a read only value Perspective Height of the camera Eye Elevation Height of the target point Target Elevation Phasing Phase Filter name applied to the view See Phase Filters on page 1265 Phase Filter The Phase nam...

Page 155: ...iew 4 If you are in a plan view you can vary the height of the camera by offsetting it from a selected level Enter a height in the Offset text box and select a level from the Level menu This can give you the effect that the camera is going up a flight of stairs 5 Place the cursor in a view and click to place a key frame 6 Move the cursor in the desired direction to draw the path 7 Click again to p...

Page 156: ...position and direction of the camera Dragging the Camera to a New Frame 1 For Controls select Active Camera 2 Drag the camera along the path to the desired frame or key frame The camera snaps to key frames 3 You can also type the frame number in the Frames text box 4 While the camera is active and located at a key frame you can drag the target point of the camera and the far clip plane If the came...

Page 157: ...walkthrough path You can change the speed by increasing or decreasing the total number of frames or by increasing or decreasing the number of frames per second Enter the desired value for either 3 To change the accelerator value for key frames clear the Uniform Speed check box and enter a value for the desired key frame in the Accelerator column Valid values for the Accelerator are between 0 1 and...

Page 158: ... export only a specific range of frames For this option enter the frame range in the entry boxes Frames second As you change the number of frames per second the total time automatically updates 4 Under Format specify Model Graphics Style Dimensions and Zoom to the desired values 5 Click OK 6 Accept the default output file name and path or browse to a new location and enter a new name 7 Select the ...

Page 159: ...plays a sample of a cut or surface pattern and text identifying the material associated with that pattern Phasing Shows a section of wall drawn with a selected graphic override and identifying text Legends can be added to multiple sheets Any elements that can be placed in drafting views such as detail lines text dimensions and filled regions can be placed in a legend NOTE A component that is place...

Page 160: ...such as a door or window the symbol displays with the host in floor plan representation You can specify a value for the Host Length d Place the symbol in the view Alternate method for adding annotation symbols a On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Symbol b In the Type Selector select an annotation type and place the symbol in the view 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Text 6 In...

Page 161: ... Types Using the Match Tool on page 325 Modifying Legend Component Properties 1 Open a legend view 2 Select a legend component and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog specify the view direction host length if applicable detail level and component type By default the legend component acquires its detail level from the project view If the model family type was created to show different geometry...

Page 162: ...ect that affect the schedule it automatically updates to reflect those changes You can add a schedule to a drawing sheet See Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1002 You can export a schedule to another software program such as a spreadsheet program Types of Schedules You can create several types of schedules Schedules or Quantities Key Schedules Material Takeoffs Annotation Schedules or Note Blo...

Page 163: ...y list A default name appears in the Name text box which you can change as necessary 3 Select Schedule building components NOTE Do not select Schedule keys If you want to create a key schedule see Key Schedules on page 125 4 Specify the phase 5 Click OK 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog specify the schedule properties See Specifying Schedule Properties on page 128 7 Click OK Key Schedules Schedu...

Page 164: ... key For example you might select a room in a plan view 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog find the key name for example Room Style 4 Select a value for the property from the list When you apply the new style read only properties appear in the list of instance parameters These are the properties defined in the key schedule Applying the Key to a Component Schedule 1 Create a schedule for th...

Page 165: ...hedule and click OK 3 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog for Available Fields select the material attributes 4 Optionally sort and group or format the schedule See Specifying Schedule Properties on page 128 5 Click OK to create the material takeoff schedule The material takeoff schedule displays and the view is listed in the Project Browser under Schedules Quantities Annotation Schedules No...

Page 166: ...en If you want to click a field name in the Available Fields box and click Add The order of the fields in the Scheduled Fields box shows the order in which they appear in the schedule add a field to the Scheduled Fields list select it from the Scheduled Fields list and click Remove remove a name from the Scheduled Fields list select the field and click Move Up or Move Down move a field up or down ...

Page 167: ...le the Family Type Family and Type Level and Material parameters become read only for elements in both the host and linked model You also cannot filter a schedule by the Family Type Family and Type Level and Material parameters You can include project information such as the client name or the project address and information about the linked Revit model such as the instance name or the file name i...

Page 168: ...y linked in the main project unload the linked model To unload the linked Revit model a Click File menu Manage Links b In the Manage Links dialog click the Revit tab c Select the linked model and click Unload d Click Yes to confirm and click OK to exit the Manage Links dialog 6 In the main model open a sheet view 7 Click Edit menu Paste from Clipboard 8 If you unloaded the linked Revit model you n...

Page 169: ...le 1 If you need to include room information in an existing door schedule do the following a Open the door schedule b Right click in the schedule and click View Properties c In the Element Properties dialog click Edit for the Fields parameter If you are creating a new door schedule do the following a Click View menu New Schedules Quantities b In the New Schedule dialog select Doors as the category...

Page 170: ...e field to the Scheduled Fields list then hide it on the Formatting tab An example of how you might use a filter is in a door schedule that you want to filter by level In the Filter tab you can choose Level as your filtering parameter and set its value to Level 3 Only the doors that are on level 3 display in the schedule Sorting Fields in a Schedule On the Sorting Grouping tab of the Schedule Prop...

Page 171: ...ls Totals only Displays subtotals only for columns that can have them Blank Line insert a blank line between sort groups Itemize every instance This option displays all instances of an element in individual rows If you clear this option multiple itemize every instance of an element in the schedule instances collapse to the same row based on the sorting parameter If you do not specify a sorting par...

Page 172: ...134 Chapter 4 ProjectViews ...

Page 173: ...a column that can have a total Examples of columns having subtotals are Cost and Count You add these columns using the Formatting tab Title and totals Displays title and subtotal information Count and totals Displays count values and subtotals Totals only Displays subtotals only for those columns that can have them 5 Click OK Adding ColumnTotals to a Schedule 1 In the Project Browser right click t...

Page 174: ...ct Calculate Totals This setting is available only for fields that can be totaled such as room display subtotals for a numeric column in a group area cost count or room perimeter If you clear the Grand Totals option on the Sorting Grouping tab no totals display For more information see Adding Column Totals to a Schedule on page 135 select the field then select Hidden field This option is useful wh...

Page 175: ...s specify the font for the body text Formatting Units and Number Fields in a Schedule 1 In the Project Browser right click the schedule name and select Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog for Formatting click Edit 3 Select a length includes height fields area volume angle or Number field from the list NOTE A Number field is a project parameter or calculated value that was created as a Nu...

Page 176: ...roperties 2 In the Element Properties dialog for Formatting click Edit 3 Select the Cost field or a Currency field from the Fields list NOTE A Currency field is a parameter or calculated value that was created as a Currency type 4 Click Field Format 5 Clear the Use project settings option 6 For Rounding select an appropriate value If you select Custom enter a value in the Rounding increment text b...

Page 177: ...ld formatting showing or hiding grid lines calculating totals outlines and underlines NOTE The grid lines outlines and underlines used in these samples are custom line styles To create your own line styles see Creating a Line Style on page 485 Schedule Field Formatting CalculatingTotals Specifying Schedule Properties 139 ...

Page 178: ...Schedule with Grid Lines Schedule with Grid Lines and an Outline 140 Chapter 4 ProjectViews ...

Page 179: ...schedules update automatically when you modify the project For example if you move a wall the square footage updates in a room schedule accordingly When you change the properties of building components in the project the associated schedule updates automatically For example you could select a door in the project and change the manufacturer property of it The door schedule would reflect the change ...

Page 180: ...s above the grouped column headings as shown in the following image 4 Enter text in the new row as necessary Text in the new heading row is centered To modify the text in a column group heading click the heading field and edit the text To delete the column heading row select the heading and on the Options Bar click Ungroup or right click in the heading cell and click Ungroup Headers Hiding Schedul...

Page 181: ...nsert and click Open All the views that are saved with the project display in the Insert Views dialog 3 Select the views to display from the list 4 Check the views you would like to insert and click OK A new schedule view is created in the Project Browser with all the saved formatting of the original schedule and all the parameter fields that may have been customized for that schedule Foundation F...

Page 182: ...ow only the bottom column header exports Multiple rows as formatted all column headers export including grouped column header cells Export group headers footers and blank lines specifies whether sort group header rows footers and blank lines export 5 Under Output options specify how you want to display the data in the output file Field delimiter specifies whether fields in the output file are sepa...

Page 183: ... visible a matchline indicating where the view is split dashed blue line and view references 1 A102 and 1 A101 NOTE In the following image the graphic display of the matchline has been overridden The default graphic display of a matchline is a dashed black line SupportedViewTypes for DependentViews You can create dependent views for plan views elevation views section views and callout views When y...

Page 184: ...all Join Display Discipline Color Scheme Location Color Scheme Phase Filter Phase Associated Level Default View Template View Range Depth Clipping Far Clipping Far Clip Offset The following properties can vary between the primary view and dependent views Orientation Identity Data properties with the exception of the Default View Template property Extent properties with the exceptions of View Range...

Page 185: ... display model and annotation crop regions For more information see Crop Regions on page 163 Adding Matchlines for DependentViews Matchlines are sketch lines that you can add to a view to indicate where a view is split as shown in the following image You can customize the look of matchlines by editing the line weight color and pattern in the Object Styles dialog See Object Styles on page 484 You c...

Page 186: ...ctions views since specifying top and bottom level constraints do not apply in these view types Description Name Constraints Specify the top level on which the matchline is visible Top Constraint Specify a distance above the top level on which you want the matchline to be visible Top Offset Specify the bottom level on which the matchline is visible Bottom Constraint Specify a distance below the bo...

Page 187: ...rimary view and all related dependent views except for the view that it is referencing For example if you have a view split into 2 dependent views left and right and you add a view reference to the right view to reference the left the view reference appears in the primary view and in the right view but not in the left view To hide view references 1 Click View menu Visibility Graphics or use the ke...

Page 188: ...ed elements linked Revit model elements and workset elements for each view in a project The settings that you are overriding are those specified at the project level Project level settings are specified in the Object Styles dialog See Object Styles on page 484 You can override the cut projection and surface display for model categories and filters For annotation categories and imported categories ...

Page 189: ... Show 1 hour 2 hour and other fire rated enclosures on a half toned floor plan in a manner so that you can distinguish the ratings Overhead exit signs and sprinklers can appear in one color and wall mounted alarm devices and fire extinguishers can appear in another color Restoration Work Show periods of existing materials in a building being reviewed for historic alterations For example 17th centu...

Page 190: ...are not drawn In Hidden Line view and Shaded with Edges view parts of edges are hidden An edge can be hidden by the face of any non transparent element and by a face of its own element even when it is marked transparent Edges are not hidden by other transparent elements Projection Lines edit the line weight color and pattern Surface Patterns edit visibility color and pattern Cut Lines edit the lin...

Page 191: ...ns edit the fill color and fill pattern 7 Select the Halftone check box next to a category to blend the line color of an element about 50 percent with the background color of the view This produces a lighter shade for the line color 8 For model categories you can also override the detail level For Detail Level select a detail level at which to display the element category This overrides the detail...

Page 192: ...e this method the element s category is already highlighted when the Visibility Graphics dialog opens Alternatively you can click View menu Visibility Graphics or use the keyboard shortcut VG or VV NOTE If you open the Visibility Graphics dialog from a drafting view only those categories that can appear in a drafting view display 2 Click the Model Categories Annotation Categories or Imported Categ...

Page 193: ...drawing area and click Override Graphics in View By Category 3 In the Visibility Graphics dialog click the Model Categories tab If you are editing model categories for elements in a linked Revit model a Click the Revit Links tab b Click the button in the Display Settings column c In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog click Custom d Click the Model Categories tab e Select Custom from the drop dow...

Page 194: ...lects all walls in the view that have the 2 hour value for the Fire Rating parameter You can then select the filter define the visibility and graphic display settings such as line style and color and apply the filter to the view When you do this all walls that meet the criteria defined in the filter update with the appropriate visibility and graphics settings Creating a Filter 1 Click Settings men...

Page 195: ...he Filter By lists The parameters that display are those that are common to all selected categories For example you can create a filter to show only 2 hour fire rated doors In this case you would select only the doors category If you wanted to create a filter to show 2 hour fire rated doors and walls you would select the doors and walls categories 6 From the Filter By list select the parameter to ...

Page 196: ...ter are returned Is less than Looks for values less than the value you enter If you enter 23 values less than but not equal to 23 are returned Is less than or equal to Looks for values less than or equal to the value you enter If you enter 23 values of 23 and lower are returned Contains Selects a character anywhere in a string If you enter the character H all attributes that contain the character ...

Page 197: ... Visibility check box to turn visibility of the filtered object on or off 6 Override the projection surface and cut line styles and projection patterns as necessary 7 Check the Halftone option to make filtered objects appear at halftone 8 Check the Transparent option to make filtered objects transparent 9 Click OK or Apply to activate the filter for that view Filters are view specific OK activates...

Page 198: ... or categories of elements in a view permanently or temporarily When you hide an element that is used as a reference for a tag or a dimension the tag or dimension is also hidden Hiding a revision cloud does not affect the revision table Hiding Elements 1 In the drawing area select the element to hide 2 Click View menu Hide in View Elements or Category or right click the element and click Hide in V...

Page 199: ...tegory in a view The Hide command hides the selected elements in the view and the Isolate command shows the selected elements and hides all other elements in the view The command affects only the active view in the drawing area Element visibility reverts back to its original state when you close the project unless you make the changes permanent Temporary Hide Isolate also does not affect printing ...

Page 200: ...lick Apply Hide Isolate to View If you make temporarily hidden elements permanent you can reveal them at a later time and unhide them if necessary For information see Revealing and Unhiding Hidden Elements on page 160 Overriding Individual Lines in an Element You can use the Linework tool to override the line style of individual element lines For more information see Changing the Line Style of Ele...

Page 201: ...em The overrides are applied to the cut edges of all hosts in the view Override Cut Line Styles Use the override feature to assign different line weights to the cut lines and structural core lines of a wall in plan view 1 Open a plan view 2 Click View menu Visibility Graphics 3 Under Override Host Layers select Cut Line Styles and click Edit 4 In the Host Layer Line Styles dialog assign line weigh...

Page 202: ... drawn Annotations such as symbols tags keynotes and dimensions that reference hidden or cropped model elements do not appear in the view even if they are inside the annotation crop region For example if a door has been cropped from the view by the model crop the door tag will not be visible even if it is positioned inside the annotation crop Datum grids and levels that cross the model crop region...

Page 203: ...lick View Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog select or clear the check box for Annotation Crop 3 Click OK In the drawing area select the crop region and both annotation and model crops display The interior crop is the model crop and the exterior crop is the annotation crop Resizing Crop Regions Graphically You can use drag controls and break line controls to resize a crop region Break l...

Page 204: ... is lost If you later turn the crop region back on you need to recreate the split crop regions Turning off the crop region is not the same as hiding the crop region When you turn off the crop region a message notifies you that split crop region information will be lost You can hide a crop region and then show it again and split crop region information is retained Resizing Crop Regions Explicitly Y...

Page 205: ...iew mode and Scale mode In Field of View mode you are stretching the crop region to the specified size For example if you change a crop region from 100 mm wide by 75 mm high to 50 mm wide by 25 mm high the crop region updates accordingly Field of View mode is for perspective and non perspective views In Scale mode you change either the height or the width and Revit Architecture maintains the aspec...

Page 206: ... rotates and the value is propagated to the viewport s View Rotation on Sheet instance parameter When you rotate a viewport the view title also rotates Rotating aView by the Crop Region When you rotate a view by rotating the crop region the model rotates in the opposite direction of the crop region To rotate a view by its crop region 1 Open the project view to rotate 2 On the View Control Bar clic...

Page 207: ...t appears partially transparent over the drawing area by default to not completely obscure the view of the model If the ViewCube is active it appears opaque and obscures the view of the objects in the model In addition to controlling the opacity level of the ViewCube when it is inactive you can also control its size on screen position and the display of the compass The settings used to control the...

Page 208: ...when you are viewing the default 3D view If you are viewing a previously saved orthographic 3D view or a perspective camera 3D view the view is simply saved with the new orientation and you are not prompted to supply a unique name Lock to Current Selection Uses the selected objects to define the center of the view when a view orientation change occurs NOTE If you click Home on the ViewCube the vie...

Page 209: ...king one of the faces on the ViewCube You use the other twenty defined areas to access angled views of a model Clicking one of the corners on the ViewCube reorients the current view of the model to a three fourths view based on a viewpoint defined by three sides of the model Clicking one of the edges reorients the view of the model to a three fourths view based on two sides of the model Clicking o...

Page 210: ...are displayed one on each side of the ViewCube With the triangles you can rotate the current view to display the face view indicated by the triangle FrontView You can define the Front view of a model The Front view is used to define the direction of the face views on the ViewCube Along with the Front view the Up direction of a model is also used to define the direction of the face views on the Vie...

Page 211: ... Front to View then select a view NOTE The Front view can only be set to an existing elevation view in the project To restore the Front view Right click on the ViewCube and click Reset Front HomeView You can define a Home view for a model so you can restore a familiar view when using the navigation tools The Home view is a special view of the model The default Home position is the existing orienta...

Page 212: ...ng to the extents of a model will not occur when Lock to Current Selection is enabled even if the ViewCube is set to zoom to extents after each view orientation change To lock to the current selection Right click on the ViewCube and click Lock to Current Selection If Lock to Current Selection is checked when a view orientation change occurs the ViewCube uses the selected objects to calculate the c...

Page 213: ...irection and then select a direction SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that allow you to access different 2D and 3D navigation tools from a single tool Overview of SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that are divided into different sections known as wedges Each wedge on a wheel represents a single navigation tool You can pan zoom or manipulate the current view of a mode...

Page 214: ... Building Wheel Mini View Object Wheel Tour Building Wheel Ba sic Wheels View Object Wheel Basic Wheels 2D Steering Wheel Full Navigation Wheel First Contact Balloon The first time you run Revit Architecture after installation and open a 3D view the First Contact balloon for the wheels is displayed The First Contact balloon serves as an introduction to the purpose of the wheels and how you can use...

Page 215: ... SteeringWheels Options dialog box ControlTooltips for Wheels and Messages forTools Tooltips are displayed for each wedge and button on a wheel as the cursor hovers over them The tooltips appear below the wheel and identify what action will be performed if the wedge or button is clicked You can turn the display of tooltips on or off in the SteeringWheels Options dialog box Similar to tooltips tool...

Page 216: ...k Show Tool Messages Messages are displayed when you use the navigation tools 4 Click OK Wheel Menu From the Wheel menu you can switch between different wheels Use the Wheel menu to switch between the big and mini wheels that are available go to the Home view change the preferences of the current wheel and control the behavior of the orbit look and walk 3D navigation tools The menu items available...

Page 217: ...y a unique name Increase Decrease Focal Length Acts as a zoom lens on the model because it changes the focal length of the camera in a perspective view Move Crop Boundary Moves the position of the crop boundary around in a perspective view Re center Crop Boundary Repositions the crop boundary to the center of the perspective view Help Launches the online Help system and displays the topic about th...

Page 218: ... to adjust the center of the current view or change the target point used for some of the navigation tools Zoom on page 191 Adjusts the magnification of the current view Rewind on page 188 Restores the most recent view orientation You can move backward or forward through previous views Orbit on page 186 Rotates the current view around a fixed pivot point The mini View Object wheel is divided into ...

Page 219: ... page 189 Slides the current view of a model along the Y axis of the screen The mini Tour Building wheel is divided into the following wedges Walk Top wedge on page 190 Simulates walking through a model Rewind Right wedge on page 188 Restores the most recent view You can move backward or forward through previous views Up Down Bottom wedge on page 189 Slides the current view of a model along the Y ...

Page 220: ...ification of the current view Walk Upper right wedge on page 190 Simulates walking through a model Rewind Right wedge on page 188 Restores the most recent view You can move backward or forward through previous views Up Down Lower right wedge on page 189 Slides the current view of a model along the Y axis of the screen Pan Bottom wedge on page 187 Repositions the current view by panning Look Lower ...

Page 221: ...el until the sphere is centered in the view and you are returned to the wheel The center point defined by the Center tool is used to constrain the Zoom tool and define the pivot point for the Orbit tool The Zoom tool is only constrained to the center point when used from the View Objects wheel unless the CTRL key is held down when using the Zoom tool on the Full Navigation wheel To specify a point...

Page 222: ...the cursor through the pivot point To adjust the distance between the current point of view and the pivot point you drag the cursor up or down after the pivot point is defined As you drag the cursor the current distance from the pivot point is displayed on a graphical element called the Drag Distance indicator The Drag Distance indicator has two marks on it that show the start and ending distances...

Page 223: ...e target point of the view raises dragging the cursor downward lowers the target point of the view If you do not like this behavior you can change it so moving the cursor upward lowers the target point of the view and downward raises the target point of the view To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool you use the SteeringWheels Options dialog box To look around the view 1 Display a wheel tha...

Page 224: ...et point of the current view is used as the pivot point for orbiting the model Select objects You can select objects before the Orbit tool is used to calculate the pivot point The pivot point is calculated based on the center of the extents of the selected objects Center tool You can specify a point on the model to use as the pivot point for orbiting with the Center tool on page 183 CTRL Click and...

Page 225: ...sor drag the cursor to rotate the model 6 Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel 7 Click Close to exit the wheel To turn on selection sensitivity for the Orbit tool 1 Display a wheel that has the Orbit tool 2 Right click on the wheel and click Options 3 In the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box click Selection Sensitivity for Orbit Tool The extents of any objects that ar...

Page 226: ...return to the wheel 4 Click Close to exit the wheel RewindTool The Rewind tool restores the most recent view You can also move backward or forward through previous views As you pan zoom orbit or use one of the other navigation tools to reorient the view of a model the previous view is saved to the navigation history The navigation history holds a representation of the previous views of the model a...

Page 227: ... exit the wheel Up DownTool The Up Down tool slides the current view of a model along the Y axis of the screen Unlike the Pan tool the Up Down tool does not significantly displace the model being viewed because the view is sliding along the Y axis of the screen The view slides up or down You can think of the Up Down tool as similar to looking in a fixed direction while riding in a glass elevator T...

Page 228: ...y look around while the current view moves parallel to the ground plane if the walk angle is not constrained you will fly in the direction you are looking To constrain the movement angle to the ground plane you use the SteeringWheels Settings dialog box Movement Speed As you walk or fly through a model you can control the movement speed The speed of movement is controlled by the distance that the ...

Page 229: ...ol on a wheel the current view is zoomed in by a factor of 25 percent If you are using the Full Navigation wheel Enable Single Click Incremental Zoom must be enabled in the SteeringWheels Options dialog box SHIFT click If you hold down the SHIFT key before you click the Zoom tool on a wheel the current view is zoomed out by a factor of 25 percent CTRL click If you hold down the CTRL key before you...

Page 230: ... In Click OK 2 Display a wheel that has the Zoom tool 3 Click the Zoom wedge The magnification of the model is increased and you are zoomed in closer to the model If you hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the Zoom wedge the model is zoomed out or you can hold down the CTRL key to zoom in 4 Click Close to exit the wheel To zoom a view in and out by dragging 1 Display the wheel 2 Click the Zoom ...

Page 231: ... ProjectViews The Zoom command changes the viewable area in the window The following Zoom options are available on the View menu Zoom in Region Zoom Out 2X Zoom to Fit Zoom All to Fit Sheet Size Pan Active View Previous Scroll Zoom Next Scroll Zoom You can also access zoom commands on the toolbar Some zoom commands are available on the shortcut menu when you right click in a view You can also zoom...

Page 232: ...objects in a drawing You can assign a different scale to each view in a project You can also create custom view scales To assign view scale 1 In the Project Browser right click the view and click Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog for View Scale select a value Alternatively you can select a scale from the View Control Bar To create a custom view scale 1 On the View Control Bar click the...

Page 233: ...al Concrete Components Revit Architecture provides the ability to control the display of structural concrete components that are in a hidden state in a view The display of invisible lines of walls floors framing columns and foundation elements are controlled by the following view parameters Discipline Discipline must be set to Structural for invisible lines to be represented as hidden Model Graphi...

Page 234: ... or on the Tools toolbar click 5 Select the element that will hide the other element 6 Select the other element to be hidden Section Elevation and CalloutViewTag Setup You can define the look of view tags used for sections elevations and callouts by editing their properties EditingType Properties forViewTags 1 Click Settings menu View Tags Callout Tags Elevation Tags or Section Tags 2 In the Eleme...

Page 235: ...96 2 On the Options Bar click 3 Select a value for the Hide at Scales Coarser Than parameter 4 Click OK CalloutTag Properties You can set the following parameters for callout tags Description Name The head used for the callout Callout Head Sets the angle of the corners of the callout Corner Radius ElevationTag Properties You can set the following parameters for elevation tags Description Name Spec...

Page 236: ...Specifies the shape of the section head Section Head Specifies the shape of the section tail Section Tail Specifies the line pattern of a segmented section For more information see Segmen ted Section View on page 94 Broken Section Display Style View Range Every plan and RCP view has a view property called View Range also known as a visible range The view range is a set of horizontal planes that co...

Page 237: ...ls Remain Absolute to One Another In the View Range dialog levels used to define the visible range are absolute to the current level of the view For example if you are in the Level 2 floor plan of a multi story building and you select Level 4 as the top clip Revit Architecture keeps Level 4 as the top clip plane even if you add levels between Level 2 and Level 4 If you were to delete Level 4 then ...

Page 238: ... and an offset from that level Elements display as defined by their object styles Elements above the offset value do not display Top Sets a height at which elements in a plan view are cut such that building components below the cut plane display in projection and others that intersect it display as cut Building components Cut plane that display as cut include walls roofs ceilings floors and stairs...

Page 239: ...ttom of the drawing area click the Model Graphics Style icon and select an option as shown in the following image To save a view with an applied model graphics style 1 Click View menu Orient Save View Alternatively a On the toolbar click The SteeringWheel displays in the drawing area b Right click the SteeringWheel and click Save View 2 Enter a name for the new 3D view and click OK The new view ap...

Page 240: ...of the intersection This may result in incorrect hidden line removal during export If you attempt to export a view of the design with hidden lines turned on you may see unexpected results when you open the view in another CAD application See Hidden Line Model Graphics Style on page 202 To see all visible lines Revit Architecture recommends that you first create an opening in one surface before pas...

Page 241: ...ge Shading with Edges Model Graphics Style The Shading with Edges command displays the image in shaded mode but with all non occluded edges drawn as well A default light source provides illumination for the shaded elements This command affects the current view only Setting up Shadow Studies You can include shadow studies as part of your presentation views Shadows are available for 2D and 3D model ...

Page 242: ...and Shadow Settings dialog includes predefined sunlight settings You can select one of these or define a new one 2 To create a new sunlight setting click Duplicate and enter a name 3 To define the sunlight setting based on a specific location Select By Date Time and Place Click the button next to Place and select a city on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog NOTE You can also ac...

Page 243: ...nel select a Silhouette style for example Wide Lines 4 Click OK To remove a line style from a silhouette edge 1 Click Tools menu Linework or on the Tools toolbar click 2 In the Type Selector select Not Silhouette 3 Select the edges in silhouette and the silhouette is removed For more information about the Linework command see Changing the Line Style of Elements on page 326 Finding ReferringViews T...

Page 244: ...t to view a specific set in the Project Browser The properties that you can choose from when creating a sort group or applying a filter to the Project Browser include project parameters and shared parameters For more information about project and shared parameters see Project Parameters on page 447 By default the Project Browser displays all views by view type and all sheets by sheet number and sh...

Page 245: ...rouping and select ascending or descending order 10 Click OK Editing a Project Browser Sort Group 1 Click Settings menu Browser Organization 2 In the Browser Organization dialog click the Views tab to edit a sort group for project views or click the Sheets tab to edit a sort group for sheets 3 Select a sort group 4 To rename the sort group click Rename 5 To edit the sort group properties click Edi...

Page 246: ...sts on sheets See Schedules on Sheets on page 1001 View lists can help you to do the following Manage views in a project Track the status of views Ensure that important views display on sheets in the construction document set Ensure that views are using consistent and appropriate settings You can use a view list to see and modify parameters for multiple views at once For example suppose you includ...

Page 247: ...hedule to a Sheet on page 1002 When you add a view list to a sheet you can perform the same functions as for schedules on sheets including the following Formatting the view list Splitting the view list Adjusting the width of columns Displaying column headings vertically instead of horizontally For instructions see Schedules on Sheets on page 1001 RenamingViews Revit Architecture uses default names...

Page 248: ...Family geometry changes depending on the detail levels Structural framing changes depending on detail level At coarse levels it appears as lines At medium and fine levels it appears with more geometry Click Edit to access the Visibility Graphics dialog Visibility Graphics Overrides Changes the display to Hidden Line Wireframe Shading or Shading with Edges See Model Graphic Styles on page 201 Model...

Page 249: ...ments in the view See Applying a Color Scheme on page 960 In a floor plan view or section view the color scheme to use for rooms and areas See Color Schemes on page 956 Color Scheme The name of the active view The view name appears in the Project Browser and in the title bar of the view It also appears as the name of the viewport on a sheet unless you define a value for the Title on Sheet paramete...

Page 250: ...cope box in a view you can associate the view s crop region with that scope box so the crop region is visible and matches the scope box extents This Scope Box property is available for plan elevation and section views When you select a scope box value for this property the Crop Region and Crop Region Visible properties be come read only The specific phase filter applied to the view Phase Filter Th...

Page 251: ...ly Temporary and permanent dimensions by default use the unit settings specified for the project For permanent dimensions you can create custom dimension types that override the default unit settings See Creating Custom Dimension Units on page 226 Temporary Dimensions As you create or select geometry Revit Architecture displays temporary dimensions around the component This is useful for placing t...

Page 252: ...tly increase when the temporary dimensions and constraints are not displayed ChangingTemporary Dimensions to Permanent Dimensions 1 Select a component in the drawing area 2 Click the dimension symbol that appears near the temporary dimension You can then modify the properties of the new dimension and change its type Permanent Dimensions A permanent dimension is a dimension that you specifically pl...

Page 253: ...imensions 3 If you are creating a dimension with walls select a value for Prefer which sets a snap point for the cursor Options are Wall centerlines Wall faces Center of core and Faces of core For example if you select Prefer wall centerlines the cursor first snaps to the centerline of a wall when you place it over the wall 4 For Pick select Individual References 5 Place the cursor at a reference ...

Page 254: ... string displays automatically and references the perpendicular grids that intersect the wall centerline NOTE If a grid line is coincident with another wall reference point for example the wall end point then a witness line is not created for the grid This avoids the creation of zero length dimension segments 4 Click OK to close the Auto Dimension Options dialog 5 Place the cursor on a wall so tha...

Page 255: ...regular shaped building Placing Horizontal orVertical Dimensions 1 Click Drafting menu Dimension or on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Dimension 2 On the Options Bar click Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions 3 Place the cursor at a reference point on an element such as a wall or a line or at the intersection of references such as a join between 2 walls The reference point highlights ...

Page 256: ...ponent not parallel to the first and click TIP You can select multiple reference points for the dimension Each element you are dimensioning must pass through a common point For example to create a multiple reference angular dimension among 4 walls each of the 4 walls must pass through a common point 5 Drag the cursor to size the angular dimension Choose the sector where you want the dimension to a...

Page 257: ... Bar click Dimension 2 On the Options Bar click Create Arc Length Dimensions 3 For Prefer select a snap option For example choose Prefer wall faces to have the cursor snap to the inside or outside wall face This aids in selecting the radial point 4 Place the cursor on the arc and click to select the radial point 5 Select the end points of the arc and move the cursor up and away from the arc wall 6...

Page 258: ...s or Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions These are both linear dimension styles 3 Click Element Properties 4 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 5 In the Type Properties dialog click Duplicate 6 In the Name dialog enter a name for the dimension such as Baseline Linear 3 32 Arial 7 Click OK 8 In the Type Properties dialog for the Dimension String Type parameter select Baseline 9 Cl...

Page 259: ...he tick mark for the dimension origin This setting is disabled when Origin Visibility is set to None Origin Tick Mark Specify the dimension line style Options are Dimension Line Style Continuous displays the dimension line as continu ous Segmented segments the dimension line Specify the length of the segments with the Length of Segment settings None shows no dimension line When you select the dime...

Page 260: ... an ordinate dimension style For more information see Creating an Ordinate Linear Dimension Style on page 220 4 In the drawing area select the first point for the dimension This is the origin 5 Continue to select the necessary reference points 6 When you have reached the last reference point move the cursor away from the last element and click The ordinate dimension displays Locking Permanent Dime...

Page 261: ... 1 Create a multi segmented dimension See Placing Permanent Dimensions on page 215 for information on creating dimensions 2 On the Design Bar click Modify 3 In the drawing area select the dimension and click the Dimension Equality symbol to make the dimension equally constrained 4 Select any element the dimension references except the one you want to anchor An anchor symbol appears near the dimens...

Page 262: ...emental text above below to the left or right of a permanent dimension value Also see Replacing Permanent Dimension Values with Text on page 224 To add supplemental text to a dimension value 1 In the drawing area select the dimension you want to edit 2 Click the dimension value The Dimension Text dialog displays 3 In the Dimension Value field select Use Actual Value Enter the text you want to disp...

Page 263: ...replace permanent dimension values with text 1 In the drawing area select the dimension you want to edit 2 Click the dimension value The Dimension Text dialog displays 3 In the Dimension Value field select Replace With Text 4 In the text box enter the text you want to display in place of the dimension value 5 Optionally enter text in the Above and or Below text fields 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK Perm...

Page 264: ...tton next to it 7 Clear the Use project settings check box 8 For Units select an appropriate unit 9 For Rounding select an appropriate value If you select Custom enter a value in the Rounding increment text box 10 If applicable select a Unit suffix 11 Click OK 12 Click OK twice to exit the dimension properties Dimensioning to Core in Compound Structures When constructing a compound wall with inser...

Page 265: ...mensions can be placed as spot elevations or spot coordinates Spot elevations can display the elevation of a selected point or the top and bottom elevation of an element Spot coordinates display the North South East West coordinates of a selected point and can also display the elevation of the selected point Spot Elevations Spot elevations display the actual elevation of a selected point Spot elev...

Page 266: ...e spot elevation without and with a leader b If the Leader option is selected optionally select the Shoulder option This adds a bend to the spot elevation leader The following image shows a spot elevation with and without a leader shoulder c If you are placing a relative spot elevation select an option for Relative Base d Select an option for Display Elevations NOTE This option is enabled when you...

Page 267: ...s for the spot elevation you can add text for the elevation indicator top indicator and bottom indicator This text can appear as a suffix or a prefix to the spot elevation value In addition you can edit the instance parameters for a spot elevation to add supplementary prefix and or suffix text to the single or upper value and the lower value The following list shows the order of appearance for tex...

Page 268: ...If you select this option the arrowhead looks like the filled elevation symbol If you do not select this option the arrowhead is a crosshairs symbol 5 Click OK 6 Place a spot elevation 7 Select the spot elevation click Element Properties and click Edit New 8 For Type select Target Leader 9 For Leader Arrowhead select Filled Elevation Target NOTE The Filled Elevation Target type is available for ot...

Page 269: ...ay in addition to the spot coordinates a Click Element Properties b In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New c Under Text select the Include Elevation option 5 Select an edge of an element or a point on a toposurface When you move the cursor over an element on which you can place the spot coordinate the spot coordinate value appears in the drawing area 6 If you are placing a spot coordinate...

Page 270: ...e value Indicator when set as Suffix type parameter Top Value Suffix instance parameter The following list shows the order of appearance for text relative to the bottom spot coordinate value Bottom Value Prefix instance parameter Indicator when set as Prefix type parameter Bottom spot coordinate value Indicator when set as Suffix type parameter Bottom Value Suffix instance parameter The following ...

Page 271: ...ening dimensions initially appear in blue or black bold text 2 Type the length value When you type a number a text box appears as shown below For example if you need a line that is 8 feet 6 inches long type the value as 8 6 3 Press Enter The sketch line is drawn the specified length Dimension Witness Lines You can move witness lines to new references for temporary and permanent dimensions You can ...

Page 272: ...ension you can control its distance from the element it is referencing and the reference point for the dimension 1 Create a linear dimension between 2 or more elements for example between 2 walls See Aligned Dimensions on page 215 2 Select a dimension line Blue controls appear on the witness lines 3 Place the cursor on one of the blue square controls at the end of the witness line and drag to resi...

Page 273: ...ure gives you the capability to customize the look of your dimensions Changing a DimensionValue 1 Select a component that the dimension references 2 Click the dimension value If the dimension is locked the lock control appears next to it Click the lock control to unlock the dimension so you can change it 3 In the edit box type a new value for the dimension and press ENTER Moving Dimension LineText...

Page 274: ...ameter 4 Click OK If you select an arrow tick mark see Controlling the Display Behavior of Dimension Arrows on page 236 for information on the behavior of arrow type tick marks Controlling the Display Behavior of Dimension Arrows When you select an arrow tick mark for dimension lines the arrows recognize when a dimension segment is too small to accommodate the arrows on the interior of the dimensi...

Page 275: ...k Mark on page 236 To control the display behavior of dimension arrow tick marks 1 In the drawing area select a dimension and click Element Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 3 Edit the following parameters Flipped Dimension Line Extension when dimension arrows flip this controls the length of the dimension line beyond the flipped arrows Length is measured from the end of...

Page 276: ...me Graphics Specify the formatting method for a string of dimensions This parameter is available for linear dimension styles NOTE Arc length dimensions are linear dimensions and have parameters Dimension String Type and Ordinate Dimension Settings for creating baseline and ordinate dimensions but these parameters have no effect on arc length dimensions Dimension String Type Options include Continu...

Page 277: ...which the witness line plots if you are printing at 100 percent Witness Line Extension You can select any of the annotations symbols loaded in the project The centerline symbol appears above the witness lines that reference the centerlines of family in Centerline Symbol stances and walls If the witness line does not reference a center plane you cannot place a centerline symbol above it Changes the...

Page 278: ...Sets the Microsoft True Type fonts for the dimensions Text Font If you set the value to opaque the dimension text is surrounded by a box that overlaps any geometry or text behind it in the view If you set the value to transpar Text Background ent the box disappears and everything not overlapped by the dimension text is visible Click the button to open the Format dialog You can then set the format ...

Page 279: ...traints When selected the spot elevation rotates with the component Rotate with Component Graphics Changes the look of the symbol head with the spot elevation Symbol Sets the appearance of the leader arrowhead The value None removes the arrow head See Specifying Arrowhead Styles on page 491 Leader Arrowhead Sets the weight of the leader line The higher the value the thicker the line Leader Line We...

Page 280: ...the text Specify horizontal Text Orientation or vertical When Rotate with Component is enabled text orientation is relative to the host element Click the button to open the Format dialog Clear the Use Project Settings option and set the appropriate values See Setting Project Units on page 492 Units Format Specify the position of the spot elevation with respect to the leader Options include Above L...

Page 281: ...ations or Bottom Elevation you can enter text to indicate that this value represents Bottom Indicator the bottom elevation of the element This text can be displayed as either a prefix or a suffix to the elevation value Specify placement of the top indicator as a prefix or a suffix Top Indicator as Prefix Suffix Specify placement of the bottom indicator as a prefix or a suffix Bottom Indicator as P...

Page 282: ...u can specify various parameters to change the appearance of the spot coordinate Description Name Constraints When selected the spot coordinate rotates with the component Rotate with Component Graphics Changes the look of the symbol head with the spot coordinate Symbol Sets the appearance of the leader arrowhead The value None removes the arrow head To define an arrowhead see Specifying Arrowhead ...

Page 283: ...from the symbol Text Offset from Symbol You can use positive or negative values to move the text in the direction you require Sets the font for the elevation text Text Font Sets the background for the text With opaque the background of the text itself covers objects behind it Transparent allows you to see objects behind the text Text Background Changes the position of the text to read horizontally...

Page 284: ...n Determines which coordinate value is placed on top Top Value Determines which coordinate value is placed on the bottom Bottom Value Lets you specify how to label the north south direction For instance you might enter X North South Indicator Lets you specify how to label the east west direction For instance you might enter Y East West Indicator Displays the spot elevation in addition to the spot ...

Page 285: ...n project views You create constraints by placing dimensions and locking them or by creating equality constraints Applying Constraints with Dimensions When you place permanent dimensions you can lock those dimensions When you lock a dimension you create a constraint A constraint dashed green line appears when you select its references as shown in the following image Constraint from locked dimensio...

Page 286: ...nging the EQ Label to the DimensionValue Multi segmented dimensions have an EQ label that displays directly above each segment of the dimension line The label displays when the values for all segments in the dimension are equal or if the values for the first and last segments of the dimension are equal If neither of these conditions is satisfied then the dimension segment cannot display the EQ lab...

Page 287: ...den For more information see Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 150 Removing Constraints 1 Select a dimension 2 Do any of the following Click a lock to unlock it Click the EQ symbol to remove an equality constraint The EQ symbol appears with a slash through it when the equality constraint is not applied Delete the dimension that corresponds to the constraint A warning appears ...

Page 288: ... the worksets of the elements they constrain In order to add a constraint the worksets of all the elements that can be moved by the constraint must be editable See Making Worksets Editable on page 1201 250 Chapter 5 Using Dimensions and Constraints ...

Page 289: ...gs and extrusions that are typically created using sketch mode There are also elements such as walls that are sketched but do not require the use of sketch mode Sketch mode is an environment in Revit Architecture that allows you to sketch elements whose size or shape cannot be determined automatically for example when you create or edit a sketch of a roof or a floor When you enter sketch mode the ...

Page 290: ...d elements whose size or shape cannot be determined automatically such as a roof extrusion or opening you enter sketch mode In sketch mode the Design Bar displays only the tools available for that sketch the tools vary depending on the type of element you are sketching There are also elements such as walls that are sketched but do not require the use of sketch mode The following tables list the co...

Page 291: ...s option is available for walls or lines when you draw a rectangle circle arc or polygon Radius Use a radius to specify a fixed radius for a circle a circle in which a polygon is inscribed or around which it is circumscribed an arc from center and endpoint or a tangent arc The preset radius puts constraints on the element or sketch so that fewer clicks are re quired to complete it With a preset ra...

Page 292: ...ift as you draw Shift constraints works as follows Constrains straight lines and radii of polygons to horizontal or vertical lines Limits the chords of 3 point arcs the radii of arcs from center and end points and the axis of ellipses to multiples of 45 degrees Limits 2 point and 3 point arcs to 90 180 or 270 degrees Sketching a Line 1 On the Design Bar select a tool that allows for a line such as...

Page 293: ... value Specifying a radius creates fillets at the corners of the rectangle The following image shows a rectangle sketched without Radius selected and a rectangle sketched with Radius selected NOTE If you specify a radius the Offset option is overridden 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the first corner of the rectangle 4 Move the cursor and click to specify the diagonal corner of the rectangl...

Page 294: ...d to a side of the polygon d Optionally select Offset and specify a value e Optionally select Radius and specify a value NOTE If you specify a radius the Offset option is overridden 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point for the polygon 4 Move the cursor and click to place the polygon Sketching Arcs There are several options for sketching arcs in Revit Architecture Arc passing thro...

Page 295: ...ng Constraints When Sketching on page 254 Sketching an Arc Passing throughThree Points 1 On the Design Bar select a tool that allows for an arc such as Lines 2 On the Options Bar click Arc passing through three points and place the cursor in the drawing area 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the start point for the arc 4 Move the cursor and click to specify the end point for the arc Sketching...

Page 296: ...ees the arc flips to the other side 1 On the Design Bar select a tool that allows for an arc such as Lines 2 On the Options Bar click Arc from center and end points and place the cursor in the drawing area 3 Click in the drawing area to specify the center of the arc 4 Move the cursor and click to define the arc radius 5 Move the cursor and click to specify the end point of the arc 258 Chapter 6 Sk...

Page 297: ...he tangent arc 4 Move the cursor and click to specify the end point of the arc Sketching a Fillet Arc NOTE You can only fillet elements that are created with the Line this includes sides of polygons or Arc options 1 On the Design Bar select a tool that allows for an arc such as Lines 2 On the Options Bar click Fillet arc and place the cursor in the drawing area 3 Select the first element to fillet...

Page 298: ...del lines detail lines beams and sketch based elements Sketching a Full Ellipse 1 On the Design Bar select a tool that allows for an ellipse such as Lines 2 On the Options Bar a Click Ellipse b Click Draw or Pick Lines NOTE If you select Pick Lines you can pick the edge or face of another ellipse c If you selected Pick Lines optionally select Offset and specify a value 260 Chapter 6 Sketching ...

Page 299: ...nsion displays the radius of the major axis 5 Either click when the desired radius value displays or type a value and press Enter 6 Again move the cursor away from the center in any direction An editable listening dimension displays the radius of the minor axis 7 Either click when the desired radius value displays or type a value and press Enter Sketching a Partial Ellipse 1 On the Design Bar sele...

Page 300: ... using click the temporary dimension for the axis radius you want to change enter a new value in the text box and press Enter temporary dimensions drag the controls to resize the major and minor axes For a partial ellipse there are 2 controls at either end of the ellipse You can modify the shape of the ellipse controls Drag line end option or you can resize the axis Drag axis end option Place the ...

Page 301: ...ing a spline try to use the simplest lines or combination of lines to achieve the desired results For example you may need to create a line that looks similar to the following image You could create this line using a combination of arcs and lines or you could use a spline Lines that are sketched using splines require more processing time therefore it is recommended to use arc and line combinations...

Page 302: ... loop 1 Begin sketching off of the open loop NOTE When sketching the status bar indicates when there is a valid open loop to close and lists the keyboard shortcut SZ 2 Use the keyboard shortcut SZ or right click click Snap Overrides Close Revit Architecture snaps to close the loop If there is more than one option to close the loop you can move the cursor or press Tab to see other close options 264...

Page 303: ...e if you drag the middle control you change the radius 5 If you were in sketch mode when finished click Finish Sketch Sketching and Work Planes Each view in Revit Architecture is associated with a work plane In some views such as plan 3D and drafting and for views in the Family Editor the work plane is automatically set In other views such as elevation and section views you need to set the work pl...

Page 304: ... faces levels grids and reference planes Pick a line and use the work plane it was sketched in Revit Architecture creates a work plane that is coplanar with the work plane of the selected line If the plane you choose is perpendicular to the current view the Go to View dialog opens giving you options of which view to open based on your selection For example if you select a north facing wall the upp...

Page 305: ... if you rotate the work plane grid and then place a component the component is oriented on the same angle as the work plane grid If you create a chain of walls with the rectangle option you can create them in the orientation of the work plane grid only To rotate a work plane grid see Rotating Elements on page 308 Elements Associated with Work Planes If you create a family that is work plane based ...

Page 306: ... not parallel to the existing work plane use the Rehost option See Rehosting on page 747 The Work Plane dialog displays and the work plane grid for the element displays in the view 3 If desired click Show to display other views that can show the work plane for the element 4 Select another work plane See Setting the Work Plane on page 265 for details on work plane options Disassociating an Element ...

Page 307: ...brief delay the element description also displays within a tool tip just below the cursor Wall element before and after highlighting When an element is highlighted click to select it When an element is selected in one view the selection applies to all other views as well TIP If you have difficulty highlighting a particular element because other elements are in close proximity press TAB to cycle th...

Page 308: ...of the selection box drag the cursor from left to right To select any elements that are wholly or partially within the boundary of the selection box drag the cursor from right to left Press TAB to highlight connected elements and then click to select For more information see Selecting Chains of Walls and Lines on page 272 Right click on a family type name in the Project Browser or a family type in...

Page 309: ...ithin the boundary of the box drag the cursor from left to right To select any elements that are wholly or partially within the boundary of the box drag the cursor from right to left 2 On the Status Bar click Filter Selection The Filter dialog lists all categories of elements that are currently selected The Count column indicates the number of selected elements in each category At the bottom of th...

Page 310: ...s joined Four area separation lines joined Walls and area separation lines joined If multiple walls are joined at the same point the chain continues along the wall that makes the smallest angle with the one currently highlighted Walls joined at mid end faces can also be included in a chain selection For more information see Creating Walls with Mid End Faces on page 586 As shown in the following il...

Page 311: ...B again to highlight the entire chain Press it a third time to highlight only the second element 4 Click to select the part of the chain that is highlighted If the chain is a closed loop the elements to be highlighted for partial chain selection are determined by the cursor position when you highlight the last desired element As shown in the following wall layout if you position the cursor near th...

Page 312: ...of last wall in chain Modifying a Selected Chain When a chain of walls or lines is selected you can use the drag controls that display at the coincident endpoints to perform any of the following edits without unjoining elements in the chain To change the layout of the chain drag a control to a new location 274 Chapter 7 Editing Elements ...

Page 313: ...t while pressing SHIFT drag one of the controls vertically or horizontally to a new location Dragging a wall chain to a new location To create and place a copy of the chain while pressing CTRL drag one of the controls to the desired location Selecting Chains of Walls and Lines 275 ...

Page 314: ...ements as follows Place the cursor on or near one wall or line and click to select it Press TAB Revit Architecture highlights the second wall or line that is closest to the cursor For example in the following example the cursor is positioned on the right side of the lower wall If you want to select these 2 walls or lines click to select them 276 Chapter 7 Editing Elements ...

Page 315: ...t you have selected the intended elements See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 271 Selecting Panels You can select curtain panels in multiple ways To select all panels on a curtain host element right click the host element and click Select Panels on Host You can then select an individual panel right click and click Select Panels to access the following options for selecting multiple panel...

Page 316: ...dividual mullion and click Select Mullions the following options are available Select Mullions on Gridline Selects all mullions that lie on the same gridline as the selected mullion Select Mullions Across Gridline Selects all interior mullions that lie on gridlines opposite the gridline on which the selected mullion lies Select Mullions on Vertical Grid Selects all vertical mullions Select Mullion...

Page 317: ...d walls in elevation and 3D views where they are labeled as shape handles Click and drag these controls to resize an element When a chain of walls or lines is selected drag controls display at the coincident endpoints Drag the controls to change the layout of the chain See Selecting Chains of Walls and Lines on page 272 Revit Architecture uses the following types of drag controls Dots display when...

Page 318: ...whether the door swings in or out and Flip the Instance Hand which controls whether the door swings right or left Flip controls display only when practical Flip control for a compound wall TIP You can also flip a selected element by pressing the SPACEBAR Pushpin Controls A pushpin is a user placed control that provides a quick way to allow or prevent changes to an element s position After you plac...

Page 319: ...see Dimension Witness Lines on page 233 Dimension text control shown in blue View Controls Double click a view control to open a new view associated with an element For example when you double click a view control for level lines Revit Architecture opens the appropriate floor plan level When you double click a view control with a section level Revit Architecture opens the appropriate section view ...

Page 320: ...on flip direction For example if you select a door and its host wall you cannot use the SPACEBAR to flip the selection Shape Handles When a wall is selected in a plan view place the cursor over an end control blue dot and press TAB to display a shape handle When a wall is highlighted in an elevation view or a 3D view press TAB to display the entire edge closest to the cursor as a shape handle that...

Page 321: ...tecture displays the name of the operation after Undo Revit Architecture cancels the most recent action To undo multiple actions 1 On the Edit toolbar click the drop down list adjacent to the Undo tool 2 Scroll down to find the command to cancel 3 Select the command Revit Architecture cancels all commands up to and including the selected command TIP You can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL Z to...

Page 322: ...ou can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL Y to redo actions Canceling an Action To exit a command that you have already started do either of the following Press ESC twice to exit the command Use the Abort command as follows Activate a Revit Architecture command click in the drawing area and click Edit menu Abort Editing Elements in Groups You can group elements in a project or family and then pla...

Page 323: ...nnot contain both model and view specific elements If you select both types of elements and then try to group them Revit Architecture creates a model group and places the detail elements into an attached detail group for that model group The result is the same if you select both detail elements and a model group Revit Architecture creates an attached detail group of the detail elements for that mo...

Page 324: ...nu Group Create Group 3 In the Create Group dialog enter a name for the group 4 If you want to open the group in the group editor select the Open in Group Editor option The group editor allows you to add or remove elements from a group attach detail groups for model groups and view group properties 5 Click OK Creating a Group Using the Group Editor 1 On the Edit toolbar click Group or click Edit m...

Page 325: ...riginal group or its instances Use one of the following methods to duplicate a group type In the Project Browser right click the group name and click Duplicate The new group displays in the Project Browser For example if your original group was called Group 1 the new group would be Group 2 You can rename the group as necessary Select the group in the drawing area and click In the Element Propertie...

Page 326: ...1 Click Drafting menu Detail Group or on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Detail Group 2 In the Type Selector select the detail group type to place 3 Click in the drawing area to place the group To place a model or detail group from the Project Browser 1 In the Project Browser expand the Groups branch 2 Expand the Model or Detail group 3 Drag the model or detail group to place in the drawi...

Page 327: ...he origin 3 Drag the end controls to rotate the origin about the z axis Snap points help you place the origin or rotate the end controls The following image shows the same group with its origin moved The origin snaps to the wall Modifying Groups After you create or load a group you can modify it You can modify a group within a project or family using the group editor or you can edit the group exte...

Page 328: ... instance If the excluded wall is hosting any elements for example a wall hosted tub or a door Revit Architecture attempts to rehost those elements on the remaining wall You can exclude an element using any of the following methods Exclude an element from a group instance The element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for that group instance If the excluded element is host...

Page 329: ...edit the group externally The group opens as a Revit project file RVT if you are in the project environment or opens as a Revit family file RFA if you are in the Family Editor 3 Make the necessary changes and save the file To load or reload the group into a project or family 4 Click File menu Load into Projects 5 In the Load into Projects dialog select the projects or families to load the group in...

Page 330: ... 3 Modify the instance parameters The Reference Level parameter sets the level the group is associated with The Origin Level Offset specifies a height above or below that level 4 Click OK NOTE Some group members may not move as a result of entering an offset value Some elements such as components remain on the level line if they are not hosted by another object like a floor Draw Order for Elements...

Page 331: ... group with an existing Revit model When you select this option the Open dialog opens Navigate to the location of the Revit file you want to use and click Open The Revit Links branch in the Project Browser updates with the new linked file name If there is a linked Revit model in the project with the same name as the group a message appears to indicate this You can do one of the following Click Yes...

Page 332: ... In the Project Browser right click the group and click Select All Instances 2 Click on the toolbar or press Delete All instances of the group are deleted in the project 3 In the Project Browser right click the group and select Delete Using Arrays of Elements The Array tool creates a linear or radial array of selected elements For example you can select a door and a window residing on a wall and c...

Page 333: ...first and second elements Use the Move To 2nd option All subsequent elements use the same spacing Specify the distance between the first and last elements Use the Move To Last option All remaining elements are evenly spaced between them A linear array A radial array Creating a Linear Array 1 Select one or more elements to be copied in an array 2 Click Edit menu Array or click on the Edit toolbar 3...

Page 334: ...rs As you move the cursor a box appears to indicate the size of the selected elements The box moves along snap points A dimension appears between the first click location and the current cursor position c Click again to place the second member or type a dimension and press ENTER 6 If you selected Move To Last place array members as follows a Click in the drawing area to indicate a starting point f...

Page 335: ... instances you want to drag the center of rotation symbol away from the center of the selected elements The symbol snaps to points and lines of interest such as walls and the intersections of walls and lines You can also drag it onto open space 6 Move the cursor to a position where the arc of the radial array will begin A line radiates from the center of rotation symbol to the cursor position NOTE...

Page 336: ...bers are placed using the same spacing If you selected Move To Last the second ray of rotation defines the location of the last member of the array Additional array members are spaced equally between the first and last members If you selected Group and Associate on the Options Bar controls appear on the radial array Use the 2 end controls to resize the angle of the arc Use the middle control to dr...

Page 337: ...of an array If the array was grouped deleting a member of the array effectively ungroups the remaining members Each member of the array then becomes an individual element To delete a member element of an array 1 Select the element to delete from the array 2 Use any of the following methods to delete the selected element Press DEL Click Edit menu Delete Right click the element and click Delete Copy...

Page 338: ...Value on page 235 If array members belong to a group you can change the number of members in the array Select the pattern line and enter a new value in the array instance number box Controls for array groups are visible in all views in which the array is visible Changing the dimensions of an array Changing the number of elements in an array Moving Elements Revit Architecture offers a variety of me...

Page 339: ... that a selected element can move To remove this constraint press and hold SHIFT while dragging the element Conversely some elements can move in any direction by default To constrain their movement press and hold SHIFT while dragging the elements For example you can move a window freely in an elevation or a 3D view but pressing SHIFT constrains the movement of the window so that its elevation does...

Page 340: ... a hosted element from its current host to a new host For example you can move a window from one wall to another wall This feature works best when you clear the Constrain option Copy Click Copy to move a copy of the element The original element remains in place When you select the Copy option the Disjoin option becomes selected you cannot clear it Multiple Click Multiple to create multiple copies ...

Page 341: ...ample you cannot offset a wall in an elevation view To offset an element or a copy of an element 1 Click Tools menu Offset or click on the Tools toolbar 2 On the Options Bar select how you want to specify the offset distance Then If you want to select Graphical drag the selected element to the desired distance select Numerical Enter a positive number in the Offset box enter a value for the offset ...

Page 342: ...stem You cannot cut an interior elevation arrow without cutting its adjoined elevation symbol You cannot cut some elements in any context For example you cannot cut the Ref Level in the Family Editor To cut and paste elements 1 Select one or more elements in the drawing area 2 Click Edit menu Cut or click on the Edit toolbar NOTE You can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL X to cut elements 3 Past...

Page 343: ...ts 1 Select one or more elements 2 On the Options Bar select Moves With Nearby Elements You can also select this option on the Properties dialog for one or more selected elements To display the Properties dialog click or right click the element and click Element Properties 3 Move the selected elements to the desired position Witness lines show dimensions from walls and other points If desired you ...

Page 344: ... option Aligning Elements Use the Align tool to align one or more elements with a selected element This tool is generally used to align walls beams and lines but it can be used with other types of elements as well The elements to align can be of the same type or they can be from different families You can align elements in a plan view or elevation view only For example you can use the Align tool t...

Page 345: ...line with 4 columns Align columns with grid lines Selected point to align to an element Element and point joined To align elements 1 Click Tools menu Align or click on the Tools toolbar Aligning Elements 307 ...

Page 346: ...ement to align with the reference element is highlighted Then click it 5 If you want the selected elements to stay aligned with the reference element if you later move it click the padlock to lock the alignment If the padlock symbol has disappeared because you have done something else click Modify and select the reference element to make the symbol reappear 6 To start a new alignment press ESC onc...

Page 347: ...le specifying the first ray the snap line will rotate with the preview box and snap to angles on the screen while placing the second ray 6 Move the cursor to place the second ray of rotation Another line displays to indicate the ray A temporary angular dimension displays as you rotate and a preview image shows the selection rotating TIP You can also rotate an element using listening dimensions Aft...

Page 348: ...dows without their hosts 2 Click Edit menu Mirror or click on the toolbar The mirror cursor appears 3 On the Options Bar do the following To move the selected item rather than making a copy of it clear Copy To select the line that represents the mirror axis select Pick Or to sketch a temporary mirror axis line select Draw 4 Select or draw the line to use as a mirror axis You can pick only a line o...

Page 349: ...ick Edit menu Pin Position or click on the Edit toolbar Revit Architecture displays a pushpin control near the component to indicate that it is pinned in place To move or delete the component you must first unlock it by clicking the pushpin control Click the pushpin again to lock the component Unpinning Elements The Unpin Position tool unpins a locked element You can then move the element or delet...

Page 350: ...not their values If you resize an element that a dimension references the dimension value does change Import symbols have a read only instance parameter called Instance Scale It shows how much the instance size differs from the base symbol You can change it by resizing the import symbol Resizing Elements with Shape Handles When you select and drag the handles of multiple elements Revit Architectur...

Page 351: ...For example suppose you sketch a first vector that is 5 feet and a second vector that is 10 feet This creates a scale factor of 2 As a result the elements become twice their original size To resize elements graphically 1 Select elements to resize Be sure to select only supported elements such as walls and lines The Resize tool is unavailable if your entire selection contains just one non supported...

Page 352: ...Defining the first scale vector Defining the second scale vector 314 Chapter 7 Editing Elements ...

Page 353: ... area to specify the origin The element resizes by the defined scale factor Resizing Elements with Formulas You can use formulas to modify the dimensions of specific elements For example as you sketch a wall you can enter a formula for the temporary dimension of the wall Begin the formula with an equal sign and then use conventional mathematical syntax For more information see Valid Formula Syntax...

Page 354: ...ming and Extending Elements Use the Trim Extend tool to trim or extend one or more elements to a boundary defined by the same element type You can also extend non parallel elements to form a corner or trim them to form a corner if they intersect When you select an element to be trimmed the cursor position indicates the part of the element to retain You can use this tool with walls lines beams or b...

Page 355: ...k is retained The part on the other side of the boundary is trimmed click Trim Extend Multiple Elements Select the reference to use as a boundary Then select each trim or extend multiple elements to a boundary defined by another element of the elements to trim or extend For any elements that cross the boundary the part that you click is re tained The part on the other side of the boundary is trimm...

Page 356: ...lt of Trim Extend to Corner operation Preview of Trim Extend Single Element option with horizontal wall selected as the boundary Result of Trim Extend Single Element operation 318 Chapter 7 Editing Elements ...

Page 357: ...ing one or more selected elements Select an element and while pressing the CTRL key drag the element to copy it Use the Copy tool to copy elements and place them immediately Use the clipboard to copy and paste elements with CTRL C and CTRL V Use the Create Similar tool to add a new instance of a selected element Make a mirror copy of an element Use the Mirror tool with the Copy option See Mirrorin...

Page 358: ...ard tool copies one or more elements to the clipboard You can then use the Paste from Clipboard or Paste Aligned tools to paste copies of the elements in the drawing or in another project The Copy to Clipboard tool is different from the Copy tool Use the Copy tool when you want to copy a selected element and place it immediately for example in the same view Use the Copy to Clipboard tool for examp...

Page 359: ...dows on one level and paste them to another level exactly above or below the location of the original elements This tool is most useful for multi story buildings where you can copy and paste aligned elements from one level to many other levels Pasting Elements from the Clipboard 1 Cut or copy elements to the clipboard See Moving Elements with Cut and Paste on page 304 or Copying Elements to the Cl...

Page 360: ...area away from the pasted elements to deselect them For some types of elements you can click Finish on the Options Bar If you want to quit Paste mode discarding the pasted elements click Quit on the Options Bar or press CTRL Z Editing Pasted Elements During a paste operation you may need to refine the placement of pasted elements rehost pasted building components or specify new references for past...

Page 361: ...n gray indicating that you can no longer modify them during Edit Pasted mode You can continue to move or modify any pasted elements that display in black Select All selects all pasted elements so that you can move or modify them 4 Use functions of the Options Bar as needed to rehost building components activate listening dimensions to refine placement or perform other functions 5 To complete the p...

Page 362: ... same type as the selected element For example when you right click a door in a view and click Create Similar the Door tool becomes active with the selected door type already chosen in the Type Selector The Create Similar tool is available for most Revit Architecture elements When you use Create Similar each new element inherits family instance parameters defined in the Family Editor for the selec...

Page 363: ...hich you want to convert other elements The cursor eyedropper is now full 3 Click an element of the same category to convert it to the type you selected To convert multiple elements continue clicking them individually or select Multiple on the Options Bar draw a selection box to select the elements and click Finish on the Options Bar 4 If you want to select a new type click an open space in the dr...

Page 364: ...plying an Invisible line style Reveal edges of elements that exist in the model but are hidden in the view Differentiate the edges of a building in an elevation view Differentiate edges in an imported CAD file or a linked Revit file Linework Overview The Linework tool does not create new model or detail lines in the view Instead it overrides the current line style of the selected line and applies ...

Page 365: ...enerated by the back clip plane When you select an edge for the Linework tool Revit Architecture applies the same line style to all segments of that face edge You cannot apply different line styles to different segments of the same edge For example the upper edge of the following wall is a single face so the green dashed line style is applied to the entire edge You cannot apply different line styl...

Page 366: ...al line style to a changed edge With the Linework tool active select By Category in the Type Selector Then select the edge 7 Continue applying the selected line style to edges in the view or select a new style in the Type Selector 8 To exit the Linework tool press ESC Changing Line Styles in a Linked Model You can use the Linework tool to change the line style for edges in a linked Revit model To ...

Page 367: ...Changing Line Styles for aView Underlay When you use a level as an underlay in the current view and use the Linework tool on the edges of elements from that level the elements become part of the current view and you can modify them See View Properties on page 210 For example in a Level 1 floor plan view you can specify Level 2 as an underlay If Level 2 has a roof you can select the roof in the pla...

Page 368: ... view In this case the Linework tool may not immediately produce the desired results because each of the coincident edges is treated as a separate line To apply a dashed line style to one of 3 coincident edges for example apply the Invisible lines style to 2 of the edges See Using the Linework Tool on page 328 Then apply a dashed style such as Demolished to the third edge Changing the Cut Profile ...

Page 369: ...rting boundary line However if you are using the Boundary Between Faces option you can sketch over other boundaries of the face A control arrow displays on the first line that you sketch It points toward the portion that will remain after editing Click the control arrow to change its direction NOTE When you are editing a boundary line between faces you only need to sketch the 2 boundary lines for ...

Page 370: ...dividual walls or lines that you select in plan views In elevation views you can use this tool to select only the ends of walls running perpendicular to the view direction to display the height of the wall In both plan and elevation views however you can draw a temporary line or a chain of lines connecting points that you specify In either case the dimensions generated by the tool remain on the sc...

Page 371: ...gth of the line measure a certain length from a starting point click select Chain and do either of the follow ing display dimensions for a chain of temporary lines that you draw Specify a series of points Specify the first point move the cursor in the direction that you want the line to extend and enter a value for the length of the line repeating until all lines in the chain are drawn The Total L...

Page 372: ...own in the following illustrations the tool removes the visible edge between the joined elements The joined elements then share the same line weight and fill pattern Uncleaned join between walls and floor Cleaned join between walls and floor after Join Geometry tool is used When you join geometry in the Family Editor you create a union between different shapes In a project however one of the joine...

Page 373: ...ry not to the sub elements that were joined Use TAB to toggle to the combined geometry Unjoining Geometry Use the Unjoin Geometry tool to remove a join between 2 or more elements that was applied using the Join Geometry tool For information on the kinds of elements that can be joined and unjoined with these tools see Joining Geometry on page 334 To unjoin geometry 1 Click Tools menu Unjoin Geometr...

Page 374: ...explanation of these properties see Curtain Wall Properties on page 720 To split a wall horizontally 1 Click Tools menu Split Walls and Lines or click Split on the Tools toolbar 2 Place the cursor on the wall or line at the point you wish to split A temporary horizontal line appears on the wall when you place the cursor near vertical edges If desired you can snap to levels so you split the wall ev...

Page 375: ...ols toolbar 2 Place the cursor on the element face to highlight it You may need to press TAB to select the desired face 3 Click to select the face 4 Sketch the face area to split For more information about the sketching tools see Sketching on page 251 NOTE The sketch must be in a closed loop inside the face or an open loop that ends on the boundary of the face Splitting Faces 337 ...

Page 376: ...ors If the element highlights when you place the cursor near it you can paint it The Paint tool is especially useful for applying materials to split faces See Splitting Faces on page 336 If the surface pattern for the material is a model pattern you can select references in the pattern for dimensioning or aligning For more information see Fill Patterns on page 449 and Working with Model Patterns o...

Page 377: ...ply paint to the face of a column However if you plan to have multiple instances of the painted column in your project create the column in the Family Editor and apply the paint there When you are in the Family Editor you can create a family parameter of type material You can then paint that face of the family with that parameter For more information on creating a parameter see Creating New Family...

Page 378: ...ents from the drawing The Delete tool is available only after selecting elements It does not paste deleted elements to the clipboard To delete elements 1 Select one or more elements in the drawing area 2 Click Edit menu Delete click on the Edit toolbar or press DELETE 340 Chapter 7 Editing Elements ...

Page 379: ...tion of objects called types A family groups elements with a common set of parameters identical use and similar graphical representation Different types within a family may have different values of some or all parameters but the set of parameters their names and their meaning are the same All elements in Revit Architecture are family based Type A type is a member of a family Each type has specific...

Page 380: ... to appear You decide what geometry to create All family templates are stored under the Templates folder Imperial or Metric The Templates folder includes 2 subfolders Annotations for creating annotation families and Titleblocks for creating new titleblocks The Library folder contains subfolders to organize different families either ones you created or predefined families FamilyTemplates When you c...

Page 381: ... names to make it easier to create the family geometry For example for door families you will see interior and exterior elevation views instead of north and south elevations The renamed views allow for easier orientation of the geometry Also the template includes any common references that are needed to create the family This includes reference planes to define the origin and sketching references ...

Page 382: ...ng to start over General Rules for Geometry Creation Revit Architecture provides tools to allow you to create 2D and 3D geometry to define your family These tools are described in detail in Family Editor Commands on page 377 As you start to create your geometry there are a few rules you should remember Use reference planes and reference lines when sketching Reference planes lines are useful sketch...

Page 383: ...nsions automatically switch to the new family member if you create the same property name in the second family For example you could create 2 families a table and a chair family and set the left side reference plane property value to Left for both of them and then place the table in a building and dimension it from the wall to the left side of the table If you decide to replace the table with the ...

Page 384: ...rence line and use the Tab key to switch between the 2 faces The plane in which the line was sketched always displays first You can also create arc reference lines however they do not define any planes Reference Line Behavior in the Project Once a family is loaded into a project the behavior of Reference Lines is identical to that of Reference Planes Reference Lines have no visibility property the...

Page 385: ...abel it as an instance or type parameter For more information on dimensions see Dimensions on page 213 5 Flex the model by changing and applying a new value within the Family Types dialog Controlling Angular Dimensions with Reference Lines The preferred method to control the angular dimensions of a family is to apply a labelled angular dimension to a reference line Unlike reference planes which ha...

Page 386: ... expected Modifying Reference Line Properties 1 In the drawing area select the reference line 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog specify the following Work Plane This is read only and reports the work plane that the reference line resides on To change this click Edit Work Plane on the Options Bar when the reference line is selected Visible Select this setting if you want the reference line...

Page 387: ... The New Family Select Template File dialog opens to the Templates folder 2 From the Templates folder select one of the default family templates rft or navigate to the folder containing the template to base the family on 3 Select the family template and click Open Setting Subcategories A subcategory sets the display for the family that you create Revit Architecture includes several predefined subc...

Page 388: ...become properties of the family and can be used to create other family types of varying sizes If there are other dimensions you wish to add to the properties of the family create a permanent dimension on the sketch and add a label to the dimension See Dimensioning with Families on page 359 Families Included InThe Library Revit Architecture provides many predefined family types within the library f...

Page 389: ...nload a family click its preview image Save the family to your project folder You will then need to load it into your project For more information about loading families see Loading Families on page 352 Applying Materials to Modern Medium Families You can modify the appearance of a Modern Medium family type by changing the material linked to its object style For instance you have loaded a Modern M...

Page 390: ...he Design Bar If an annotation component family click Tag or Symbol from the Drafting tab of the Design Bar NOTE These commands are not applicable if you are creating an In Place Family See In Place Families on page 419 You can also load a family through the Element Properties dialog After you place a family in the drawing area select it and click In the Element Properties dialog click Load Naviga...

Page 391: ...sting version of the family Click No to end the load process TIP When reloading multiple families you can click Yes to All Saving Loaded Families You can save loaded families in a project as rfa files You cannot save in place families as rfa files 1 Click File menu Save to Library Save Family or right click on a family name in the Project Browser and click Save 2 In the Save Family dialog specify ...

Page 392: ... the family file IMPORTANT If you are working in a project or are using a template which contains families that were created prior to Revit 6 0 these families will not be editable within the project even if the project is updated to the most recent version Reloading Families Within the Project Browser of a project or a family you can right click a loaded family name and click Reload A navigation d...

Page 393: ...TRL and select each type 2 Click Edit menu Copy to Clipboard or press CTRL C 3 Open the target project 4 Click in the drawing area 5 Click Edit menu Paste from Clipboard or press CTRL V 6 In the drawing area drag the object to the necessary location 7 On the Options Bar click Finish Paste The family type appears in the Project Browser under its designated family Strong and Weak References To dimen...

Page 394: ...lid geometry to the reference planes Dimensions with Families Automatic Sketch Dimensions Revit Architecture creates automatic sketch dimensions in the Family Editor to define where every sketch line is relative to reference planes or other sketch lines The automatic sketch dimensions implicitly constrain sketch lines until you explicitly dimension those sketch lines As you add dimensions you are ...

Page 395: ...nd the right side of the door panel Both the centerline and the right side of the panel are represented by reference planes The window s position remains fixed relative to those reference planes To see the automatic sketch dimensions edit the sketch of the window and turn on the visibility of the dimensions See Visibility of Automatic Sketch Dimensions in the Family Editor on page 358 You will see...

Page 396: ...d off by default in a view They appear if there is at least one labeled dimension in the family Notice in this next image that there is a dimension added to this geometry but the dimension has no label No automatic sketch dimensions are visible To turn on visibility of automatic sketch dimensions 1 While you are in sketch mode click View menu Visibility Graphics or press VG on your keyboard 2 Clic...

Page 397: ...l you explicitly add labeled dimensions to them By adding labeled dimensions you are creating new parameters for the family Labeling Dimensions 1 Click Modify and highlight the dimension text 2 Right click the dimension and click Edit Label 3 Select a name from the drop down menu or choose Add parameter and create a new parameter See Family Types on page 366 Alternate Procedure for Labeling 1 Clic...

Page 398: ...ew of the design In the plan view you may want to see a 2D representation of the family In a 3D view or elevation view you may want a fully detailed 3D representation of the family You have the flexibility to display different geometry For example you could create a door frame and use lines to represent it Or you could extrude the door frame so it has a 3D representation Detail Level determines th...

Page 399: ...plays in projection regardless of whether it is intersected by the cut plane You can determine if a family category is cuttable in the Object Styles dialog click Settings menu Object Styles If the Line Weight Cut column is disabled the category is non cuttable Cuttable Families If a family is cuttable the family displays as cut when the cut plane of a view intersects that family in all types of vi...

Page 400: ...raphy Not Applicable Walls Yes Windows Non Cuttable Families The following families are not cuttable and are always shown in projection in views Balusters Detail Items Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Entourage Furniture Furniture Systems Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Parking Planting Plumbing Fixtures Specialty Equipment 362 Chapter 8 CreatingYour Own Components Families ...

Page 401: ...e when the family instance is placed in the project Labeled dimensions set as instance parameters can also have shape handles that appear when the family is loaded into a project Creating Instance Parameters 1 Sketch family geometry using Family Editor tools 2 Create dimensions for the family geometry 3 Label the dimensions See Labeling Dimensions on page 359 4 Select the dimensions and on the Opt...

Page 402: ...eference lines or reference planes to the family Align the reference lines or reference planes to the edge of the component where you want the shape handle to display Add a dimension to the reference lines or reference planes Label the dimension as an instance parameter Save the family and load it into a project When you select the component shape handles display where the reference lines are alig...

Page 403: ...s will display at this location Generic component family with reference lines aligned and locked to the extrusion edges 4 Add a dimension between the reference lines or reference planes that you aligned in the previous step 5 Select the dimension 6 On the Options Bar select a label from the Label list or click Add Parameter and create a new parameter for the dimension For more information see Crea...

Page 404: ... while Revit Architecture is in the Family Editor Creating FamilyTypes 1 In the Family Editor create the family component and label the permanent dimensions that appear See Family Editor on page 376 2 Click Settings menu Family Types or click Family Types on the Design Bar 3 In the Family Types dialog click New and enter a name for the new type NOTE You should create a type for each of the sizes o...

Page 405: ...ion exponentiation logarithms and square roots Formulas also support the following trigonometric functions sine cosine tangent arcsine arccosine and arctangent The valid formula abbreviations for arithmetic operations and trigonometric functions are Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation x y x raised to the power of y Logarithm log Square root sqrt sqrt 16 Sine sin Cosine cos ...

Page 406: ...tware returns the true value If the condition is false it returns the false value Conditional statements can contain numeric values numeric parameter names and Yes No parameters You can use the following comparisons in a condition You can also use Boolean operators with a conditional statement AND OR NOT Currently and are not implemented To express such a comparison you can use a logical NOT For e...

Page 407: ...fferent finishes Create a table family with 2 material parameters called table top finish and table leg finish Assign a material to the parameters and load the family into your project Now you can change materials in the project Table tops come in 3 different finishes Oak Pine and Beech Table legs are painted and offered in Teal Navy Blue and Black Rather than make 9 different family types you can...

Page 408: ...ngle Can be used to create parameters that define slope Slope Can be used to create currency parameters Currency Provides web link to user defined url URL Establishes parameters in which a specific material can be assigned Material Used most often for instance properties when the parameter is defined with either a Yes or No Yes No Used with nested components and allows you to swap components after...

Page 409: ...mily This procedure describes creating a generic profile shape that is available to multiple building elements in the project Your specific building and design intentions may differ 1 Click File menu New Family 2 In the Open dialog select a profile template and click Open The Family Editor opens a plan view that includes 2 reference planes There are no other views available in which to sketch geom...

Page 410: ...eaf Expand the Profiles leaf The family you created and loaded appears under the Profiles leaf You can now apply the profile to building elements in the project Using the Profile Family with a Building Element This procedure provides an example of a way to apply the profile to an element 1 Click File menu New Family and select the Profile Rail family template 2 Create a new profile rail family by ...

Page 411: ...re applies the new profile shape to the railing Stair rails with profile created from procedure above 13 Click OK twice to close the properties Host Sweep Profiles with Nested Detail Components You can nest a detail component within a host sweep profile family and use the visibility controls to specify when the detail component displays within a project Examples of host sweeps are wall sweeps roof...

Page 412: ...ct the nested detail component 8 On the Options Bar click Visibility 9 Specify the detail level when the detail displays and click OK Once loaded in a project the host sweep detail displays when cut and at the detail level you specified CreatingType Catalogs Type catalogs assist you with the family selection process You can sort through the catalog and load only the specific family type required w...

Page 413: ...acres or hectares For volume cubic_yards CY cubic_feet CF cubic_inches in3 cubic_centimeters cm3 cubic_millimeters mm3 liters L gallons gal For angle decimal_degrees minutes seconds For force newtons N decanewtons daN kilonewtons kN meganewtons MN kips kip kilograms_force kgf tonnes_force Tf and pounds P For linear force newtons_per_meter N m decanewtons_per_meter dan m kilonewtons_per_meter kN m ...

Page 414: ... containing the file you wish to open By default the window shows the rfa file types 3 Select a family file that has a type catalog and click Open The Specify Types dialog displays 4 In the Specify Types dialog under Types select the family type or types to load You can select multiple types by pressing CTRL during selection You can also narrow the search items by selecting specific parameters fro...

Page 415: ...lity in plan and elevation views by selecting the lines and clicking Visibility from the Options Bar See Setting Family Geometry Visibility on page 360 The Symbolic Lines command lets you sketch lines that are meant for symbolic purposes only For example you might sketch symbolic lines in an elevation view to represent a door swing Symbolic lines are not part of the actual geometry of the family S...

Page 416: ...mily Editor After clicking this command the Type Selector becomes active and you can select the component The Symbol command allows you to place 2D annotation drawing symbols See Symbols on page 1071 The Detail Component command allows you to place a detail component See Inserting a Detail Component on page 1083 The Masking Region command allows you to apply a mask to a region of the family See Ma...

Page 417: ...formula was added to the H 2 parameter to make it equal to Height 2 In addition a visibility parameter was created and applied to the small extrusion The smaller extrusion also has a split and painted face Elements controlled by parameters labelled dimensions in this case Continuing with the example shown above to create a series of elements identical to the sub height element you can copy array o...

Page 418: ... Massing Studies on page 517 1 In the Family Editor click Solid Form Solid Revolve on either the Modelling menu or the Family tab of the Design Bar 2 If the Select a Work Plane dialog opens choose a work plane to draw the revolved geometry See Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 3 In sketch mode click Axis to place a revolving axis 4 Sketch an axis by clicking a start and an end point at the ori...

Page 419: ...g it clicking and setting the degrees for the start and end angle properties You can also achieve the same effect by dragging the start and end faces of the revolved solid NOTE You cannot drag the start and end faces of a 360 degree revolution Creating Solid Sweeps A sweep is a tool for creating families that requires you to sketch or apply a profile shape and extrude that profile along a path You...

Page 420: ... specify a profile from the menu on the Options Bar If you need additional profiles or have created and saved a different profile click Load profiles to load in the additional profile families See Profile Families on page 371 7 If you are sketching a profile choose a view in the Go To View dialog in which to sketch the profile For example if you sketched the path in a plan view you would choose an...

Page 421: ...the geometry intersects For more information about sweep error messages see Error Handling on page 1332 If you create a sweep path by using the Pick Path command you can drag the end points of the path lines as you are sketching it Creating Solid Blends The Blend command blends 2 profiles together For example if you sketch a large rectangle and a smaller rectangle on top of it Revit Architecture b...

Page 422: ...he blend 5 Sketch a shape for the top of the blend for example another square Sample base and top profiles for a blend 6 Click Finish Sketch Revit Architecture completes the blend If you did not specify a first and second end point Revit Architecture uses the default depth setting Finished blend 7 Select the view visibility of the blend See Setting Family Geometry Visibility on page 360 8 When you...

Page 423: ...ontrol As you click the controls some possible edges disappear and other ones appear 4 When you are satisfied with vertex connections click Finish Sketch BlendTips You cannot sketch more than 2 closed loops one for the base and one for the top You can set the depth of the geometry before sketching it In sketch mode enter a value in the Depth field on the Options Bar This value changes the end poin...

Page 424: ... the extrusion See Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 3 Sketch a shape The profile sketch can be a single closed loop or multiple closed loops that do not intersect For more information about the sketching tools see Sketching on page 251 TIP By default Revit Architecture uses a start point of 0 You can change this value and the end point value prior to sketching the shape While in sketch mode c...

Page 425: ... extrusions with the same end point first sketch the extrusions then select them and then apply the end point Creating a Swept Blend The Swept Blend tool allows you to create a blend that has 2 different profiles and then sweep it along a path The shape of a swept blend is determined by the 2D path you either sketch or pick and the 2 profiles you either sketch or load The following procedure is a ...

Page 426: ...d Click Tools menu Set Work Plane or on the Design Bar click Set Work Plane See Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 3 Sketch or pick the path and then click Finish Path See Sketching on page 251 NOTE A swept blend path can only have one segment 4 Load or sketch Profile 1 To load a profile a In the drawing area click the end point for Profile 1 on the swept blend path b On the Options Bar select ...

Page 427: ... Sketch the profile Profiles must be closed loops d Click Finish Profile 5 Load or sketch Profile 2 using the steps above 6 Optionally edit the vertex connections By editing vertex connections you control the amount of twist in the swept blend You can edit vertex connections in plan or 3D views a On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar click Vertex Connect b On the Options Bar select Controls on Loop ...

Page 428: ...itecture provides tools in the Family Editor to cut solid geometry The tools are grouped under Void Forms For information about how to create a void swept blend see Creating a Swept Blend on page 387 Void Extrusions You can create an extrusion cut through any solid geometry 1 In the Family Editor click Void Form Void Extrusion on either the Modelling menu or the Family tab of the Design Bar 2 Sket...

Page 429: ...ther the Modelling menu or the Family tab of the Design Bar 2 Sketch a blend to cut into the geometry See Creating Solid Blends on page 383 TIP Prior to sketching the shape you can specify the depth of the blend cut by setting values for the start and end of the blend While in sketch mode click In the Element Properties dialog specify values for the first end and the start end You can also specify...

Page 430: ... In the Family Editor click Void Form Void Revolve on either the Modelling menu or the Family tab of the Design Bar 2 Sketch a revolve to cut in the geometry For more information on sketching revolves see Creating Solid Revolves on page 380 3 To see the new revolve cut open a 3D view Solid geometry with revolve cut TIP If you rest the cursor near the cut you see the revolve shape highlight 392 Cha...

Page 431: ...er cutting the geometry move the cursor around the solid geometry until the void shape highlights You can edit the sketch if necessary Cut Geometry With the Cut Geometry command you can pick and choose which geometry gets cut and which does not regardless of when you created the geometry NOTE While this command and the Don t Cut Geometry command are primarily for families you can use them to embed...

Page 432: ...hape and join it to the existing geometry For more information on joining geometry see Joining Geometry on page 334 4 Click Tools menu Cut Geometry and select the void you created Notice the cursor changes shape 5 Select the geometry you created in Step 3 Revit Architecture cuts the selected geometry 394 Chapter 8 CreatingYour Own Components Families ...

Page 433: ...family Only flat or cylindrical surfaces can have drafting patterns For more information see Fill Patterns on page 449 Creating Subcategories for the Family Revit Architecture selects the appropriate family category based on the family template you chose If you wish to change the family category click Settings menu Family Category and Parameters and select the appropriate category from the dialog ...

Page 434: ...le in a project If the check box is selected the extrusion is visible If the check box is cleared the extrusion is not visible Visible Sets the geometry as a subcategory to a family category See Creating a Subcategory on page 395 The default is None Subcategory Revolved Geometry Properties Description Name Sets the size of the arc for the revolved geometry The default is 360 degrees End angle Sets...

Page 435: ...aded in the project See Profile Families on page 371 Profile Horizontal offset value for profile Horizontal profile offset Vertical offset value for profile Vertical profile offset Rotation angle for profile in degrees Angle Swept Blend Properties Description Name Sets whether the swept blend is visible in a project If the check box is selected the swept blend is visible If the check box is cleare...

Page 436: ...t family you can select the Lighting Fixtures category and then select or clear the Always Vertical parameter If the Always Vertical parameter is selected this means the family always appears vertical at 90 degrees even if it is on a sloping host such as a floor or ceiling RELATED When creating column families you can specify how the column displays in a project s plan view This parameter option i...

Page 437: ...in a non hosted family has virtually no impact on its behavior when loaded into a project 4 Click OK RELATED See Shared Families on page 410 Specifying the Work Plane Based Parameter You can use the Work Plane Based family parameter to create a family that is hosted by the active work plane This can be very useful both in a project environment and within a nested family where you may need a nested...

Page 438: ... Rendering Appearance Source is Family Geometry Revit Architecture renders the actual family geometry Loading a Family into Projects or Families After you have completed the creation or modification of a family you can save the family to a library or load it directly into any open project or family this would create a nested family When you select Load into Projects on the Design Bar if only one o...

Page 439: ...e wall with reference planes and dimensions and a 3D view It does not matter in which view you start You need to define geometry so that you see what you would like in the various views Notice that Revit Architecture has already provided an opening for the door in a wall It also has created and dimensioned several sets of reference planes Revit Architecture has even labeled the height and width di...

Page 440: ...he Design Bar to create the geometry for the door Generally a door in plan view is displayed in a symbolic form Use the Lines command to sketch the symbol 4 Change to the interior elevation and create the geometry that you want to see in that view This would typically be any solid geometry for the door moldings and glass Extrusions 5 If desired modify any of the permanent dimensions To do this pla...

Page 441: ... planes for each insert To specify wall closure location 1 In a wall hosted family select the reference plane located at the desired closure point TIP Use dimension tools to control this location 2 On the Options Bar click 3 In the Element Properties dialog select Wall Closure and click OK 4 For components with dual closure planes you can add a second reference plane to control the additional clos...

Page 442: ...window opening centered about the origin Section Plane Notice that Revit Architecture has already created an opening in the wall and that it is created by sketching to the reference planes If you need to adjust the opening size and location modify the appropriate dimension You will also notice that there is a set of mirror control arrows so you can mirror the window geometry about the Interior Ext...

Page 443: ...n This name appears in the properties of the family You can modify the name to change all occurrences of that family type in the project or you can use it to create other family types with varying sizes 7 Set the reference planes and sketch lines properties for Defines Origin and Is Reference properties 8 Add any additional family types by using the Family Type command on the Settings menu 9 Click...

Page 444: ...er component Doors and windows cannot be work plane based because they are wall hosted components Example of generic component family nesting a work plane based component On the left the work plane is selected on the right the work plane based component was added Another way to create components that can be placed with any orientation is to use face based families A face based family must be creat...

Page 445: ...ies can consist of other families You can load families and insert instances of them into your new family This allows you to build upon previous work while creating families suited to your needs For example rather than design a combination window from scratch you can insert window components and create the same window in a fraction of the time You can create the combination window family below by ...

Page 446: ... type of families that can be loaded into other families Only annotation families can be loaded into other annotations Only detail families and generic annotations can be loaded into details Model families details generic annotations section heads level heads and grid heads can be loaded into model families Creating a Nested Family 1 In the Family Editor click File menu Load from Library Load Fami...

Page 447: ...component as a family type parameter subsequently loaded families of the same type automatically become interchangeable without any further work For example if you add 2 transoms to a door family you only have to position one of the transoms label it as a family type parameter and the other transom becomes part of the list of available transoms If you load 5 more transom types they are all availab...

Page 448: ...ick 12 Locate the family type parameter and select a different component from the list Shared Families When creating nested families you have the option to make the sub components shared Within a project environment a nested family comprised of shared sub components allows you to do the following Select each sub component separately Tag and renumber each sub component separately Schedule sub compo...

Page 449: ...Categories and Parameters dialog of the family to be shared Although you can make most families a shared family it only becomes relevant when the family is nested into another family and then loaded into a project The information from the nested family sub instance is accessible to schedules after the nested family is loaded into a project Shared families do not have to be in the same category NOT...

Page 450: ...ws were nested in as shared families This window is intended to be built on site using the subcomponents that are purchased as separate units by the builder The family was saved as Triple_window rfa Nested windows When the ganged unit shown above is loaded into a project tagged and scheduled the result is as follows 412 Chapter 8 CreatingYour Own Components Families ...

Page 451: ...This window also represents the main window of the 3 window set In the example shown below the same triple window family was created but with a new window family used as the host family and both the fixed window and the double hung windows loaded as shared families Notice the difference in the tagging and scheduling Ganged window family started as a new family Creating Shared Families 413 ...

Page 452: ... Loading Shared Families into a Project You load a shared family into a project using the same methods as any other family Within the project you can click File menu Load from Library Load Family Within the family you can select Load into Projects on the Design Bar RELATED See Loading Families on page 352 When you load a nested family comprised of shared sub components into a project the following...

Page 453: ...ost family adapts not just the sub instance Modify the position the size or shape of a sub instance The biggest advantage to using shared families is the ability to schedule shared families as individual instances Scheduling Shared Families A nested family comprised of shared family sub components allows each sub component to be scheduled separately This is in contrast to a simple nested family wh...

Page 454: ...ilies you use the same method as any other schedule See Schedule Views on page 124 Creating a Curtain Wall Panel Family The Curtain Wall Panel family allows you to define a panel section that fits in a curtain wall grid The panel actually resizes itself to fit in the grid You define the appearance of the panel in different views plan elevation 3D and reflected ceiling plan Typically you define a 2...

Page 455: ...nel without concerning yourself with dimensions because of the automatic fit If you sketch your panel coincident with the reference planes Revit Architecture sizes the panel to the curtain wall grid when you place it in your model The following procedure is a general procedure for creating a curtain wall Your steps may differ based on design intent 1 Click File menu New Family 2 From the Open dial...

Page 456: ... with panels Size the curtain wall grid cells to the size of the curtain wall door or window you created 6 Load the curtain wall door or window family 7 Select a panel in the current wall From the Type Selector choose the family type you created to swap in the family 8 If desired create a new door or window schedule to include the curtain wall doors or windows Creating Roof Inserts Roof inserts ar...

Page 457: ...cannot place a roof insert at the ridge You must place it on one of the faces In Place Families An in place family is a family created within the context of the current project The family exists only in the project and cannot be loaded into other projects By creating in place families you create components unique to a project or components that reference geometry within the project For example if ...

Page 458: ... In the Family Name box enter a name and click OK 4 Use the tools on the Design Bar to add components massing geometry and lines 5 When you finish creating the in place family click Finish Family NOTE You can click Quit to quit making the family All changes are lost Editing an In Place Family After you finish the family you can edit it by clicking Edit Family on the Options Bar or by right clickin...

Page 459: ... or click Family Types on the Design Bar 5 Under Parameters click Add 6 Follow the steps for creating a new parameter of the same type as the parameter you wish to control in the nested family See Creating New Parameters on page 369 7 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog 8 Select an instance of the loaded family in the host family and click There is a column for both instance and type propert...

Page 460: ...into a project and place a few instances of it 10 Select an instance of the family and click 11 Edit the model text parameter The model text updates to the new value If you created an instance parameter just the one instance changes If you created a type parameter all current and future instances of the model text change To control depth Controlling model text depth is similar to controlling text ...

Page 461: ...e You can place a generic annotation in plan only 5 Click Symbol on the Design Bar and place an instance of the label at the intersection of the 2 reference planes in the center of the microwave Label snapping to intersection of reference planes Now you need to associate this label with a parameter in the host family 6 On the Design Bar click Family Types 7 In the Family Types dialog click Add und...

Page 462: ...e Design Bar and place the microwave in a plan view 21 Click and in the Element Properties dialog enter MW for the value of the Label parameter 22 Click OK You see the microwave now has this label in the view 23 If desired change the detail level of the view to change the visibility of the label See Detail Level on page 503 NOTE You can also change the visibility of the label by turning off Generi...

Page 463: ...e is a general procedure for creating a furniture family Your steps may differ based on design intent 1 Click File menu New Family 2 In the Open dialog select Furniture rft from the Templates folder and click Open 3 In the floor plan view use the tools on the Design Bar to create the geometry for the furniture Generally furniture in the plan view is displayed in a symbolic form Click Lines to sket...

Page 464: ...iew You notice it when you add the column to a project You can rotate the column in the plan view by clicking Modify selecting the column geometry and then dragging the rotation control arrow The following procedure is a general procedure for creating a column family Your steps may differ based on design intent 1 Click File menu New Family 2 In the Open dialog select column rft from the templates ...

Page 465: ...ct s plan view select the parameter Show family pre cut in plan views The column displays using the cut plane specified within the Family Editor plan view consistently regardless of the cut plane of the project s plan view 4 Click OK 5 Save the column family After you load the column family into a project the column displays based on the parameter settings you specified within the Family Editor In...

Page 466: ... A label is a text placeholder added to tags or titleblocks You create a label as part of a tag or titleblock family while in the Family Editor When you place the tag or titleblock in the project you place substitution text for the label and the text appears as part of the family 1 Click File menu New Annotation Symbol or Titleblock 2 In the Open dialog select the appropriate template for the fami...

Page 467: ...ing a Label You add and remove parameters by moving them between the windows Highlight a parameter in the Catalog Parameter window and click Add Parameter to move it into the Label Parameter window Highlight a parameter in the Label Parameter window and click Remove Parameter to move it into the Catalog Parameter window Labels display their parameters from the first to the last top to bottom as li...

Page 468: ...rs in the label by entering a representative number of spaces zero or greater This option disables if the Break option is selected Prefix You can add a prefix to the parameter value by adding a text string in this option Sample Value You can change how the place holding text appears in the parameter Suffix You can add a suffix to the parameter value by adding a text string in this column Break You...

Page 469: ...e Properties You can modify the Type Properties of labels Description Name Graphics Sets the color of the text and the leader line Color Sets the thickness of the line that surrounds the text when you select the text and the thickness of the leader line You can change the definition of the line weight numbers using the Line Weights command in the Settings menu See Line Weights Line weight Sets the...

Page 470: ... selected text wraps at the first word reaching the label boundary Wrap between parameters only Orients text at the Top Middle or Bottom of the label boundary Vertical Align Justifies text to the Left Center or Right of the label boundary Horizontal Align Text in the label remains readable whenever you rotate it It never displays upside down Keep Readable Sets whether the label is visible in a pro...

Page 471: ...y Load Family 2 Create a sheet using the titleblock See Sheets on page 968 The new sheet view opens with the label you created in the titleblock family 3 Select the label and click 4 From the Instance properties list locate the parameter you defined for the family and enter a value for it 5 Click OK Creating a Section Head Family The Section Head Family creates the symbol that appears at the end o...

Page 472: ...Section Head There are 2 parameters you can set for the symbol the Drawing Number and the Sheet Number You can set them by placing Tag Text The Drawing Number is the number of the view on a sheet The Sheet Number is the number of the drawing sheet If you add these parameters to a symbol they automatically fill in when you add the section view to a project The following procedure is a general proce...

Page 473: ... of the geometry in the plan view When you place the family you can rotate it in the plan view by clicking Modify selecting the furniture geometry and then dragging the rotation control arrow Creating a Structural Plumbing Electrical or Mechanical Family The following procedure is a general procedure for creating a family Your steps may differ based on design intent 1 Click File menu New Family 2 ...

Page 474: ...ing the file size of the project If the project is workset enabled all worksets must be open to use this command 1 Click File menu Purge Unused The Purge unused dialog opens and lists all the families and family types that you can unload from the project The layout is similar to the Project Browser with a tree structure that you can navigate by clicking the and symbols 2 Select the desired familie...

Page 475: ...t as a new template RTE file Start with a blank project file define all settings for it and then save it as a template RTE file Start with a blank project file and specify all names for views levels and viewports You can create a set of drawings by creating sheets and adding views to the sheets As you start to draw the geometry in those views the views on the sheets update See Sheets on page 968 a...

Page 476: ...e from the Settings menu and are described in Customizing Project Settings on page 437 Families These include system families and loaded families You can modify or duplicate system families for example walls as necessary for a project You can also load families for example commonly used families custom families and titleblocks See Loading Families on page 352 and Title Blocks on page 984 Project v...

Page 477: ...operties dialog specify the following Energy Data see Specifying Energy Analysis gbXML Settings on page 439 Project Issue Date Project Status Client Name Project Address click Edit enter the address in the text box and click OK Project Name Project Number 3 Click OK Project information can be included in schedules that contain elements from linked models Specifying Energy Analysis gbXML Settings Y...

Page 478: ...parameters Shared parameters Shared parameters can be shared with other projects or families Use shared parameters when the same piece of information must exist in more than one project or family For example if a parameter in a family or a project needs to be tagged that parameter must exist in the project or element family and the tag family Therefore taggable parameters need to be shared paramet...

Page 479: ...rom different families or projects Categories Allowing Shared Parameters Only certain categories within Revit Architecture allow shared parameters This table lists the categories that allow them Additional Categories Family Categories Allowing Areas Casework Drawing Sheets Ceilings created as in place families Structural Beam Systems Columns Structural Columns Curtain Panels Structural Connections...

Page 480: ...electrical for specific electrical parameters or a hardware group for specific hardware parameters You can create as many groups and parameters as desired Your session of Revit Architecture can reference only one shared parameter file at a time If there are other shared parameters in a different file that you want in the active shared parameter file you need to export the parameters to the active ...

Page 481: ... parameter value in the Element Properties dialog Family Type If you select this option the Select Category dialog opens where you can select the family type NOTE You do not specify the parameter to be instance or type You decide that later when you add the parameter to a family or a project 10 When finished creating parameters click OK Renaming Parameter Groups 1 Click File menu Shared Parameters...

Page 482: ...d shared parameters to families in the Family Editor 1 Start creating a family or open an existing one 2 Click Settings menu Family Types or click Family Types on the Design Bar 3 Under the Parameters group box click Add 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog select Shared parameter If this option is not enabled check to be sure you are working with a valid family category See Categories Allowing Sh...

Page 483: ...Export NOTE The Export command is never enabled if the selected shared parameter is already in the current shared parameter file An informational message appears informing you that the shared parameter will be exported to the shared parameter file you set up in Step 1 5 Click OK to complete the export Tagging with Shared Parameters Shared parameters are available for both single and multi category...

Page 484: ...ter Parameter at the bottom of the dialog With this option set a tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag the tag cannot attach to any component A multi category tag must have a label with a shared parameter set as a filter parameter 9 Click OK 10 Create the tag using the Lines command and save the file TIP If you wa...

Page 485: ...elds list 5 Click the Filter tab in the Schedule Properties dialog and choose the shared project parameter you just added Only components that have this parameter display in the schedule NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the schedule then all family categories in your project that can have a shared project parameter will appear in the schedule See Categories Allowing Shared Paramet...

Page 486: ...angle of an element or sub component Angle Can be used to create parameters that define slope Slope Can be used to create currency parameters in addition to the default Cost parameter Currency Provides web link to user defined URL URL A value that is the material for the element Material Used most often for instance properties when the parameter is defined with either a Yes or No Yes No 7 Under Gr...

Page 487: ...tance or Type to store the parameter by element instance or family type For more information on instance and type properties see Instance Properties and Type Properties on page 76 7 For Group parameter under select the heading under which the parameter should display in the Element Properties dialog 8 Click OK Fill Patterns Fill patterns control the appearance of surfaces that are cut or shown in ...

Page 488: ...n overscaling See Zooming Project Views on page 193 You can place model and drafting patterns on planar and cylindrical surfaces and on families You can also place drafting patterns on cut component surfaces in plan or section views Revit Architecture includes several fill patterns and stores them in the default project template file Alternatively you can create your own or edit an existing fill p...

Page 489: ...ues affect spacing on the sheet for a model pattern these values affect spacing on the model 4 Click OK Fill Pattern Host Orientation Drafting fill patterns can have different orientations to their host layers Orientation affects how drafting patterns appear when used as cut patterns in hosts walls floors roofs ceilings The following examples show the same fill pattern applied with the different o...

Page 490: ...on page 451 for details 5 In the New Pattern dialog select Custom 6 Click Import 7 Select the desired pattern file PAT and click Open See Custom Pattern Files on page 456 for information on creating a custom pattern PAT file NOTE Default Revit Architecture fill patterns are stored in the revit pat and revit metric pat files in the Revit Architecture program group Data directory The revit metric pa...

Page 491: ...ot edit the Solid fill drafting pattern To edit a fill pattern 1 Click Settings menu Fill Patterns 2 In the Fill Patterns dialog select the pattern to modify and click Edit With a pattern name selected you can also select Custom and import a new pattern from a PAT file the imported custom pattern replaces the existing pattern using the same name 3 Follow the steps in Creating a Simple Fill Pattern...

Page 492: ...rsor snaps to the pattern line which is a reference point You can move the cursor toward another pattern line and press TAB to select a different reference point 3 Place the dimension Surface pattern lines used as references for a linear dimension Rotating a Model Pattern 1 Place the cursor on the model pattern and press TAB to highlight a shape handle The Status Bar indicates if you have selected...

Page 493: ...t to align with the model pattern line 3 Place the cursor on the element that has the model pattern Check the status bar to confirm that you have highlighted a shape handle If the desired pattern line is not highlighted move the cursor near the line and press TAB again until it highlights 4 Click to select the shape handle as the alignment reference Working with Model Patterns 455 ...

Page 494: ...Format Units UNITS value Header pattern name optional description Type declaration TYPE MODEL Pattern descriptors angle x origin y origin shift spacing Creating a Custom Pattern This example shows how to create a pattern of octagons and squares in the pattern file You can use the description here to create other patterns The completed pattern contains octagons that are 8 inches at their widest poi...

Page 495: ... y origin which indicate the start point Shift 5 656 5 656 These values establish the x shift and y shift which is the x and y distance between the start of any pass and the start of the next pass Pen down 3 3125 Pen up 8 Pen down and pen up indicate how long the pen is down and how long the pen is up respectively A negative number indicates the pen is up The first pattern descriptor is complete 0...

Page 496: ... 3 3125 Shift 8 8 Pen down 3 3125 Pen up 4 6875 The pattern now looks like this A 45 angle has a positive slope and results in a slanted line effect 9 Create the sixth pattern descriptor using the following values Angle 45 Origin 3 3125 0 Shift 8 8 Pen down 3 3125 Pen up 4 6875 The completed pattern file is Concrete Paver TYPE MODEL 0 0 0 5 656 5 656 3 3125 8 0 0 3 3125 5 656 5 656 3 3125 8 90 0 0...

Page 497: ...nu Materials Use the left pane of the Materials dialog to find a material Use the right pane to change properties of the selected material To show or hide the right pane click Properties at the bottom of the left pane Related topic Material Takeoff Schedules on page 127 Materials Overview Materials specify how model elements should display in views and rendered images They also provide descriptive...

Page 498: ...hare custom materials with team members click File menu Transfer Project Standards See Transferring Project Standards on page 438 Be sure to also make available any custom bitmaps or image files used to define bump patterns or custom colors used by the render appearance See Best Practice for Storing Image Files on page 507 For information about how render appearances are stored see Render Appearan...

Page 499: ...ory In a project you can apply a material to a model element based on its category or subcategory For example you can specify a material for the door category and then specify a different material for a subcategory of the door such as glass for a door panel By family In the Family Editor when creating or modifying a component you can use family type parameters to apply a different material to each...

Page 500: ... want to be able to change the material for an element using instance parameters or type parameters in a project e Click OK twice 3 Apply a material to the family parameter as follows a On the Design Bar click Family Types b In the Family Types dialog under Materials and Finishes locate the parameter for the object c Click in the Value column for the parameter d Click e In the Materials dialog sel...

Page 501: ...ays in shaded views as well as the way its outer surfaces and cut surfaces display in other views NOTE To change the appearance of a material in rendered images change its render appearance See Changing the Render Appearance of a Material on page 465 To change the display properties of a material 1 Open the Materials dialog and select the material to change Click Settings Materials or open the dia...

Page 502: ...odel element See Aligning the Surface Pattern on a Model Element on page 464 5 To change how the cut surface of the material displays in views under Cut Pattern do the following To change the cut pattern click the arrow and select a pattern from the list To change the color that is used to draw the cut pattern click the color swatch In the Color dialog select a color Click OK 6 Click Apply 7 To ex...

Page 503: ...play Properties of a Material on page 463 If the surface pattern does not display in the view you may need to change the view s detail level to fine or zoom in on the model element 2 Place the cursor over a line of the surface pattern 3 Press TAB one or more times until the surface pattern line highlights 4 Click to select the surface pattern line 5 Move the selected surface pattern line as desire...

Page 504: ...e render ap pearance to the surface pattern of the material In the lower part of the Render Appearance tab change property values The properties vary depending on the type of render appearance See Render Appearance Properties on page 468 for further instructions NOTE The render appearance can affect the amount of time required to render an image See Render Performance and Ma terials on page 1174 c...

Page 505: ...the surface pattern 1 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog click Texture Alignment TIP If the Texture Alignment button is not active click the Graphics tab and specify a surface pattern for the material The Align Render Appearance to Surface Pattern dialog displays The preview area displays the texture specified for the render appearance overlaid with the surface pattern for the ma...

Page 506: ...rance can affect the amount of time required to render an image See Render Performance and Materials on page 1174 Ceramic Properties You can define the following properties for ceramic materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog Description Property Type of material Ceramic or Porcelain Type Color of the render appearance for the material See Specifying a Render Appearance Color...

Page 507: ...Finish Substance used to seal the surface Sealant Discoloration due to weather To define a weathering pattern using an image select Custom See Specifying an Image File for a Render Appearance on page 476 Weathering Generic Material Properties You can define the following properties for materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog In general use a generic material when other types...

Page 508: ...lect Custom to specify an index number between 0 no refraction and 5 most refraction Index of Refraction Cut outs Perforations Shapes cut into the surface of the material Select a shape or select Custom to define cut outs using a black and white image leaving holes where the black areas occur See Specifying an Image File for a Render Appearance on page 476 Cut outs Self Illumination Brightness of ...

Page 509: ...d 5 most refraction Index of Refraction Relative amplitude of bumps in the surface of the glass Enter 0 to make the surface flat Enter higher decimal values up to 1 0 to increase the depth of the surface irreg ularities Roughness Bump pattern to use on the finished surface A bump pattern defines raised and lowered areas based on dark and light areas of an image file To define a custom Bump Pattern...

Page 510: ...rance tab of the Materials dialog Description Property Type of metal aluminum anodized aluminum chrome copper brass bronze stainless steel or zinc Each type of metal displays different properties Type Color of the metal when the Type value is Anodized Aluminum Click the color swatch In the Color dialog select a color See Colors on page 514 Click OK Color For copper or bronze the degree of discolor...

Page 511: ... finished surface Finish Whether the paint contains flecks With Flecks Color of the flecks when With Flecks is selected Click the color swatch In the Color dialog select a color See Colors on page 514 Click OK Fleck Color Mirror Properties You can define the following properties for mirror materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog See also Glass glazing and mirrors on page 477...

Page 512: ...mage File for a Render Appearance on page 476 Finish Bumps Additional bump pattern superimposed on the Finish Bumps pattern To define bumps using an image select Custom See Specifying an Image File for a Render Appearance on page 476 Bump Pattern Stone Properties You can define the following properties for stone materials on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog Description Property Im...

Page 513: ...n is Color Click the color swatch In the Color dialog select a color See Colors on page 514 Click OK Stain Color Texture of the finished surface Finish Purpose of the wood Flooring or Furniture Used For Bump pattern to use on the finished surface To define bumps using an image select Custom See Specifying an Image File for a Render Appearance on page 476 Bump Relative depth of the wood grain when ...

Page 514: ...play properties See Specifying an Image File for a Render Appearance on page 476 Specifying an Image File for a Render Appearance To use a unique color design pattern texture or bump map for a render appearance you can specify an image file You specify the file and its display properties such as rotation and sample size on the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog See Changing the Render A...

Page 515: ... glazing and mirrors Revit Architecture provides the following render appearances for glass like materials Glazing Use a glazing render appearance for windows curtain walls and other objects that require flat sheets of thin glass These render appearances include the word glazing in their names and keywords Glass Use a glass render appearance for objects made of glass such as vases and pitchers For...

Page 516: ...ameters as necessary See Material Identity Parameters on page 479 and Adding a Material Class on page 478 4 Click Apply 5 To exit the Materials dialog click OK Adding a Material Class You can add a material class when you want to make it easy to find a particular set of materials For example when you create a custom material you can create a material class for it NOTE You cannot delete or change e...

Page 517: ... Material on page 465 Words that may be useful when searching for the material and that are not used in the material description comments or other fields For ex Keywords ample you might include the keywords green and blue to ensure that turquoise is included in search results for blue paint or green paint Product Information Name of the manufacturer of the material Manufacturer Model number or cod...

Page 518: ...atural material properties Those that you can change represent standards of engineering practice Material PhysicalType Parameters Material physical type parameters are organized into the following types Unassigned Generic Concrete Steel Wood This family parameter controls hidden view display of structural elements If the Structural Material Type of an element is set to Concrete or Precast then it ...

Page 519: ...ender Appearance of a Material on page 465 6 On the Identity tab of the Materials dialog enter information about the new material and click Apply See Changing Material Identity Data on page 478 and Adding a Material Class on page 478 7 Optional On the Physical tab of the Materials dialog specify physical parameters for the new material and click Apply See Changing Material Physical Data on page 47...

Page 520: ... team members click File menu Transfer Project Standards Be sure to also make available any custom bitmaps or image files used to define bump patterns or custom colors used by the render appearance Related topics Changing the Render Appearance of a Material on page 465 Transferring Project Standards on page 438 Best Practice for Storing Image Files on page 507 How Materials Are Stored on page 460 ...

Page 521: ... Optional Type text in the search field See Entering Search Text on page 484 The Render Appearance Library displays matching render appearances sorted in order of relevance TIP To clear the search field click the X that displays at the end of the field after you enter text 4 If necessary use the scroll bar to locate the desired render appearance in the list 5 Click the render appearance to select ...

Page 522: ... The Object Styles command specifies line weights line colors line patterns and materials for different categories and subcategories of model objects annotation objects and imported objects in a project You can override project object styles on a view by view basis For more information see Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 150 Creating Object Style Subcategories 1 Click Setti...

Page 523: ...les are used to indicate different effects such as a dashed line for reference planes When you install and run Revit Architecture several line styles are included Each predefined line style has a name that describes either the line for example Dash dot or where Revit Architecture uses the line style for example Sketch lines Revit Architecture stores the line styles in the default template When you...

Page 524: ...For model lines you can specify line weight for modeling components such as doors windows and walls in orthographic views Line weight is dependent on the scale of the view For perspective lines you can specify line weights for modeling components in perspective views You may want to apply different line styles and line weights using the Linework tool For more information see Changing the Line Styl...

Page 525: ...dialog click New 3 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog enter a name for the pattern 4 Click in the value for Type and select either a dash or a dot 5 If you selected dash click under Value and enter a value This is the length of the dash Since dots are all drawn at 1 5 points they do not require an associated value 6 In the next row select space for Type Revit Architecture requires that you foll...

Page 526: ...ettings dialog lets you modify settings that are specific to documentation and analysis of structural models specifically Symbolic Representation Settings Symbolic Representation SettingsTab The values that are entered on this tab reflect the plotted representation of the drawings Therefore the visible representations that are set with these values will change based on the view scale of the drawin...

Page 527: ...tural usage of the brace is set to Vertical Bracing Line with Angle Symbolic representation of braces in a plan view are displayed with an angled line Line with angle originates from the point of intersection of a brace and level if they intersect and from the closest point to the level on the brace otherwise The symbol goes upward downward for the portion of the brace which is above below the lev...

Page 528: ... the brace symbols representing the braces below the current view to display Shoe brace below 9 For Symbol select the symbol that represents braces below the current view NOTE The brace below symbol changes automatically when you change the plan representation from parallel line to angle line Kicker brace symbol 10 Under Brace Symbols select the symbol that represents kicker bracing NOTE The kicke...

Page 529: ...esired click Rename to rename the type or click Duplicate to create a new arrowhead type 4 Specify the properties for the display of leader arrowheads See Leader Arrowhead Properties on page 1032 for property descriptions 5 Click OK SpecifyingText Note Styles 1 Click Settings menu Annotations Text 2 In the Type Properties dialog select the text properties you want to work with from the Type list 3...

Page 530: ...the default tag when you use the Load From Library Load Family command to load a tag This loaded tag becomes the default See Loading Families on page 352 Project Units You can specify the display format of various quantities in a project What you specify affects the look of quantities on the screen and in a printout You can format data for informational or presentation purposes Project units are g...

Page 531: ...ption is available for Length and Slope units 8 Click OK Changing Decimal Display and Digit Grouping 1 Click Settings menu Project Units or type the keyboard shortcut UN 2 In the Project Units dialog select a value from the Decimal symbol digit grouping list 3 In the Format column click the button for the unit you want to use this setting 4 In the Format dialog select Use digit grouping 5 Click OK...

Page 532: ...ned angle dimension snap increments You can define multiple length and angle snap increments since increments change as you change your zoom level the closer you zoom in the smaller the increment the further you zoom out the larger the increment To set snap increments 1 Click Settings menu Snaps 2 Select Length dimension snap increments and Angular dimension snap increments to turn on the snaps 3 ...

Page 533: ...Object Snaps and Snap Shortcut Key Combinations on page 496 for object snap descriptions and snap shortcut key combinations 3 Place or finish placing for components or elements that require more than one pick the component or element Snap Points Components snap to reference planes and other components of the same category The following is a list of snap conditions for first and second points First...

Page 534: ...ndicular to Existing Line Snaps a line perpendicular to existing geometry TIP The status bar indicates the snap points when you move the cursor Object Snaps and Snap Shortcut Key Combinations The following table defines the object snaps listed in the Snaps dialog Settings menu Snaps and the shortcut key combinations for these objects Shortcut key combinations override snap settings for one pick De...

Page 535: ...enter of an arc SC Centers Snaps to perpendicular elements or components SP Perpendicular Snaps tangent to an arc ST Tangents Snaps to site points when editing points using the Move or Copy tool SX Points This is similar to jump snaps When you select this option snaps look for objects that are not near the element SR Snap to Re mote Objects Snaps to close valid open loops See Closing an Open Loop ...

Page 536: ...reate other plan views that require the same properties as the furniture plan you can apply the same view template Standardize the look of your project views before you print or export a view or a project To do this you define a default view template that you can then apply to multiple views simultaneously Project views and view templates are not linked When a template changes all views created fr...

Page 537: ... view template 7 Click OK To create a view template from a project view 1 In the Project Browser select the view from which you want to create the view template 2 Click View menu Create View Template From View or right click and select Create View Template From View 3 In the New View Template dialog enter a name for the template and click OK The View Templates dialog displays 4 Modify view templat...

Page 538: ...te The default view template that is defined in each view s properties is applied For information on applying the default view template for all views on a sheet see Applying a View Template to All Views on a Sheet on page 500 Applying aViewTemplate 1 In the Project Browser select the view or views you want to apply a view template to NOTE Use the CTRL key to select multiple views in the Project Br...

Page 539: ...o impact on existing views ViewTemplate Properties You can access view template properties from Settings menu View Templates Not all properties are available for each view template type Description Name The scale of the view When you select Custom you can edit the Scale Value property View Scale A ratio derived from the view scale For example if the view scale is 1 100 the scale value is the ratio...

Page 540: ... hidden line The underlay is useful to understand the relation of components on different floors Normally you would turn off the underlay before exporting or printing the view You set an underlay by specifying a level The slice of the model between that level and the next level up displays Three of the underlay options Current Level Level Above and Level Below are relative to the current level All...

Page 541: ...n your project and set its view scale its detail level is automatically set according to the arrangement in the table By predefining detail levels you can affect the display of the same geometry at different view scales So a custom door created in the Family Editor could appear differently at coarse medium and fine detail levels as shown in the following image You can override the detail level at ...

Page 542: ...s include General options Save notifications user name and journal file clean up Graphics options Configure your video card for improved display performance and configure colors for selection background and error messages File location options Specify paths for files and directories Rendering options Specify paths for files used for render appearances and decals and specify the location of the Arc...

Page 543: ... be edited under the same Username doing so could cause the local files to be incompatible with the central file Journal File Cleanup Specifies the number of journal files to retain Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions These files are used primarily in the software support process Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate...

Page 544: ...ay want to change it if you need to use either Imperial or Metric families for your project There are default templates installed in either Revit Architecture Imperial Library or Revit Architecture Metric Library Add secondary libraries that may be specific to your company To do this click Places In the Places dialog enter the library name click in the field for Library Path and click the browse b...

Page 545: ...isted Then If you want to click Enter a path or click navigate to the desired location and click Open add a path select the path in the list and click remove a path select a path in the list and click the arrows until the paths are listed in the desired order Revit Architecture searches these paths in the order listed change the order of the listed paths Best Practice for Storing Image Files Store...

Page 546: ...ou store additional RPC content on the local computer Local Specify the location of the local ACM executable file rcpACMapp exe If the ACM is not running the RPC plug in starts it when needed To navigate to the executable location click Browse Executable location Click to go to the ArchVision web site where you can purchase additional RPC content to use in Revit projects Get More RPC Spelling Opti...

Page 547: ...ty of the big steering wheel Opacity Mini Wheel Appearance Specify the size of the mini wheel Size Specify the opacity of the mini wheel Opacity Look Tool Inverts the up and down action of the Look tool See Look Tool on page 185 Invert Vertical Access Walk Tool When walking through a model using the Walk tool you can constrain the movement angle to the ground plane by select Constrain Walk Movemen...

Page 548: ...l orbits around the element s center When it is deselected the Orbit tool orbits based on the center of the model regardless of whether any elements are Selection Sensitivity selected or not The center of the model defaults to the center of the current geometry but you can modify the center with the Center tool See Orbit Tool on page 186 and Center Tool on page 183 For more information see Steerin...

Page 549: ...on page 186 For more information see ViewCube on page 169 Keyboard Shortcuts There are many predefined keyboard shortcuts for Revit Architecture commands You can also configure your own keyboard shortcuts Shortcut key combinations appear in the Revit Architecture interface next to their corresponding menu item You can create multiple shortcuts for one menu command In the menu the shortcut that dis...

Page 550: ...5 Restart Revit Architecture The KeyboardShortcuts log file located in the same directory as KeyboardShortcuts txt contains any errors encountered while reading the KeyboardShortcuts txt file Keyboard Accelerators Revit Architecture features many preset keyboard commands to increase your efficiency The following tables lists these commands Selecting Action Key Select multiple elements CTRL Cycle t...

Page 551: ...s all snap points SHIFT TAB File Management Action Key Open a project CTRL O Print a page CTRL P Save a project CTRL S Editing Action Key Make a copy of the element Press and hold down CTRL while dragging an ele ment Copy a selected element CTRL C Paste an element CTRL V Cut an element CTRL X Redo a change CTRL Y Undo a change CTRL Z Move an element mv Rotate an element ro Delete a selected elemen...

Page 552: ...in the elevation of a window in a 3D view Press and hold SHIFT Impose or relax the constraint on the movement of a wall or line Press and hold SHIFT Screen Refresh Action Key Refresh the screen F5 Colors You set colors for many elements in Revit Architecture such as objects lines annotation symbols materials rooms and phasing When you select colors the standard Windows color dialog opens If you cl...

Page 553: ... a custom color click one of the 16 color squares under Custom Colors Mix the new color by clicking one of the Basic Color squares or by choosing a PANTONE color When you have finished mixing the color click Add Custom 3 When you have specified the desired color click OK Using the PANTONE Color Picker 1 From the appropriate Revit Architecture dialog access the Windows Color dialog For example in t...

Page 554: ...516 ...

Page 555: ...ptualize a building model When your conceptual design is complete you can add building elements directly to these shapes The following image shows a sample massing study Typical Uses of Massing Studies Create in place or family based mass instances that are specific to individual options worksets and phases 10 517 ...

Page 556: ... A version of the Family Editor used for defining mass families or in place masses Mass Editor The overall form of each mass family or in place mass family as created in the Mass Editor Mass Form A study of one or more building forms made from one or more mass instances Massing Study A surface on a mass instance that can be used to create a building element such as a wall or roof Mass Face A horiz...

Page 557: ... Mass Editor is available You can nest other mass families into the mass family that you are creating See Family Editor on page 376 Predefined mass families are available in the Mass folder of the family content library that was installed with Revit Architecture If you are importing geometry into a family see Considerations for Imported Geometry in Mass or Generic Model Families on page 555 Creati...

Page 558: ...in the project When you select levels Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass After generating mass floors the software calculates the mass floor area perimeter volume and exterior surface area See Creating Mass Floors on page 525 When the mass changes its vertical extents only previously selected levels that currently intersect the mass produce m...

Page 559: ...ts included in phases and added to design options Joining Mass Instances in a Project 1 Click Tools menu Join Geometry or on the Tools toolbar click 2 Select the first mass instance and then the second The overlapping form of the first mass cuts into the second mass The mass floors of the second mass are adjusted to report accurately gross floor area in a mass schedule If you move the joined mass ...

Page 560: ...ions you must copy both masses into each option If you want to modify relationships between 2 masses and they are in different worksets either both worksets must be editable or you will need to borrow one or both of the masses from the owners of their worksets If the relationships between masses vary from phase to phase you may need to include each mass in each phase Analyzing a Conceptual Design ...

Page 561: ...each level defined in the project Mass floors display graphically as a slice through the mass at a defined level They provide geometric information about the dimensions of the mass above the slice up to the next slice or the top of the mass For each mass floor Revit Architecture calculates the following Area of each mass floor in square units Use this information for rough cost estimates or determ...

Page 562: ...tarts at level 1 and ends at level 4 In the Mass Floors dialog you select levels 1 2 3 and 4 As a result Revit Architecture creates mass floors at levels 1 2 and 3 The software does not create a mass floor at level 4 because level 4 coincides with the top of the mass It does not have exterior surface area vertical surfaces extending upward from its perimeter or volume from level 4 upward Instead t...

Page 563: ...alternative you can examine the Gross Surface Area and Gross Volume parameters for the mass NOTE The Gross Surface Area includes the bottom surface of a mass However the combined exterior surface areas of mass floors include the sides and top of the mass but not its bottom surface Creating Mass Floors 1 If you have not already done so add levels to the project Mass floors are based on levels defin...

Page 564: ...ge See Selecting Mass Floors on page 526 and Mass Floor Properties on page 540 Tag mass floors See Tagging Mass Floors on page 528 Create building floors from mass floors See Creating Floors Using the Floor by Face Command on page 547 Selecting Mass Floors After creating mass floors you can select each mass floor individually When you move the cursor over a mass floor the tooltip and status bar di...

Page 565: ...k Mass Floor b For Name specify the schedule name c Select Schedule building components d Click OK 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog do the following a On the Fields tab select the desired fields See Selecting Fields for a Schedule on page 128 b Use other tabs to specify filtering sorting and formatting of the schedule See Specifying Schedule Properties on page 128 c Click OK The schedule displa...

Page 566: ...nformation about the usage and square units per mass floor To display other parameter values in a mass floor tag create your own or use the example provided in the Training folder Mass Floor Tag Complex rfa or M_Mass Floor Tag Complex rfa If you use the default installation location for tutorial content these files reside in the following location C Documents and Settings All Users Application Dat...

Page 567: ... usage to a mass floor using any of the following methods Schedule Include the Usage field in a mass floor schedule Then assign usages within the schedule Open the schedule click the Usage column for a row and enter text If you have already entered usage values for other mass floors you can click in the field and select a value from a list See Creating a Mass Floor Schedule on page 527 Tag To tag ...

Page 568: ...to analyze the most cost effective or profitable mix of uses for each floor of the building To perform this analysis you must do the following Assign a usage to each mass floor Calculate the area of each mass floor Calculate the percentage of floor space devoted to each usage Use this information to determine the best mix of uses for the design 530 Chapter 10 Conceptual Design with Massing Studies...

Page 569: ...alog do the following a For Category click Mass Floor b For Name specify the schedule name c Select Schedule building components d Click OK 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog do the following a For Scheduled fields in order add the following fields Usage Level Mass Type Floor Area b Click Calculated Value c In the Calculated Value dialog for Name enter Floor Area d Select Percen...

Page 570: ...the following Grand totals Title and totals Itemize every instance 9 Click the Formatting tab and do the following a Under Fields select Floor Area b For Alignment select Right c Select Calculate totals d Specify formatting for Floor Area under Fields select Floor Area For Alignment select Right Select Calculate totals e Optional Specify formatting for Usage Level and Mass Type under Fields select...

Page 571: ...erior using various materials Creating a Schedule to Analyze Exterior Surface Area Use the following procedure to create a schedule for analyzing the exterior surface areas of masses in a conceptual design based on the scenario described in Analysis Example for Exterior Surface Area on page 533 Specific steps may vary depending on the information that you want to show in the schedule To create a s...

Page 572: ... c In the Calculated Value dialog for Name enter Exterior Surface Area d Select Percentage e For Of select Exterior Surface Area f For By select Grand total g Click OK twice 5 In the schedule assign values to the Usage and Comments columns for each mass floor Use Comments to indicate the exterior building material Use consistent values so that you can use this field for sorting Next sort and subto...

Page 573: ...t select Right Select Calculate totals e Optional Specify formatting for Comments Usage Level and Mass Type under Fields select a field name Then for Alignment select Center 10 Click OK twice The schedule updates to sort and subtotal the rows accordingly It shows the percentage of surface area for each exterior material as well as square units In this example the exterior surface areas for some ma...

Page 574: ...ons to check construction costs for the project Creating a Perimeter Analysis Schedule Use the following procedure to create a schedule for analyzing the perimeter of masses in a conceptual design based on the scenario described in Perimeter Analysis Example on page 536 Specific steps may vary depending on the information that you want to show in the schedule To create a perimeter analysis schedul...

Page 575: ...ct both Level and Ascending c At the bottom of the dialog select the following Grand totals Title and totals Itemize every instance 6 Click the Formatting tab and do the following a Under Fields select Floor Perimeter b For Alignment select Right c Select Calculate totals d Optional Specify formatting for Level and Mass Type under Fields select a field name Then for Alignment select Center 7 Click...

Page 576: ...rking levels are not air conditioned Calculate the volume of space to be air conditioned Determine the resulting HVAC load Creating aVolume Analysis Schedule Use the following procedure to create a schedule for analyzing the volume of masses in a conceptual design based on the scenario described in Volume Analysis Example on page 538 Specific steps may vary depending on the information that you wa...

Page 577: ...the Usage column for each level After entering initial values for the remaining rows you can click in the field to select values from a list Next sort and subtotal the schedule by usage as follows 7 Open the view properties for the schedule Right click in the drawing area for the schedule and click View Properties 8 For Sorting Grouping click Edit 9 On the Sorting Grouping tab of the Schedule Prop...

Page 578: ...ch mass floor Mass Floor Properties You can modify some mass floor properties Several values come from the originating mass You can include these values in mass floor tags and schedules Note that the calculated and mass based values are read only Modifying Mass Floor Properties 1 Select a mass floor See Selecting Mass Floors on page 526 2 Click Element Properties 3 In the Element Properties dialog...

Page 579: ...e between the mass floor and the surface above it bounded by exterior vertical surfaces between them Floor volume is meas ured in cubic units This value is read only Floor Volume The level horizontal plane on which the mass floor is based This value is read only Level Identity Data A description of the intended use for the mass floor You can enter text or click in the field to select an existing v...

Page 580: ... the View toolbar click Show Mass Type ZF to Zoom to Fit Type VG Visibility Graphics On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog expand Mass Make sure that Mass and Mass Floor are selected Click OK Cannot See Mass Floors in aView Symptom You opened a view and you can see the mass but you cannot see mass floors Issue The visibility graphic setting for mass floors is turne...

Page 581: ...uired Gross Floor Area Is Not Available for a Mass Floor Schedule Symptom You want to create a mass floor schedule that includes the gross floor area of the mass However the Gross Floor Area field is not listed on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog Issue Gross Floor Area is a parameter of the mass not the mass floor Solution Create a mass schedule that shows Gross Floor Area Mass Gro...

Page 582: ... mass elements into Revit Architecture after they are exploded in AutoCAD Architecture As Revit Architecture import symbols they are polymesh objects Optionally you can convert mass elements to solid AutoCAD objects before importing into Revit Architecture Creating Walls from Mass Instances You create walls from mass instances by picking lines or faces using the Wall by Face command This command p...

Page 583: ...ical face Cursor highlighting non vertical face 5 Click to place the wall TIP To create a non rectangular wall on a vertical cylindrical face use Openings and in place cuts to adjust its profile Creating Walls from Mass Instances 545 ...

Page 584: ...loors from a mass instance use the Floor by Face command or the Floor command To use the Floor by Face command you first create mass floors Mass floors calculate floor areas in a mass instance For more information on the Floor command see Floors on page 641 546 Chapter 10 Conceptual Design with Massing Studies ...

Page 585: ...ce the cursor on a mass floor Cursor highlighting mass floor 7 Click to select the mass floor If you clear the Multiple option a floor is placed on the face immediately 8 If you selected Multiple do the following Continue selecting mass floors You can add or remove mass floors from the selection by clicking them The cursor indicates whether you are adding or removing a face To clear the selection ...

Page 586: ...neric model faces using the Curtain System by Face command Curtain systems do not have editable sketches Use curtain walls if you require an editable sketch on a vertical mass face See Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions on page 700 You can also use the Curtain System by Lines command See Creating a Curtain System by Lines on page 717 Creating Curtain Systems Using the Curtain System by Face ...

Page 587: ...cted Multiple do the following Continue selecting faces You can add or remove faces from the selection by clicking them The cursor indicates whether you are adding or removing a face To clear the selection of all faces and start selecting again on the Options Bar click Clear When finished selecting faces on the Options Bar click Create System Revit Architecture creates a curtain system on each of ...

Page 588: ... surfaces See Creating Curtain Systems Using the Curtain System by Face Command on page 548 Curtain system created on NURB surface NOTE Use open geometry in generic model families rather than mass families This applies to isolated NURB surfaces as shown above as well as other open geometry For optimal performance in a mass instance use only geometry that can be recognized by Revit Architecture as ...

Page 589: ...of by Extrusion commands For more information about Roof by Footprint and Roof by Extrusion see Roofs on page 606 Creating Roofs Using the Roof by Face Command 1 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar click Roof by Face 2 In the Type Selector select a roof type 3 If desired on the Options Bar specify the level of the roof For more information on roofs see Roofs on page 606 4 To select more than one ...

Page 590: ...g faces only If you want to make roof panels that cover both upward and downward faces factor the mass into 2 faces so that each face is either completely upward or downward Then create one or more roofs from the downward faces and one or more from the upward faces When you are finished selecting faces on the Options Bar click Create Roof TIP You can change the pick face location of the roof eithe...

Page 591: ...s remain in effect after a remake Extending roof face using shape handles Roofs on NURB Surfaces You can create roofs on NURB Non Uniform Rational B spline surfaces in generic model or mass families When you are creating a generic model or mass family you can import a DWG or SAT file containing NURB surfaces See Importing Massing Studies from Other Applications on page 555 After saving the family ...

Page 592: ... Bar click Remake Walls and floors lose any sketch edits when you use the Remake command Selecting Face Based Hosts from a Mass Instance When remaking face based hosts such as walls floors and roofs you may find it easier to select the mass instance or generic model with which the elements are associated first and then select the face based hosts To do this select any mass instance or generic mode...

Page 593: ...based mass floors which in turn support one click parametric floor creation When using imported geometry in mass families and generic model families consider the following Avoid complex geometry in mass instances Unlike other family categories mass instances always maintain a separate copy of each internal geometry plus extra geometry to represent the combined volume of the mass For complex geomet...

Page 594: ...ric portions of the geometry You will also receive warnings You can ignore those Importing a Design to a Mass Family Outside a Revit Project Import a massing study from design software such as SketchUp into an external mass family when you plan to use it in multiple projects This is the recommended workflow Import the design into an in place mass in a Revit project when you intend to use the desig...

Page 595: ...annot see the mass you may need to do the following Switch to a 3D view Type ZF Zoom to Fit to adjust the drawing area to show the entire mass For more information see Placing a Mass Instance from a Mass Family on page 521 8 To convert the faces of the mass component use the Wall by Face Floor by Face Curtain System by Face and Roof by Face tools For example to create a wall from a vertical face o...

Page 596: ...ng Automatically Place Origin to Origin Orient to View Place at Level Level 1 or Ref Level See Import Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models on page 1312 f Click Open To see the mass you may need to type ZF Zoom to Fit to adjust the drawing area to show the entire mass 7 In the Revit project on the Design Bar click Finish Mass 8 To convert the faces of the mass use the Wall by Face Floor by Face...

Page 597: ...Building mass created in SketchUp SketchUp file imported into Revit Architecture Example of Importing a Massing Study 559 ...

Page 598: ...nt mass elements be sure that mass category visibility is turned on Mass elements will not print or export if category visibility is turned off even if Show Mass is turned on See Controlling Visibility of Mass Instances on page 554 560 Chapter 10 Conceptual Design with Massing Studies ...

Page 599: ...ng language or coding is required to create these components Walls Walls can function as interior exterior foundation and retaining All walls have a structure that can be defined through the type properties of the wall In addition various instance and type properties can be specified to define the appearance of the wall 11 561 ...

Page 600: ...f the Design Bar click Wall 2 In the Type Selector select a wall 3 To change the properties of the wall click Element Properties and click Edit New For descriptions of wall properties and their values see Wall Properties on page 603 4 On the Options Bar specify wall design options Level 3D views only Choose a level as the base constraint You can choose a non story level See Levels on page 1041 Hei...

Page 601: ...When creating the exterior walls of a multi level building to which you want to add windows before adding the roof specify Unconnected Height as the height of the wall on the next level This ensures that the wall is high enough to add windows and doors To flip the orientation of the wall between exterior and interior select the wall and click the blue flip arrows that are displayed near it The fli...

Page 602: ...lick Modelling menu Wall or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Wall 2 From the Type Selector select a wall type 3 Click Element Properties 4 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 5 In the Type Properties dialog select Retaining for the Wall Function parameter 6 Click OK twice NOTE A retaining wall is automatically set to be non room bounding See Rooms on page 913 7 Sketch the r...

Page 603: ...all 2 Drag the end controls to change the arc length 3 On the Options Bar select Keep Concentric to change the radius of the arc while keeping the radius concentric or clear Keep Concentric to retain existing end conditions such as end point location or tangency to a straight wall 4 Drag the middle control Cutting Openings in Arc Walls You can cut square or rectangular openings into arc walls As y...

Page 604: ...ls can be embedded into other walls using the Cut Geometry command Some curtain wall types automatically embed into a wall To determine whether the curtain wall type automatically embeds into another wall check the type properties of the wall Select the Automatically Embed parameter if it is not already selected You can embed a wall into a curtain panel and then embed a curtain wall into that embe...

Page 605: ...g Embedded Walls 1 Click Tools menu Don t Cut Geometry 2 Highlight the host wall and click to select it 3 Highlight the embedded wall and click to select it Vertically Compound Walls The structure of vertically compound walls is defined using either layers or regions The following image shows the Edit Assembly dialog NOTE To access the Edit Assembly dialog select the wall and click In the Element ...

Page 606: ...ne and core face location lines are determined by the core thickness at the bottom of the wall For example if the wall core is thicker at the top than at the bottom and you specify the location line as Core Centerline the centerline of the core is measured between the core boundaries at the bottom You can add wall sweeps or reveals to vertically compound walls See Wall Sweeps on page 593 and Wall ...

Page 607: ... select an outer vertical boundary of the sample wall a temporary dimension displays If you change the value of the temporary dimension the thickness of the layer or region immediately adjacent to the boundary changes If you select a vertical border between regions 2 temporary dimensions appear which control the thickness of the regions to the left and right of the border Allowing Layer Extension ...

Page 608: ... displays Click the control arrow to alternate the constraint distance from the top or the bottom Split Region Command When editing vertically compound walls the Split Region command divides a wall layer or regions horizontally or vertically into new regions When you split a region the new regions assume the same material as the original To split a layer or region horizontally highlight one of the...

Page 609: ...ck to merge them When you merge regions the position of the cursor when you highlight a border determines which material prevails after the merge The material from the right region prevails when you merge The material from the left region prevails when you merge Assign Layers Command When editing vertically compound walls the Assign Layers command assigns a row to a layer or region It assigns the ...

Page 610: ...remain in a sequential order from left to right To test the sample wall select row numbers sequentially and observe the selection in the preview pane If the layers do not highlight in an order from left to right Revit Architecture cannot produce this wall A row cannot be assigned more than one layer You cannot have the same row assigned to regions on both sides of the core You cannot apply a thick...

Page 611: ... a profile from the list For example select Parapet Cap Precast 4 Specify a material for the sweep 5 For Distance specify the distance from either the top or base of the wall select top or base in the From column 6 For Side specify the interior or exterior of the wall 7 Specify a value if necessary for Offset A negative value moves the sweep toward the wall core 8 Select Flip to measure the distan...

Page 612: ...the distance from the top of the reveal profile rather than the bottom 8 For Setback specify the reveal setback distance from inserts such as windows and doors 9 Click OK Vertically Stacked Walls Revit Architecture features a stacked wall type which is one wall that includes several different subwalls stacked on top of each other All subwalls in a stacked wall are attached and have joined geometry...

Page 613: ...s to a stacked wall to change its structure You can add or delete walls You can move subwalls up or down the height of the stacked wall You can define a reference line for the entire stacked wall and then offset each subwall from that reference line IMPORTANT Define the structure of vertically stacked walls before placing any instances in the project Height conflicts may occur when previously plac...

Page 614: ...wall change another subwall to variable by selecting its row and clicking Variable 10 For Offset for the selected subwall specify the distance to offset the horizontal location line of the subwall from the reference line Offset of the main wall A positive value moves the subwall toward the exterior side left side in the preview pane of the main wall For example if the reference line of the main wa...

Page 615: ...own There is no Reassemble command to restack such a wall When you break up a stacked wall the base constraint and base offset of each subwall is the same as that of the stacked wall You can then edit instance properties for any of the walls Vertically Stacked Wall Notes When using vertically stacked walls consider the following guidelines All subwalls use the same base constraint and base offset ...

Page 616: ...be in different phases worksets or design options from that of the stacked wall To place inserts in a vertically stacked wall you may need to use the Pick Main Host command to switch between the vertically stacked wall and one of the walls that compose it For example the door panel in the following illustration is outside the upper wall because the main host of the door is the bottom subwall To pl...

Page 617: ...r ceiling to attach The selected walls attach to the selected modelling component and Revit Architecture returns to Modify mode Repeat this procedure as many times as needed to attach the walls Attaching a Floor to a Wall s Structural Layer When attaching a wall to a floor you can specify whether to attach the floor to the wall s finish layer or its structural layer To do this change the value for...

Page 618: ...walls on the Options Bar click Detach All The walls detach from any component to which they were previously attached Wall Joins When you create walls Revit Architecture automatically joins them at their intersections You can edit wall joins when necessary For best results edit wall joins in a plan view The following are examples of valid wall joins that you can edit Walls at acute angles Several w...

Page 619: ...iting Wall Joins NOTE The Edit Wall Join command is not recommended for complex wall joins for example a wall join with more than 4 walls a wall join on many floors or a wall join that is in more than one workset For more information see Editing Complex Wall Joins on page 583 1 Click Tools menu Edit Wall Joins or on the Tools toolbar click 2 Move the cursor over the wall join and click A square en...

Page 620: ...miter join between the walls All wall joins less than 20 are mitered Miter join Square Off Squares a wall end to 90 This option is not available for walls already joined at 90 582 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 621: ...n 3 Drag the wall ends back into the join using the snapping feedback to create the desired configuration 4 Prevent walls from joining For more information see Preventing Wall Ends from Joining on page 588 Changing the Order of a Wall Join Changing wall order affects the display of a wall join by changing which wall butts up against another To change wall join order 1 In a plan view click Tools me...

Page 622: ...erence in the imaginary lines depicting the wall ends Cleaning Wall Joins Cleaning up wall joins affects display in a plan view only If multiple plan views of the same join are open the command only affects the plan view in which you issued the command 584 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 623: ...ean join Don t Clean Join displays the wall ends butting up against one another Don t Clean Join Use View Setting cleans wall joins depending on how the property Wall Join Display is set See View Properties on page 210 4 When you finish making wall join edits click Modify or press ESC to exit the command Joining Parallel Walls that Contain Inserts If you join 2 parallel walls and one of them has a...

Page 624: ...before the walls are joined The following image shows the walls after they are joined using the Join Geometry tool Creating Walls with Mid End Faces You can join walls to mid end faces To create mid end faces you edit the wall s elevation profile To create mid end faces 1 Sketch a wall with several levels 2 Select the wall and on the Options Bar click Edit Profile 3 Add vertical lines in between t...

Page 625: ...to form a corner join Joining Walls to Mid End Faces You can join a wall to a mid end face As you drag one of the attached walls the sketch updates and maintains the join Adding wall to mid end face 2 walls join with cleaned join Drag one of the joined walls and the wall join moves with it Wall Joins 587 ...

Page 626: ...more non editable walls are already joined You can delete an editable wall that is joined to a non editable wall except as noted below You cannot join or unjoin an editable wall to a non editable wall if that would change the shape of the non editable wall You cannot join an editable wall to the end of a non editable wall Revit Architecture keeps the walls close together but does not join them and...

Page 627: ...eometry used To Prevent a Join on a Wall End 1 Select the wall 2 Right click the wall end control where you want to disallow the join 3 Click Disallow Join from the shortcut menu The end of the wall cannot join to the end of another wall If you want to allow the join you can select the wall right click the wall end control and click Allow Join from the shortcut menu or right click Allow Join above...

Page 628: ...allow Join from the shortcut menu Notice changes to The mid end wall cannot join to the end of another wall Selected mid end wall with join disallowed If you want to allow the join click above the mid end wall face or right click and click Allow Join from the shortcut menu Selected mid end wall with join allowed 590 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 629: ...wall Revit Architecture allows you to modify the shape of the wall or add openings to it by selecting the wall and editing its elevation profile To edit a wall s elevation profile the view must be parallel and can be either a section or elevation view RELATED See Cutting Rectangular Openings in Walls on page 659 Modifying Wall Elevations 1 After sketching a wall click Modify Then click the wall to...

Page 630: ...r vertical in a plan view you should draw a section parallel to the wall before going into the elevation sketch mode When you go into sketch mode the Go To View dialog appears Revit Architecture suggests the section view as the optimal view for editing the sketch Click Open View to open that view You cannot edit the elevation profile of an arc wall While you edit the elevation profile of a wall at...

Page 631: ... wall sweeps which are part of the wall type definition can not be scheduled independently For more information on creating schedules see Schedule Views on page 124 NOTE If you create wall sweeps at different heights and then later set them to the same height the sweeps miter at the joins Adding Wall Sweeps 1 Go to a 3D or elevation view 2 Click Modelling menu Host Sweep Wall Sweep or on the Model...

Page 632: ...New 3 For Profile select the desired profile type 4 Click OK Returning Wall Sweeps Back to the Wall After placing a wall sweep you can return its ends back toward the wall NOTE This procedure is also available for wall reveals 1 In a 3D or elevation view select the wall sweep segment Be sure it is not already joined to another segment 2 On the Options Bar click Change Sweep Returns The Straight Cu...

Page 633: ...wall sweep 2 In the Type Selector select a wall sweep type If the desired wall sweep type is not listed in the Type Selector you can load additional profile families Click File menu Load From Library Load Family Adding or Removing Segments from a Wall Sweep You can continue an existing sweep onto new walls or remove segments from existing wall sweeps 1 Open a 3D view and select the desired wall sw...

Page 634: ...p segment 1 Select the segment 2 Move it up or down horizontal wall sweeps or side to side vertical wall sweeps To move a multi segmented wall sweep 1 Place the cursor over the wall sweep and press TAB to select the shape handle of the wall sweep Watch the status bar to know when you are highlighting the shape handle 2 Click to select the shape handle 3 Move the wall sweep up or down horizontal wa...

Page 635: ...f there is an overlap Setting this value to No can increase performance on large building models with many sweeps Cuts Wall When selected inserts such as doors and windows cut geometry out of the sweep See Sweeps and Reveals Commands on page 573 Cut by Inserts This value specifies the distance the sweep is set back from each intersecting wall insert Default Setback Construction Specifies the profi...

Page 636: ...ll sweep in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used Type Mark but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Cost of the materials for constructing the wall sweep This information can be in cluded in a schedule Cost Wall Sweep Instance Properties Description Name Constraints The ...

Page 637: ... was demolished Phase Demolished Wall Reveals A wall reveal is a decorative cutout in a wall You can add a reveal to a wall from a 3D or elevation view Reveals can be horizontal or vertical Adding a Wall Reveal 1 Go to a 3D or non parallel elevation view 2 Click Modelling menu Host Sweep Wall Reveal or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Host Sweep Reveal 3 In the Type Selector select the...

Page 638: ...hanging Wall RevealTypes 1 In the drawing area select a wall reveal 2 In the Type Selector select a wall reveal type If the desired wall reveal type is not listed in the Type Selector you can load additional profile families Click File menu Load From Library Load Family Wall Reveal Properties You can modify several properties for wall reveals including profiles and offsets Modifying Wall Reveal Pr...

Page 639: ...ily used to create the reveal Profile Wall Reveal Instance Properties Description Name Constraints The distance from the wall face This setting changes the depth of the reveal Offset from wall The reveal s level This property only appears with horizontal reveals Level The reveal s offset from the level This property only appears with horizontal reveals Offset from level Dimensions The length of th...

Page 640: ...ocation line In the next picture the origin is not at the location line of the top wall Its location line moves The green dashed preview line that is below the top wall represents the wall location line Location line moves when not the origin point In the next picture the origin is at the location line of the top wall Its location line does not move The green dashed preview line in the picture rep...

Page 641: ...Properties Description Name Construction Click Edit to create compound walls See Compound Structure on page 748 Structure Sets the layer wrapping of walls at inserts See Layer Wrapping on page 751 Wrapping at Inserts Sets the layer wrapping of wall end caps See Setting Layer Wrapping on page 752 Wrapping at Ends Sets the width of the wall Width Sets a wall to exterior interior retaining foundation...

Page 642: ...icular wall Generally this is not an applicable property for walls This value must be unique for each wall in a project Revit Architecture Type Mark warns you if the number is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Fire rating of the wall Fire Rating Cost of the materials for constructin...

Page 643: ...ly value Top is Attached The distance you have moved the top of the layers in a wall See Compound Structure on page 748 This parameter is enabled when layers of a wall are extendable Top Extension Distance If selected the wall is part of a room boundary If cleared the wall is not part of a room boundary This property is read only before creating a wall After you draw the wall you can select it and...

Page 644: ...n panel or a wall Schedule as Roofs Roofs are components that define different types of roofs for the building design Various types of roofs can be made in Revit Architecture Adding a Roof Roofs can be made from the building footprint as extrusions or from mass instances For information on adding a roof from a mass instance see Creating Roofs from Mass Instances on page 551 A roof cannot cut throu...

Page 645: ... lines or by selecting walls to define the roof profile The footprint sketch is created at the level of the plan view where it is sketched You can control the height of the start of the sloping roof plane using the Base Height Offset property for the roof The sketch must contain a closed loop representing the outside or perimeter of the roof The roof sketch may also contain other closed loops whic...

Page 646: ...re slope defining you can change the slope value by clicking the line and editing the value When a roof line is set to slope defining this symbol appears adjacent to it In the following image the top horizontal line and the bottom horizontal line are slope defining 5 On the Design Bar click Finish Roof To see the roof open a 3D view Completed gable roof with overhang Footprint RoofTips To cut off ...

Page 647: ...te a roof by extrusion you can rehost the roof or edit the work plane of the roof For more information see Rehosting Work Plane based and Face based Elements and Components on page 747 and Changing the Work Plane of an Element on page 268 Sketching a Roof by Extrusion 1 Display an elevation 3D or section view 2 Click Modelling menu Roof Roof by Extrusion or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar c...

Page 648: ...ng the Work Plane of an Element on page 268 Cutting Openings in an Extruded Roof 1 Select the extruded roof and click Cut Plan Profile on the Options Bar 2 If the Go to View dialog is displayed choose the appropriate plan view in which to edit the profile A plan view representation of the roof is displayed Reference planes define the boundary of the roof 3 Sketch closed loop openings in the roof u...

Page 649: ...dialog prompts you to move it to a different level ensuring that the roof is higher than any walls joining to it If you choose not to move the roof to a different level Revit Architecture notifies you later if the roof is too low 2 Sketch the roof 3 If the roof is based on a footprint specify roof boundary lines as slope defining or use the roof slope arrow to define the slope See Roof Slope Arrow...

Page 650: ...minor roof 7 Click Tools menu Join Unjoin Roof or on the toolbar click Join Unjoin Roof 8 Select one edge on the end of the minor roof that you want to join 9 Select a face on the wall or major roof to which you want to join the minor roof Revit Architecture joins the roof Joined roofs Unjoining Roofs When applied to joined roofs the Join Unjoin Roof command works just like Undo However the comman...

Page 651: ...or by editing properties If you are in sketch mode and click Roof Properties you can edit the Base Level and Offset properties to change the position of the reference plane When you return to a project view the roof has moved according to the changes to the reference level In a project view you might be warned that the roof geometry cannot move when you attempt to change the base level or offset E...

Page 652: ...ighlighted 2 Click to select the shape handle then drag it as desired Resizing a roof with shape handle Aligning Roof Ridges You can align roof ridges in 3D and elevation views To align roof ridges in an elevation view use the Align tool See Aligning Elements on page 306 To align in a 3D view you first must set a work plane in the view that is not perpendicular to the ridges of the roof To align r...

Page 653: ...ne dialog select the work plane name you just created in Step 2 and click OK 5 Use the Align tool to align roof ridges See Aligning Elements on page 306 Unaligned roof ridges Result of aligning roof ridges Roof Slope You can change the slope of any slope defining lines in a roof without editing the roof Select the roof and access its properties to view the Slope parameter Roof Slope 615 ...

Page 654: ...tprint boundary lines as slope defining For example to create a flat sloping roof when no footprint boundary lines are specified as slope defining lines sketch a slope arrow from the corners of the roof sketch The Slope Arrow command appears on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar when you are sketching a roof What is the Slope Arrow A slope arrow is an alternative way to define the slope of a roof fl...

Page 655: ...fying an appropriate value for Offset From Roof Base Accessing the Slope Arrow Command When in sketch mode click Slope Arrow on the Design Bar to begin creating slope arrows Eaves When you sketch a roof you create eaves by setting an overhang value Once you complete the sketch of the roof you can align eaves and change the eave cut For more information on sketching a roof see Adding a Roof on page...

Page 656: ...oject view 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog for Rafter Cut value select Plumb Cut Two Cut Plumb or Two Cut Square 4 For Two Cut Plumb and Two Cut Square specify a value for Fascia Depth between zero and the thickness of the roof 5 Click OK 618 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 657: ...he Adjust Overhang option changes the eave height by adjusting the Overhang value See Roof Properties on page 635 5 On the Design Bar click Finish Roof The results of adjusting the overhang are visible after you finish the roof Dormers Creating a Dormer Using Slope Arrows 1 Sketch a roof footprint including slope defining lines See Adding a Roof by Footprint on page 607 2 While in sketch mode clic...

Page 658: ...ope arrows 6 On the Design Bar click Slope Arrow again and sketch a second slope arrow that begins from the other end point of the segment Properly sketched slope arrows 7 Click Finish Sketch and open a 3D view to see the results 620 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 659: ...he Design Bar click Opening Dormer Opening 4 Highlight the main roof on the building model and click to select it Watch the status bar to be sure that you are highlighting the main roof The Pick command is active so that you can pick the boundaries that compose the dormer opening 5 Place the cursor in the drawing area Valid boundaries are highlighted Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its botto...

Page 660: ...sign Bar click Finish Boundary 7 Create a section view through the dormer to see how it cuts the main roof Revit Architecture makes both vertical and horizontal cuts in the roof Dormer opening in a 3D view Fascia You can add fascia to edges of roofs soffits and other fascias You can also add fascia to model lines 622 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 661: ...atch the status bar It will indicate valid references or points where you can place fascia For example if you are placing fascia on a roof a valid reference might be Roofs Basic Roof Reference When you place fascia in a section view place the cursor near the corners of the element to highlight the reference or press TAB 3 On the Options Bar click Start Next to start a different fascia 4 Move the c...

Page 662: ...ia and select Flip About Horizontal Axis or Flip About Vertical Axis Adding or Removing Segments of the Fascia 1 In the drawing area select the fascia If many elements near the fascia make selection difficult use the filter selection tool to select the fascia Highlight the area near the fascia is using a pick box and click on the Options Bar Select Roof Fascias and click OK 2 On the Options Bar cl...

Page 663: ... a mitering option Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular to Path 4 Click on the end face of the fascia to change the miter option Vertical miter Horizontal miter Perpendicular to Path miter Roof fascias can miter between the eave and rake edges of a plumb cut gable roof Fascia 625 ...

Page 664: ...ace the cursor over the fascia and press TAB to highlight the shape handle The status bar indicates when you are highlighting the shape handle 2 Click to select the shape handle 3 Move the cursor left or right to change the horizontal offset This affects the horizontal offset of all segments of the fascia so the segments are symmetrical ChangingVertical Offset of Roof Fascia 1 Select the fascia an...

Page 665: ...sociative soffits use the Lines command while in sketch mode 1 Click Modelling menu Roof Roof Soffit or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Roof Roof Soffit 2 On the Design Bar click Pick Roofs This command creates a locked sketch line 3 Highlight the roof and click Roof selected with Pick Roofs command 4 Click Pick Walls highlight the outside faces of the wall beneath the roof and click ...

Page 666: ...se the sketch loop See Trimming and Extending Elements on page 316 6 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch To see the soffit better create a section view through the plan view that shows the wall meeting the roof See Creating a Section View on page 92 Roof soffit and wall in section view 628 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 667: ...wall and the wall to the roof See Joining Geometry on page 334 TIP Use the Slope Arrow tool to create a sloping soffit See Roof Slope Arrow on page 616 Roof Soffit Examples Soffit selected in elevation view Soffits selected on model with gambrel roof Roof Gutters You can add gutters to edges of roofs soffits and fascia You can also add gutters to model lines Roof Gutters 629 ...

Page 668: ...r NOTE Watch the status bar It will indicate valid references or points where you can place roof gutters For example if you are placing a gutter on a roof a valid reference might be Roofs Basic Roof Reference When you place gutters in a section view place the cursor near the corners of the element to highlight the reference or press TAB 3 On the Options Bar click Start Next to start a different gu...

Page 669: ...oof Gutters and click OK 2 On the Options Bar click Add or Remove Segments 3 Click a reference edge to add a gutter or remove a gutter NOTE Watch the status bar It will indicate valid references or points where you can add or remove gutters For example if you are adding gutters to a roof a valid reference might be Roofs Basic Roof Reference When you add or remove segments of a gutter in a section ...

Page 670: ...re shows you how to create a roof with slope defined lines at different elevations by joining 2 separate roofs TIP This procedure works best with a multi level building 1 Create a footprint roof sketch similar to the following 2 On the Design Bar click Roof Properties and specify a cutoff level for the roof For example if you are sketching the roof on level 2 you might specify level 4 as the cutof...

Page 671: ... the 2 roofs in a plan view You now have a single roof with different eave heights Here is the finished house with that roof style Four Sided Gable Roof A common building scenario is a 4 sided gable roof The following is a quick procedure to create this look Roof Examples 633 ...

Page 672: ...s to be non slope defining 2 On the Design Bar click Slope Arrow 3 On the Options Bar click 4 For the Specify parameter select Slope 5 For the Slope parameter enter 9 or the metric equivalent 6 Sketch slope arrows as shown 7 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch 8 Open the roof in 3D 634 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 673: ... If you are in a plan view select the roof and click 2 In the Element Properties dialog edit roof instance parameters as desired See Roof Instance Properties on page 637 3 To edit roof type parameters click Edit New Change the roof type parameters as desired and click OK See Roof Type Properties on page 636 NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all roofs of this type in the project You can c...

Page 674: ...age 1058 Keynote The model type for the roof Model The manufacturer of the roof Manufacturer Comments about the roof Type Comments Link for a manufacturer web page URL Description of the roof Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly description Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly code A value to designate the particular roof...

Page 675: ...wall during creation of the extrusion the start point starts the extrusion to some Extrusion start point traveling out from the outer edge of the wall This parameter is only enabled for extruded roofs Sets the end point of the extrusion For example if you pick the outer edge of the wall during creation of the extrusion the end point ends the extrusion at some point Extrusion end out from the outer...

Page 676: ...tes the thickness of the roof This is a read only value Thickness The area of the roof This is a read only value Area The volume of the roof This is a read only value Volume Identity Data Comments about a particular roof Comments A label applied to a roof Usually a numeric value This value must be unique for each roof in a project Revit Architecture issues a warning if the number is already Mark u...

Page 677: ...the pitch of the roof This property sets the slope angle for slope defining lines Slope The actual length of the roof boundary line This is a read only value Length Roof Fascia and GutterType Properties Description Name Construction The profile shape for the fascia or gutter Choose from a list of predefined profiles or create your own profile using the profile hosted rft template See Profile Famil...

Page 678: ...traints Moves the fascia or gutter above or below the edge on which you created it For example if you chose a horizontal roof edge a fascia moves above or below that edge Vertical profile offset Moves the fascia or gutter forward or backward from the edge on which you created it Horizontal profile offset Rotates the fascia or gutter to the desired angle Angle Dimensions The actual length of the fa...

Page 679: ...height above the Level at Head This property is enabled when Height at Tail is set as the value for Specify Height Offset at Head Dimensions Sets a slope value Slope The actual length of the slope arrow This is a read only value Length Floors You create floors by sketching them either by picking walls or by using the Lines command Typically you sketch a floor in a plan view although you can use a ...

Page 680: ...fy an offset for the floor edges NOTE When you are using Pick Walls select Extend into wall to core to measure the offset from the wall s core 4 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch Changing the FloorType To change the floor type in sketch mode 1 While sketching a floor on the Design Bar click Floor Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog for Type select a floor type 3 Click OK To change th...

Page 681: ...ing a Slope Arrow 1 If you are not already in sketch mode select the floor in plan view and on the Options Bar click Edit 2 On the Design Bar click Slope Arrow 3 Sketch the slope arrow on the floor Floor sketch with slope arrow 4 Select the slope arrow and click 5 For Specify select a value Height at Tail or Slope 6 If you selected Height at Tail do the following a For Level at Tail specify a leve...

Page 682: ... the floor in plan view and on the Options Bar click Edit 2 Select a single sketch line and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog select Defines Constant Height 4 Select the Defines Slope property and set a value for the slope angle rise 5 Click OK Floor Slab Edges You add slab edges by selecting horizontal edges of floors You can also select model lines 1 Click Modelling menu Host Sweep Floor ...

Page 683: ...ing Segments of the Slab 1 Select an existing slab and on the Options Bar click Add or Remove Segments 2 Click a reference edge to add a slab Click the edge again to remove a slab NOTE You may need to press TAB to highlight a reference edge in section Changing Horizontal andVertical Offset You can change the horizontal or vertical offset of a slab edge either through its properties or by graphical...

Page 684: ...ile Specifies the appearance of the host sweep in various views including a raytraced model See Materials on page 459 Material Floor Slab Edge Instance Properties Description Name The actual length of the host sweep Length The actual volume of the floor slab edge Volume floor slab edges only Moves the host sweep above or below the edge on which you created it Vertical profile offset Moves the host...

Page 685: ...ketch line or slope arrow and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog edit the sketch line or slope arrow properties 4 Click OK FloorType Properties Description Name Construction Creates the composition of a compound floor See Compound Structure on page 748 Structure Indicates the thickness of the floor type which is determined by the cumulative thickness of its layers This is a read only propert...

Page 686: ...schedule Cost If design options have been created this property indicates the design option in which the element exists For more information on design options see Design Op tions on page 1237 Design Option Floor Instance Properties Description Name Constraints The level with which the floor is associated Level The height at which the floor is offset from the level Height Offset From Level Indicate...

Page 687: ... using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 If design options have been created this property indicates the design option in which the element exists For more information on design options see Design Op tions on page 1237 Design Option Phasing The phase when the floor was created Phase Created The phase when the floor was demolished Phase Demolished Structural An...

Page 688: ...is measured from the wall core Extend into wall to core Graphics If the floor sketch line is an arc specifies whether the center mark for the arc appears You can dimension to the center mark of an arc Center Mark Vis ible Dimensions Sets the slope angle for the selected floor line The default value is 0 This parameter is enabled when Defines Slope Property is turned on Slope The actual length of a...

Page 689: ...e design option in which the element exists For more information on design options see Design Op tions on page 1237 Design Option Ceilings You can create ceilings automatically in a project view or by sketching Ceilings should be created in the reflected ceiling plan RCP view or in sketch mode Ceilings are level based elements which means that you sketch them at a specified distance above the leve...

Page 690: ...ight a wall press TAB until chain of walls or lines displays in the status bar and click 4 On the Design Bar click Ceiling Properties 5 In the Element Properties dialog designate the type of ceiling and its properties and click OK 6 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch To sketch a ceiling by drawing 1 On the Design Bar click Lines and on the Options Bar click Draw 2 Use the sketching tools to com...

Page 691: ...Height Offset at Tail specify how high above the level the slope arrow begins 3 For Level at Tail specify the level at which to start the slope arrow For example the ceiling sketch is on Level 2 You could choose to start the slope arrow on Level 3 4 For Height Offset at Head specify how high above the level the slope arrow ends 5 For Level at Head specify the level at which to end the slope arrow ...

Page 692: ...ilingTypes When you activate the Ceiling command to place a ceiling you can select different types of ceilings in the Type Selector Creating a New CeilingType 1 In the Type Selector select a ceiling from the list 2 Click 3 Click Edit New 4 In the Type Properties dialog click New and type the ceiling name 5 Click OK 6 Modify the ceiling properties See Ceiling Properties on page 655 Applying a Surfa...

Page 693: ... If you are in sketch mode on the Design Bar click Ceiling Properties If you are in a plan view select the ceiling and click 2 In the Element Properties dialog edit ceiling instance parameters 3 Click Edit New to edit ceiling type parameters NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all ceilings of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new ceiling type 4 Click OK CeilingTy...

Page 694: ...rchitecture warns you if the Type Mark number is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Cost of the materials for constructing the wall Cost Specifies the appearance of the ceiling in various views including a raytraced model For more information on setting a material see Materials on pa...

Page 695: ...Description Name Constraints The level at which the ceiling resides Level Sets a ceiling line to slope defining This property is enabled when Defines Constant Height is turned on Defines Slope Enables a ceiling line to have a constant height above the level on which it is sketched This property is for defining slope For example to define slope you can Defines Constant Height set 2 parallel lines t...

Page 696: ...ctual length of a sketch line for the ceiling This is a read only property Length Openings Use the Opening tool to cut openings in walls floors ceilings roofs structural beams braces and structural columns When you cut a floor ceiling or roof you can choose to cut vertically or perpendicular to the surface You can also sketch complex shapes using the drawing tools on the Options Bar When cutting a...

Page 697: ... shapes Before cutting an opening open a view of the prospective host wall where you can sketch the opening such as an elevation or section view View of an opening in an arc wall To cut a rectangular opening in a wall 1 Open an elevation or section view where you can access the wall that will host the opening 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Opening Wall Opening 3 Select the wall tha...

Page 698: ...in Floors Roofs and Ceilings You can cut openings on faces of roofs floors or ceilings using the Opening tool in a project view This tool is useful for creating an opening in a roof to place a chimney You can either cut an opening in the faces of these elements or you can select the entire element to make a vertical cut 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Opening Opening by Face or Open...

Page 699: ...moves on all levels 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Opening Shaft Opening 2 Sketch a shaft opening by drawing lines or by picking walls TIP Typically you will want to sketch the shaft on a host element such as a floor in a plan view 3 If desired add symbolic lines to the opening 4 When you are done sketching the shaft click Finish Sketch Shaft opening with symbolic lines 5 To adjust...

Page 700: ...l you define in the stair properties The number of treads for a stair run is based on the distance between floors and the maximum riser height defined in the stair properties A rectangle is displayed in the drawing area representing the footprint of the run of the stairs When creating new stairs you can also specify the railing type to be used See Specifying the Railing Type for New Stairs on page...

Page 701: ...created with 9 remaining Additional run of stairs perpendicular to the original Completed sketch with landing created automatically You can modify the sketch of the footprint for the stairs In the next figure the landing of the sketch has been modified Run of stairs after modification Creating Stairs by Sketching Boundary and Riser Lines You can define your stairs by sketching boundaries and riser...

Page 702: ...ing in order to achieve the desired results 1 After you have sketched the stairs and are still in sketch mode on the toolbar click Split 2 Split the boundary lines where they meet the landing Tips Do not connect left and right boundary lines to each other You can sketch them as single lines or multi segmented lines for example straight lines and arcs connected Connect riser lines between the left ...

Page 703: ...if there is more than one jog 8 Edit the footprint if desired 9 To change the properties of the stairs click and click Edit New For a description of stair properties and their values see Stair Properties on page 671 10 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch Revit Architecture generates a staircase with automatic railings Completed stairs in 3D with default railings and balusters Creating Spiral Sta...

Page 704: ...ced accurately TIP To create a spiral staircase to multiple levels create one helix for the stairs and then copy that helix to the appropriate levels Creating Arced Landings You can create arced landings if you sketch arced runs that share a center and a radius value Spiral arcs with same radius and center 666 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 705: ... and then restart the Stairs tool You can also create the stairs with any railing type and change the type after you have created the desired railings For more information see Railings on page 680 4 Click OK NOTE The default railing type when creating stairs is the railing type specified when you are in Railing sketch mode and click Railing Properties You can change the default railing by selectin...

Page 706: ...ormulas The following is a rule of thumb formula for interior stairs as specified in the Architectural Graphic Standards Riser Tread 17 5 inches 7 5 inches for the riser height 10 inches for the tread depth Riser Tread 75 inches 2 Riser Tread is greater than or equal to 24 inches minimum threshold or less than or equal to 25 inches maximum threshold Modifying Stairs Boundaries and Riser and Run Li...

Page 707: ...nnot form a closed loop You can resize it by dragging the blue controls See Controls and Shape Handles on page 279 and Splitting Walls and Lines on page 335 You can move the railing line to a new location such as the center of the staircase You cannot draw multiple railings in the same session Modified stairs with center railing Extending Stair Railings If you extend stair railings for example to ...

Page 708: ...l to move the label OR 1 Select the run of stairs A blue drag control appears 2 Drag the control to move the label OR 1 Highlight the entire run of stairs and press TAB to select the shape handle Watch the status bar as you press TAB until it indicates that the shape handle is highlighted 2 Drag the label to a new position Changing the Stair Direction You can change the direction of stairs after y...

Page 709: ...eters listed here duplicate your stair type from the Element Properties dialog and then you should see all of the parameters Modifying Stair Properties 1 If you are in sketch mode on the Design Bar click Stairs Properties If you are in a plan view select the stairs and click 2 In the Element Properties dialog edit stair instance parameters See Stair Instance Properties on page 674 3 Click Edit New...

Page 710: ...ak line Break Symbol in Plan Changes the size of the UP DN symbol in a plan view Text Size Sets the font of the UP DN symbol Text Font Materials and Finishes Click the button to open the Materials dialog See Materials on page 459 for more information on creating a material Tread Material See Tread Material description Riser Material See Tread Material description Stringer Material See Tread Materi...

Page 711: ...ical cut resulting in a point at the top Trim Stringers at Top If you select Match Level the stringer is curt horizontally making the top of the stringer flush with the top level If you select Match Landing Stringer a horizontal cut is made at the same height as the stringer top on landings To see the effects of this parameter clearly you may want to clear the check box for End with Riser Sets the...

Page 712: ...sing it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Re viewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Add or edit the stairs keynote Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote The model type for the stairs May not be applicable Model Manufacturer for the stair materials May not be applicable Manufacturer Specific comments on the stair type Type Co...

Page 713: ... or hides the Up label in plan Up Label Displays or hides the Up arrow in plan Up Arrow Displays or hides the Down label in plan Down Label Displays or hides the Down arrow in plan Down Arrow Displays the Up arrow in all project views Show Up arrow in all views Dimensions Width of the stairs Width The number of risers is calculated based on the height between levels Desired Number of Risers Normal...

Page 714: ...gs see Stairs on page 662 You can create ramps in plan or 3D views Finished ramp Adding a Ramp 1 Click Modelling menu Ramp or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Ramp Revit Architecture enters sketch mode and the Run command is active 2 On the Sketch toolbar click Set Work Plane to select a different work plane See Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 3 On the Options Bar click the strai...

Page 715: ... by selecting a new type in the Element Properties dialog For more information see Railings on page 680 NOTE If the desired railing type is not listed in the Railings Type dialog you can quit the Ramp tool create the railing type and then restart the ramp creation process You can also create the ramp with any railing type and then change the railings later after you have created the desired railin...

Page 716: ...ruction Sets the thickness of the ramp This property is enabled only when the Shape property is set to thick Thickness Graphics The size of the font for the ramp s up text and down text Text Size The font for the ramp s up text and down text Text Font Materials and Finishes Material applied to the surface of the ramp for rendering Ramp Material Dimensions Specifies the maximum amount of consecutiv...

Page 717: ... for the ramp Ramp Max Slope 1 x Applies a shape to the ramp for display purposes Shape Ramp Instance Properties Description Name Constraints Sets the base of the ramp Base Level Sets the ramp s height from its base level Base Offset Sets the top of the ramp Top Level Sets the ramp s offset from the top level Top Offset Sets the top of the ramp in a multi story building Multistory Top Level Graphi...

Page 718: ... demolished See Demolishing Elements on page 1270 Phase Demolished Railings You can add railings as free standing components to levels or attach them to hosts such as floors ramps or stairs When you sketch a railing rails and balusters are automatically placed on the railing at evenly spaced intervals For information on editing baluster and post placement see Controlling Placement of Balusters and...

Page 719: ...ging the RailingType To change the railing type in sketch mode 1 On the Design Bar click Railing Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog select a type from the Type menu To change the railing type from a project view 1 Select the railing in the project view 2 In the Type Selector select a different railing type Modifying Railing Structure You can change the height offset profile material and...

Page 720: ... see Railing Type Properties on page 689 Modifying Railing Height and Slope You can control the height and slope of individual rail sketch lines For example on a set of U shaped stairs you may want to set the inner railing to a different height than the outer railing With slope adjustment you can control how the railing segment follows the slope of the stairs You may want the segment to be flat at...

Page 721: ...ster pattern is provided with the default project template You can use this pattern modify it or create a more complex pattern NOTE If you start a new project using a template when you sketch a railing balusters and posts are added by default If you start a project without a template balusters and posts are not placed by default when you sketch a railing Creating a Custom Baluster Pattern 1 In a p...

Page 722: ...dialog a rail structure that is not defined in your drawing 7 For Base Offset enter a value 8 Select the Top Refer to the previous table 9 Enter a value for Top offset 10 Enter a value for Dist from previous 11 Enter a value for Offset 12 For Break Pattern do the following Then If you want the baluster pattern select Each Segment End spread along the length of each railing segment select Angles Gr...

Page 723: ...ription Property The name of a specific baluster within the pattern Name The style of the baluster or post family If you select None no balusters or posts display in that portion of the pattern Baluster Family Specifies where the bottom of the baluster is placed at the top of the rail bottom of the rail or top of the host A host can be a level floor stair or ramp Base The negative or positive vert...

Page 724: ...ng and end depends on which way you drew the railing right to left or left to right If there is extra space along the railing segment but it cannot be filled with a pattern you can specify how to fill that space You can specify that a specific baluster family fill the Excess Length Fill excess space and set a spacing increment for it You can specify that the baluster pattern be truncated to fill t...

Page 725: ...ns at 0 Turn angles are measured in the plan view Segment breaks in the railing that do not occur at a turn are ignored a turn greater than a given value select Never do not want to place a post regardless of any separations or turns in the railing 12 Click OK Post Properties Following are the display properties for posts Description Property The post family Alternately you can select None or Defa...

Page 726: ... in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new railing type 3 For Baluster Placement click Edit 4 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog select the baluster or post to remove in Main Pattern 5 To delete the baluster or post from the pattern click Delete To leave a space in the pattern where a baluster or post currently exists for Baluster Family change the value to None 6 Click OK Railing ...

Page 727: ... Height parameter at intermediate or top landings Landing Height Adjustment If 2 railing segments meet at an angle in plan but do not connect vertically Revit Architecture can add vertical or horizontal segments to create a join or add no Angled Joins connector leaving a gap This can be used to create a continuous railing where the start of a stair run leading up from a landing cannot be displaced...

Page 728: ...s the railing type mark Type Mark Railing cost Cost Railing Instance Properties Description Name Constraints Sets the base level for the railing You can change this value to any level in the project Base Level Offsets the railing to a specified distance above or below the base level Base Offset Dimensions The actual length of the railing Length Identity Data Comments on the railing Comments A mark...

Page 729: ...tions Architectural columns inherit the material of other elements to which they are joined Compound layers in walls wrap at architectural columns This does not apply to structural columns Adding a Column You can add columns in plan view The height of the column is defined in the properties of the component Using the properties you can define the Base Level and the Top Level as well as offsets 1 C...

Page 730: ...ptions Bar you can attach the Top or Base of a column or columns and set the Attachment Style Cut Column Cut Target Do Not Cut Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Intersect Column Midline and Maximum Intersection and Offset from Attachment Offset from Attachment sets a value to be offset from the target The target roofs floors ceilings can be cut by the column the column can be cut by th...

Page 731: ... Attachment Style Cut Column Attachment Justification Maximum Intersection Attachment Style Cut Column Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Offset from Attachment On Attaching Columns 693 ...

Page 732: ... Attachment Style Cut Column Attachment Justification Intersect Column Midline 694 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 733: ...et attachment style with different attachment justifications and offsets from attachment Attachment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Attachment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Maximum Intersection Attaching Columns 695 ...

Page 734: ...le Cut Target Attachment Justification Minimum Intersection Offset from Attachment On Attachment Style Cut Target Attachment Justification Intersect Column Midline 696 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 735: ... through the joined face of the 2 elements Wall and column joined column assumes the fill pattern of the wall NOTE Structural columns do not assume the walls fill pattern even when joined Modifying Architectural Columns Changing ColumnTypes When you activate the Column command to place columns you can select different types of columns in the Type Selector Moving a Column You can move the column by...

Page 736: ... this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new architectural column type 4 Click OK Architectural ColumnType Properties Description Name Graphics Specifies the color of the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern in any coarse plan view Coarse Scale Fill Color Specifies the cut pattern that displays within the column in any coarse plan view Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Materials and Finishes The...

Page 737: ...ject Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used but Type Mark allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Cost of the materials for constructing the column This information can be included in a schedule Cost Architectural Column Instance Properties Description Name Constraints Specifies the le...

Page 738: ...n Midline Maximum Intersection Attachment Justification at Top Specifies an offset value for cut target column conditions Offset From Attachment at Top Curtain Elements This section provides information about curtain elements Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions A curtain wall is any exterior wall that is attached to the building structure and which does not carry the floor or roof loads of th...

Page 739: ...Curtain wall Curtain Grid Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions 701 ...

Page 740: ...wing a wall unless you make them independent To do this select a curtain grid and click In the Element Properties dialog under Other select Independent for Type Association Alternatively you can select the grid and click the pin that is displayed When an automatic grid is independent its position remains fixed if you resize the wall or change the grid layout using the type properties of the curtai...

Page 741: ...the cursor along wall edges a temporary grid line is displayed d Click to place the grid lines Each section of the grid design unit is filled with a separate curtain wall panel of the type selected earlier 7 If needed for the design add mullions to the grids as follows a Click Modelling menu Mullion or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Mullion b Highlight the grid line to add mullions M...

Page 742: ... systems the curtain grids snap to visible levels grids and reference planes In addition curtain grids snap to other curtain grids when you select a common corner edge For example if you place the cursor on a joined edge between 2 curtain walls the new curtain grid snaps to an existing curtain grid Selectively Placing Curtain Grids As you place curtain grids on curtain panels a preview image of th...

Page 743: ...arameters that affect the faces of the curtain element as follows Type Properties Description Name Construction Determines whether the curtain wall embeds into other walls Automatically Embed curtain walls only Specifies the curtain panel family type for the curtain element Curtain Panel Controls which mullions break at intersections on a curtain element type For example use this parameter to make...

Page 744: ...he layout is at a maximum spacing Revit Architecture uses up to the specified value to lay out the grids Adjusts the position of type driven gridlines to ensure that curtain panels are of equal size whenever possible Sometimes when mullions are placed Adjust for Mullion Size particularly on borders of curtain hosts it can result in panels of unequal size even if the Layout is set to Fixed Distance...

Page 745: ...face no value is displayed in this field An imaginary line that defines the point from which to measure grid spa cing on faces where grid spacing may not be the same across the length Measurement Line curtain system only of grid lines Where grids intersect this line the distance between the grids is equal to the grid spacing value for Fixed Distance layouts or up to the grid spacing value for Maxi...

Page 746: ... the curtain grid face The interface lets you graphically change the instance parameter values of the face Layout interface controls Description Control The justification origin Click the arrows to change the justi fication scheme of the grids The horizontal arrow changes Justification Vertical Grid the vertical arrow changes Justific ation Horizontal Grid Origin and angle Vertical Curtain Grid Cl...

Page 747: ...nd Settings All Users Application Data Autodesk product and release Metric or Imperial Library Profiles Curtain Wall For more information see Profile Families on page 371 and Host Sweep Profiles with Nested Detail Components on page 373 Applying the Mullion Profile 1 In the drawing area select a mullion on the model or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Mullion 2 Click 3 In the Element P...

Page 748: ...he curtain panels stop you can move this plane to cut the profile at the desired width and reload the family Angle and Position of a Mullion Mullions can be perpendicular to the face of the curtain panel or parallel to the ground plane The latter choice is more appropriate for sloping curtain panels After changing the position of the mullion you can change the angle of the mullion acceptable value...

Page 749: ... panel is resized when the curtain wall is changed Curtain wall with masonry wall panel type Schedule as Panels or Walls To control whether the wall schedules as a curtain panel or as a wall by specifying the Schedule By Instance property of the wall panel Changing the location line of the wall panel changes how it is placed in the curtain wall See Creating a Curtain Wall Panel Family on page 416 ...

Page 750: ...ain wall You can also add mullions to the curtain grids on the panel Split curtain wall panels Curtain Wall as Wall Panel A curtain wall type can be applied to a wall panel which has the effect of nesting a curtain wall within a curtain wall Curtain wall with curtain wall panel 712 Chapter 11 Working with Architectural Components ...

Page 751: ...ector select the mullion type and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 4 Select a mullion material You can create a new mullion material if one does not exist See Materials on page 459 5 Click OK twice NOTE Changing the material for a mullion family type changes the material for all mullions of that type If the material changes affect the mullions on only one curtain wall create...

Page 752: ...ing the Align command and aligning the edge of the curtain wall with the center or edge of the joined wall See Aligning Elements on page 306 Controlling Mullion Joins You can switch mullion joins between cleaned and uncleaned by selecting a mullion and clicking the toggle control that is displayed Mullions clean up at the join only if there 4 or fewer mullions meeting at the join all of them are s...

Page 753: ...then click Finish Family Mitered Mullions on Curtain Walls If you join 2 curtain walls with horizontal mullions the mullions miter at the join Mitered mullions on arc curtain wall Mitered mullions between 2 joined curtain walls NOTE Mullions also miter on sloped glazings Merging Curtain Wall Panels Curtain walls frequently contain non continuous grid lines and mullions Your design may require that...

Page 754: ...y The joined panels revert back to their unjoined state 4 On the Design Bar click Modify MergingTips You can make non rectangular curtain wall panels with the system panel type only If you join panels of different types the resulting panel is of the type you first selected Use hidden line view to clearly see which panels are joined See Hidden Line Model Graphics Style on page 202 Curtain Systems A...

Page 755: ...tain System Curtain System by Lines or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Curtain System Curtain System by Lines 3 Select 2 component edges or drawn lines A ruled surface is created between the 2 picks NOTE The curtain system is displayed as flat after initial placement The curtain system conforms to the ruled surface after you apply a curtain grid Curtain Systems by Face To create a cur...

Page 756: ...ng Mullions to a Curtain System Add mullions to a grid if needed for the design 1 Click Modelling menu Mullion or on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Mullion 2 Highlight the grid line to which to add the mullions and click to select it TIP Hold SHIFT to place a mullion only on the selected segment Or hold CTRL to place mullions on all open grid segments The mullion is sized to the grid li...

Page 757: ...n legs in the type properties of the mullion V corner mullion between 2 curtain walls Trapezoid Corner Mullion Panels of curtain walls or sloped glazing meet at the sides of the mullion You can specify the center width and length along the sides that meet the panels in the type properties of the mullion Trapezoid mullion between 2 curtain walls Quad Corner Mullion Panels of curtain walls or sloped...

Page 758: ...er names values and descriptions for curtain walls Values are modifiable Curtain WallType Properties Description Name Construction Indicates the wall function Wall Function Indicates whether the curtain wall automatically embeds into the wall Automatically Embed Sets the curtain panel family type for the curtain element Curtain Panel Controls which mullions break at intersections on a curtain elem...

Page 759: ...iption for more information Maximum Spacing indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to the value specified for Vertical Ho rizontal Spacing Enabled when Layout is set to Fixed Distance or Maximum Spacing When the layout is set to a fixed distance Revit Architecture uses the exact value for Spacing Spacing When the layout i...

Page 760: ...Mark a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 The fire rating of the curtain wall Fire Rating Material cost Cost Curtain Wall Instance Properties Description Name Constraints The base level of the curtain wall For example Level 1 Base...

Page 761: ... to the size of the face Beginning adds space to the end of the face before placing the first grid Center adds an even amount of space at both the begin ning and end of the face End adds space from the beginning of the face before placing the first grid Rotates the curtain grids to the specified angle You can also specify this value for individual faces If you specify this parameter for a face the...

Page 762: ...rofile Works as an adjustment to the Position parameter Note that this parameter is not enabled for circular mullions Angle not available for corner mul lions Sets the offset from the panels in the curtain element Offset Construction Sets a profile for the mullion You can create a custom profile family See Profile Families on page 371 Profile not available for corner mul lions Rotates the mullion ...

Page 763: ...n page 718 Corner Mullion Sets the thickness If you have a loaded a custom profile this value is calculated from the mullion profile Thickness Materials and Finishes The material for the mullion Material Dimensions Sets the width of side 2 If you have a loaded a custom profile this value is calculated from the mullion profile Width on side 2 Sets the width of side 1 If you have a loaded a custom p...

Page 764: ...s L andV Corner Mullions Description Name Sets the mullion to corner mullion This is a read only value Corner Mullion Length of second leg of mullion Leg 2 Length of first leg of mullion Leg 1 Sets the offset from the panels Offset Sets the thickness Thickness Trapezoid Corner Mullions Description Name Sets the mullion to corner mullion This is a read only value Corner Mullion Width of mullion at ...

Page 765: ... Comments Maximum length of the mullion For example on a mitered mullion the value is the pre cut length This is a read only value Length Sets a label for the mullions This value must be unique for each mullion in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already used but allows you to continue Mark using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Re viewing War...

Page 766: ...ies on page 200 Model text saved with a family is cut in plan or RCP views if the family is shown cut It is not shown cut if the family is not cuttable For more information on which families can be shown cut see Cuttable and Non Cuttable Family Categories on page 361 Adding ModelText 1 Set the work plane where you want the text to appear See Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 2 Click Modelling ...

Page 767: ...es on page 265 Rehost model text 4 On the Options Bar click Rehost For more information on rehosting see Rehosting on page 747 ModelText Properties You can modify several properties for model text including font size alignment and material Modifying ModelText Properties 1 In the drawing area select the model text 2 On the Options Bar click 3 In the Element Properties dialog edit instance propertie...

Page 768: ...ext model Model Definition of the model text manufacturer Manufacturer Model text comments Type Comments Sets applicable URL URL Model text description Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly Description Uniformat assembly code selected from a hierarchical list Assembly Code Sets the model text type mark Type Mark The model text cost Cost ModelText Ins...

Page 769: ... a subcategory for the model text When defining object styles for Subcategory the subcategory you can define its color line weight and other properties You can then control the display of the model text by turning visibility of the subcategory on or off using View menu Visibility Graphics See Object Styles on page 484 and Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 150 Phasing The phas...

Page 770: ...aces the door in the wall To add a door to a curtain wall select a panel of the curtain wall and use the Type Selector to change it to a wall Then insert the door in the wall See Wall Panels in Curtain Walls on page 711 and Curtain Wall Doors and Windows on page 418 After placement you can move doors from their current host to another host For more information see Rehosting on page 747 732 Chapter...

Page 771: ...navigate to the family file 3 On the Options Bar select Tag on Placement to tag the door automatically To include a tag leader select Leader and specify the length To load additional tags click Tags For more information see Loading Tag Styles on page 492 4 Move your cursor over a wall When placing the door in plan view press the space bar to flip the door swing 5 Click to place the door in the des...

Page 772: ...is available only if the particular door family was created with horizontal controls Flip Facing flips the door vertically This option is available only if the particular door family was created with vertical controls Also see Rehosting on page 747 for information about moving a door from one host to another Door Properties You can modify several properties for doors including the sill height fram...

Page 773: ... The height of the door Height The exterior trim projection Trim Projection Ext The interior trim projection Trim Projection Int The width of the door trim Trim Width The width of the door Width Can be scheduled or exported Rough Width Can be scheduled or exported Rough Height Identity Data Add or edit the door keynote Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1058 Ke...

Page 774: ...ally See Creating Sequential Door or Window Tags on page 1070 The fire rating of the door Fire Rating The cost of the door Cost IFC Parameters The operation of the door as defined by the current IFC description for example single_swing_left or double_door_double_swing These values are case insensitive Operation and underscores are optional SINGLE_SWING_LEFT and SingleSwingLeft are the same Door In...

Page 775: ...The phase when the door was demolished Phase Demolished Other The height of the top of the door Note that this does not change the door size Head Height Windows You add windows to a wall in a plan elevation or 3D view You can place a window on any type of wall including arc walls in place walls and in place roofs in the case of a skylight and face based walls for example a sloped wall Revit Archit...

Page 776: ... include a tag leader select Leader and specify the length To load additional tags click Tags For more information see Loading Tag Styles on page 492 4 Move the cursor over a wall and click to place the window WindowTags Window tags are displayed only if the entire window is visible If the window is partially obscured the window tag is not visible As you place windows of the same type the type num...

Page 777: ... moving a window from one host to another Window Properties Parameter names values and descriptions for windows Values are modifiable NOTE This topic contains information on the common window properties However properties can vary among the different window types families Modifying Window Properties 1 From a plan view select the window and click 2 In the Element Properties dialog edit window insta...

Page 778: ... the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote The model number of the window Model The manufacturer of the window Manufacturer Specific comments about the window type Type Comments A link to a manufacturer s web page URL A specific description of the window type Description Description of the assembly based on the assembly code selection Assembly Description A specif...

Page 779: ...dentity Data Specific comments about the window type Comments A label applied to the window usually a numeric value This value must be unique for each window in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already Mark used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command Phasing The phase when the window was created Phase Created The phase w...

Page 780: ... can set it using the Work Plane command See Sketching and Work Planes on page 265 3 On the Options Bar select Draw to draw the lines or Pick to create lines by selecting lines or walls within the model 4 In the Type Selector select the type of line to create Choices include thin wide medium and invisible lines If desired you can create additional line types using the Line Styles command Line Styl...

Page 781: ...t to use one line style for grids and one line style for reference planes 1 After sketching lines select them and click The Element Properties dialog appears 2 In the Instance box for Subcategory select the desired line subcategory 3 Click OK to exit the Element Properties dialog NOTE You can change the look of the line choices by editing their styles in the Object Styles dialog Or you can create ...

Page 782: ...and the next control point select the end control press TAB then drag the end control point Model Line Properties You can modify properties for straight lines arc lines circles tangent lines and fillet lines Modifying Line Properties 1 From a plan view select the line and click 2 In the Element Properties dialog edit line instance parameters 3 When you are finished click OK Straight Line Propertie...

Page 783: ...which the line is related Work Plane Determines whether the line moves with nearby elements Moves With Nearby Elements Graphics Sets the line style for the shape Line Style Switches whether the center mark for the arc appears You can dimension to the center mark of an arc Center mark visible Detail Line Dimensions The actual length of the line Length Identity Data If design options have been creat...

Page 784: ... about loading a family see Loading Families on page 352 2 Click Modelling menu Component or on the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Component 3 In the Type Selector select a component 4 Place the cursor in the drawing area where you want the component to appear 5 If you are placing a work plane based or face based component on the Options Bar select the Place on Face Place on Work Plane or ...

Page 785: ... Face only available for some components In a plan view move your cursor to the desired location on a vertical face and click to place the component You can only place components on vertical faces with this option For more information see Creating Work Plane based and Face based Families on page 406 Rehosting You can move a hosted component or element from the current host to another host using th...

Page 786: ...has 2 levels such as a sunken floor use this method to move the component from one part of the floor to another Selected component residing on floor host Component dragged away from floor remains on same plane NOTE When rehosting level based components you may find it useful to work in hidden line mode in an elevation view To rehost level based components 1 Select a level based component 2 On the ...

Page 787: ...Join Cleanup Compound layer joins clean up only if the layers share the same material For example a compound floor layer can join to a compound wall layer if both layers are drywall If the layers do not clean up then a solid line appears between them in the join See Materials on page 459 Applying a Function to a Layer of a Compound Structure You assign each layer a specific function so the layer c...

Page 788: ... match layers accurately Layers inside the core of one wall pass through layers of higher priority that are outside the core of the joined wall The layers in the core extend to the core of a joined wall even if the core layers are set to Priority 5 The following illustration shows how a layer of lower priority inside the core passes through layers of higher priority outside the core The insulation...

Page 789: ...ng New and entering a name for the type 3 Click Insert to insert layers 4 For Function select a function for a layer 5 For Material select a material for a layer NOTE If you wish to create a new material for the list see the Materials command Among other settings the Materials command includes commands for specifying cut patterns For more information about materials see Materials on page 459 For m...

Page 790: ...ing at Ends select Exterior or Interior 5 To set individual layers to wrap select the Wraps check box at the end of each layer NOTE Windows and doors have a type property called Wall Closure This property overrides the wrapping settings in the Edit Assembly dialog To set layer wrapping by editing the structure 1 For Structure click Edit 2 If you want wrapping at inserts for Wrapping at Inserts sel...

Page 791: ...und wall joining to column Resulting join of column to wall Editing Layers In the Type Properties dialog you can click Edit for the Structure property The Edit Structure dialog opens inside the Type Properties dialog You can also preview the effects of edits to the layers by clicking Preview Flipping Orientation of Compound Walls As you are placing a compound wall in a plan view you can press SPAC...

Page 792: ...ory or all categories to see a different set of Uniformat codes When you select a code and click OK the code appears in the Assembly code property and the corresponding description appears in the Assembly description property Assembly Code and Assembly Description are schedulable fields As a result you can create a schedule that groups components by Uniformat code for example To add a Uniformat as...

Page 793: ...ural columns are used to model vertical load bearing elements in a building Although structural columns share many of the same properties as architectural columns structural columns have additional properties defined by their configuration and industry standards Structural columns differ from architectural columns in behavior as well Different types of columns 12 755 ...

Page 794: ...ntain a grid and architectural columns You create structural columns by manually placing each column or by using the By Grid tool to add a column to selected grid intersections Structural columns can be created in plan or 3D views Adding columns in 3D View It is helpful to set up a grid before adding structural columns as they snap to grid lines see Adding Grids on page 1033 756 Chapter 12 Working...

Page 795: ... type If you intend to rotate the column after placement select Rotate after placement on the Options Bar 4 Optionally click to edit the properties of the column before adding the column to your model RELATED You can create your own column family by defining specific properties based on structural requirements For more information see Creating a Column Family on page 426 You can control how a colu...

Page 796: ...Click to place the column Placing a column Columns snap to existing geometry in Revit When you place columns at grid intersections both grids are highlighted Highlighted grids To rotate the column during placement While placing columns use the SPACEBAR to change the column rotation before the column is placed Each time you press the SPACEBAR the column rotates to align with the intersecting grids ...

Page 797: ...ion of selected grid lines according to the properties set on the Options Bar No columns are actually created until you press the Finish button 3 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate all of the columns that you are creating 4 Continue pressing SPACEBAR until the columns are in the desired orientation 5 To add other columns to grid intersections hold CTRL and drag other pick boxes 6 Click Finish on the Opt...

Page 798: ...al column Selecting multiple architectural columns The structural columns snap to the centers of the architectural columns For more information about creating a pick box see Selecting Elements on page 269 RELATED You can control how a column family displays within a project plan view In the Family Editor select Show family pre cut in plan views if you want the column display to remain consistent d...

Page 799: ... the Constraints section select Moves with Grids 4 Click OK The modified columns may still be moved and modified but they will proportionately move with the grid if it is repositioned Adding a Splice Symbol or Plate Symbol to a Steel Structural Column 1 Right click a structural column and click Element Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Graphics select Top Connection Symbol for to...

Page 800: ...minal weight W Dimensions Family parameters Flange width bf Actual depth of section d k distance k kr distance read only kr Flange thickness tf Web thickness tw Identity Data Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly Code Add or edit the column keynote Click the value box to open the Keynote dialog For more information see Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote Manufacturer internal ...

Page 801: ...e installation process The following type properties apply to the concrete column families that load during a typical installation Description Name Dimensions Family parameters Column width b Column depth h Identity Data Uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly Code Add or edit the column keynote Click the value box to open the Keynote dialog For more information see Keynot...

Page 802: ...vel Offset of base from base level Base Offset Constraining level of the column top Top Level Offset of top from top level Top Offset Toggles column constraint to grid See Locking Columns to a Grid on page 761 Moves With Grids Toggles column constraint to room bounding conditions Room Bounding Graphics Applies to steel columns only Turns on the visibility of a moment or shear connec tion symbol Th...

Page 803: ...hitecture warns you if the number is already Mark used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command For more information see Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Phasing Indicates in which phase the column component was created For more information see Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the column component was de...

Page 804: ... Analytical Model Infinitely rigid frame element with no weight When Rigid Links is enabled an ad ditional analytical segment is engaged in the model between the end of the ana lytical model of a beam and the analytical model of a column Rigid Links Toggles the auto detect parameter to display the horizontal projection of the column Auto detect Horizontal Projection The plane of the column used fo...

Page 805: ...m openings To cut an opening in a structural beam brace or structural column 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Opening Opening by Face 2 Select the desired plane of the member to which you want to add an opening Selecting the plane of the column 3 Sketch the opening on the beam brace or column Sketching the opening Openings in a Structural Beam Brace or Structural Column 767 ...

Page 806: ... concentrate stresses Beam opening with radius For more information see Sketching on page 251 4 Click Finish Sketch Finished sketch Beams Beams are structural elements used for load bearing applications Elements of each beam are defined through the type properties of the specific beam family In addition various instance properties can be modified to define the functionality of the beam 768 Chapter...

Page 807: ... wall is set either to Bearing or to Structural Combined Beams attached to structural walls To draw beams between two points 1 Click to specify the start point 2 Use the mouse to sketch the beam moving the cursor to the end point 3 Click to specify the endpoint You can use the grid tool to add multiple beams to selected grids when columns are also present at the working level Beams 769 ...

Page 808: ... since beams snap to grids Add a grid by clicking Grid on the Structural tab of the Design Bar However structural beams can be added without an existing grid You can add beams using one of the following methods Sketch individual beams Select grid lines that lie between structural elements Create a chain of beams Structural Usage of Beams Revit Architecture determines the Structural Usage Property ...

Page 809: ...tic Structural Usage setting for beams based on which elements are being connected O P J G HB B C O P J G HB O G Wall O P J G HB O G Column O O O O O O Brace O HB HB HB HB Horizontal Brace O P J J Girder O P P Joist O P Purlin O Other For the properties of Beams see Beam Properties on page 802 BeamTips If a beam end resides on a structural wall the Beam End Pocket Seat parameter is displayed in th...

Page 810: ...you sketch individual instances of beams To sketch individual beams 1 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Beam 2 Load a structural beam family if one has not been previously loaded 3 In the Type Selector select a beam type 4 On the Options Bar click to set beam parameters click a value on the Usage menu to set the structural usage of the beam or leave it set to Automatic 5 Sketch the bea...

Page 811: ...e grid tool 1 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Beam 2 On the Options Bar click 3 Select the grid to place beams Selecting the grid The beams are placed between columns as shown Placing beams between columns The grids in a project are a valuable tool in setting up beams as well as columns A selected span of grid lines can automatically place beams Sketching beams automatically with gri...

Page 812: ...y 4 Select a grid line along which you want to place a beam Press and hold CTRL to select multiple grids In the image shown below grids have been selected and beams have been added automatically between all columns walls and beams 5 On the Options Bar click Finish to place beams along the gridline TIP You can also draw a pick box to select multiple grid lines 774 Chapter 12 Working with Structural...

Page 813: ...use this beam supports new beams created on the grid line If a beam intersects but does not cross the grid line this beam is supported by a new beam created on the grid line For more information about beam structural usage based on which elements are being created see Structural Usage of Beams on page 770 Sketching Beams with the Chain Option When the chain option is selected Revit Architecture su...

Page 814: ... beam modelling NOTE A beam that has adjusted offset values will become disassociated or free from the current work plane Similarly any structural element attached to a sloped beam will also become free You attach free elements to another work plane using the existing Edit Work Plane or Rehost buttons on the Options Bar 3D Snapping You can use the 3D Snapping option to create a new beam by snappin...

Page 815: ...ation in the drawing area or use the arrow keys on your keyboard For more information see Moving Elements on page 300 To rotate a beam 1 Select the beam in a plan view 2 Click Rotate on the toolbar 3 Click the end point for the rotation For more information see Rotating Elements on page 308 Beam Graphical Controls When you sketch beams you can use available graphical controls to modify the attachm...

Page 816: ... beam that is not centered on a column The beam handle of the beam in the illustration remains within a virtual bounding box Beam and column in a plan with a beam handle not at the column center but within the virtual column bounding box If the column is moved slightly but not completely out of its existing bounding box the beam handle remains in position unaffected by column movement 778 Chapter ...

Page 817: ...t of its bounding box the beam handles are centered on the column center The following illustration presents a section view of a beam that is attached to a wall The beam handle is visible at the top center of the wall Editing Beams 779 ...

Page 818: ...l direction only Changing Beam Geometry Using Shape Handles The shape handle of a beam is used to change beam geometry Shape handles display as small filled back to back triangles at each beam end when the beam is selected in the drawing area 780 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 819: ...geometry along the axis of the component To move a beam out of its original axis click and drag the beam into a new position Shape Handle Properties Each beam shape handle provides properties that can be changed based on the element type preferences To access the shape handle properties right click the back to back triangles and select View Properties For more information see View Properties on pa...

Page 820: ...ment connection parameter Cantilever connection symbol displayed by using a moment connection parameter parameter Beam Cutback Beam cutback is the visible representative gap in beam geometry at the connection point in join relationships Fabricated materials require spatial and placement considerations for which they will be cut to fit This gap is evident when comparing the conceptual coarse symbol...

Page 821: ...others are framed A Beam end if cutback F Cutback beam B Setback G Common endpoint in join C Cutback D Symbolic Coarse Level of Detail Cutback Change structural cutback defaults for beams columns and braces with the Structural Settings dialog 1 Select Settings Structural Settings 2 Select the Symbolic Representation Settings tab 3 In the Symbolic Cutback Distance fields adjust for braces beams tru...

Page 822: ...3 Click on the Options Bar 4 Under the Construction heading locate the Start Extension and End Extension parameters Adjust as needed These parameters adjust the cutback of beam instances used in medium fine level of detail views Positive dimensions entered here extend the beam effectively reducing the cutback Negative values increase the cutback Adjustments do not affect symbolic representation En...

Page 823: ... a way that prevents it from being closer to any other beam participating in the join by a distance equalling the cutback The following examples detail both coarse and medium fine levels of detail in a project Medium Fine level of detail physical geometry Coarse level of detail symbolic Miter Joins Unlike square off joins miter joins do not cutback allowing geometry to create a flush connection be...

Page 824: ... in a co planar join share the same plane and have unadjusted cross sectional rotation parameters Beams that share the same vertical plane must have the same cross sectional rotation to have a miter join The vertical plane is a plane perpendicular to the work plane A miter join will be created by default for beams that are created within the same vertical plane This is the case for trusses 786 Cha...

Page 825: ...nother beam Structural beams drawn with the chain tool also connect by their endpoints See Sketching Beams with the Chain Option on page 775 When two beams are end joined at an angle the shortest beam will not cutback forcing the longer beams to cutback The setback of the shortest beam also adjusts to meet the perceived endpoint of the longer beam If further beams connect to the join they will cut...

Page 826: ...ommon column and will cutback from the column accordingly The column including its bounding box must have overlapping geometry with the beams of the join for the beams to cutback Beams joined to columns always adjust for setback and cutback however they cannot manually be adjusted with the Beam Join Editor 788 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 827: ...beam join editor Non cutback Beam to Wall Join Cutback Beam to Wall Join Joining a beam to a wall is achieved by drawing a beam and attaching one of its endpoints to the center of the total wall thickness Braces andTrusses Braces adjust for default setback and cutback through either Element Properties or Structural Settings Trusses only adjust with Structural Settings The Beam Join Editor can be u...

Page 828: ...eam Join Editor you remove or apply the visible cutback as it displays in your project Accessing the Beam Join Editor NOTE The longer beam is cutback from the shorter beam by default 790 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 829: ... its option bar enables This series of checkboxes allows you to filter the join controls based on material Material is based on the Structural Material Type Parameter set in the beam family Join controls will only show for the checked materials See Beam Properties on page 802 Editing Cutback The beam join editor displays arrow controls used to edit beam cutback The arrows display as follows If a b...

Page 830: ...ily and type without cross sectional rotation See Miter Joins on page 785 The green line marks the plane of the miter join Any other beams cutback to adjust from the miter join The Miter Lock locks the geometry in Medium Fine levels of detail so you can adjust the symbolic representation When locked the Beam Join Editor arrows do not display in Medium Fine views but do display in Coarse view Click...

Page 831: ...complex Revit Architecture Beam tags provide for this informational labeling Structural FramingTag Families The structural framing tag family annotates beams You can adjust the default positions of these tags in the Family Categories and Parameters dialog see Family Category and Parameters on page 398 The Structural Framing Tag category contains two parameters Beam Tags 793 ...

Page 832: ...w frame Attachment Point Defines the initial location of the tag along a beam start middle or end and is the point the tag tracks as the beam is lengthened and shortened When enabled a tag leader extends from this point None Locates the tag in the middle of the beam by default 794 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 833: ...acement The placement section of the tool allows you to specify which beams you intend to annotate either all in view or just the beams selected As noted on the Beam Annotations tool Revit Architecture does not overwrite existing tags To place new annotations in place of others select the Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations option box All tags and spot elevations will be removed from bea...

Page 834: ...on andType The lower section of the Beam Annotations tool defines the annotation types and locations specific to level and sloped beams Level Sloped Beams Tabs Both level beams and sloped beams use the same tagging options The tabs allow you to make different annotations to either type of beam instance To make specific tags to level beams make adjustments on the Level beams in plan tab To make spe...

Page 835: ...s they appear around the beam The buttons open the Select Annotation Type dialog which defines and edits the tag None Tags do not track any particular point on the beam Changes to the length of the beam do not cause the tag to move Structural Framing Tag See Structural Framing Tags on page 798 Spot Elevation See Spot Elevations on page 800 Beam Tags 797 ...

Page 836: ...llowing parameters see Structural Framing Tag Families on page 793 to be a viable annotations type Rotate with component is enabled The attachment point parameter is set to None or match the position of the desired tag location in the Beam Annotations tool For example structural framing tags which have defined attachment point parameters of End are only available to the beam location settings mark...

Page 837: ...ion settings provided they rotate with component These specifications also apply to the Load Structural Framing Tag option which opens the Load Family dialog see Loading Families on page 352 To appear in the Structural Framing Tag list loaded families must follow these guidelines Beam Tags 799 ...

Page 838: ...o edit the spot elevation tag see Creating Family Types in a Project on page 349 Beam Elevation Relative enables the Relative Base pull down menu This menu allows selection of the base relative level for elevation calculation NOTE Only one spot elevation type can be placed at a time If you change the spot elevation type in any of the 12 locations 6 for the level and 6 for sloped it will change all...

Page 839: ...ation tags the elevation of the location line not the beam geometry Bottom Elevation Top Bottom Elevations Top Elevation The final option available in the Select Annotation Type dialog for spot elevations is a filter for defined elevations Beam Tags 801 ...

Page 840: ...dit beam type parameters see Beam Type Properties Steel on page 802 or Beam Type Properties Concrete on page 803 NOTE Changes made to type parameters affect all beams of this type in the project Click Duplicate to create a beam type 4 When you finish click OK BeamType Properties Steel Properties vary depending on the specified beam families during the installation process The following type proper...

Page 841: ...de selection This is a read only value Assembly description A value that designates the particular beam possibly the shop mark This value must be unique for each element in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number Type Mark is already used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 The pricin...

Page 842: ...mmand See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 The pricing of the beam Cost Beam Instance Properties Properties will vary depending on the beam families that are specified during the installation process The following instance properties apply to beam families that load during a typical installation Description Name Constraints The constraining level This is a read only value that is dependent ...

Page 843: ...he beam and the element to which it is connected End Extension Materials and Finishes The structural material See Material Physical Type Parameters on page 480 Beam Material Structural Applies to steel beams only Stick Symbol Location Applies to steel beams only A moment frame or cantilever symbol at the start end of a beam Moment Connection Start Applies to steel beams only A moment frame or cant...

Page 844: ...to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Phasing Indicates in which phase the beam component was created See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the beam component was demolished See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Demolished Structural Analysis Start release conditions Either Fixed...

Page 845: ...tion Vertical Projection Specifies the placement of the analytical model in the center of the beam Auto detect Horizontal Projection Other Applies to steel beams only Specifies family parameters defines maximum distance of start extension parameter This is a read only value Start Extension Calculation Applies to steel beams only Specifies family parameters defines maximum distance of end extension...

Page 846: ...ketch mode There must be a closed loop of supporting elements walls or beams already drawn or the program will automatically redirect you to sketch mode For more information see Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 817 WARNING Curved walls and beams can be used to create a loop but cannot be the direction defining members in the Beam System To create a beam system using one click 1 On the...

Page 847: ... either by picking the structural supporting elements such as beams and structural walls or by sketching the border using the drawing tools available on the Options Bar After specifying the beam system boundaries you can specify the beam direction and beam system properties such as spacing justification and beam type For more information see Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 817 To cre...

Page 848: ...ystem boundary in either a plan or 3D view If you work in a 3D view you should specify the work plane before picking the supports For more information see Setting the Work Plane on page 265 TIP Although you can sketch a beam system in a 3D view it is recommended that you create the beam system in a plan view to achieve greater accuracy and to ensure that the lines are on a parallel plane After the...

Page 849: ...port member A sketch line with two drag handles displays over the picked support For more information see Drag Handles Two shorter parallel lines display on each side of the line indicating the beam system direction Beam system with first support member picked 5 Pick the remaining lines that define the beam system boundary NOTE The lines must result in a closed loop Use the editing tools Trim Exte...

Page 850: ... structural beam system Sketching a Beam System Boundary You can use the sketching tools to define the perimeter of a beam system You can also use these tools to modify a beam system boundary created using the Pick Supports method 1 Click Modelling menu Structural Beam System or on the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Beam System 2 On the Options Bar click Sketch 3 On the Design Bar click Li...

Page 851: ... information see Specifying Beam Direction in a Beam System on page 816 Modify the beam system Use either the Pick Support or Lines tool to sketch an opening in the beam system For more information see Cutting an Opening in a Beam System on page 814 5 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch to complete the beam system Floor plan and 3D view of completed structural beam system Creating a Structural B...

Page 852: ...support structure is identical However make sure the pasted copy attaches to all supports You may need to modify the pasted beam system Add a beam system to Quadrants 1 and 3 and mirror it to Quadrants 2 and 4 by selecting Grid 2 as the mirror axis This process has the same limitations as copying and pasting You may need to modify the system and re pick the supports to ensure that the system is lo...

Page 853: ...n the Design Bar click Lines Define the boundary of the opening 3 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar sketch a complete loop within the beam system boundary Beam system boundary with sketched opening 4 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch Beam system with opening Creating a Structural Beam System 815 ...

Page 854: ...ccess to this tool while either sketching or modifying a beam system boundary 3 On the Options Bar click or If you select sketch a line or pick a model line to define beam direction that is independent of the sketched boundary lines This line has no other function than to define the direction of the beams in a beam system and therefore cannot be used to close a loop select the sketch line that you...

Page 855: ...lue adjacent beams move to maintain the distance between them Specify number of beams 3 Enter a value for the number of beams that you want in the beam system This option is active only when you select the Fixed Number layout rule Specify spacing 4 Enter a value representing the distance between each beam This option is active only when you select the Fixed Distance Maximum Spacing or Clear Spacin...

Page 856: ... and cantilevered The following example provides a method for creating a cantilevered beam system Begin with a bay that is similar to the one shown in the following illustration of a partial plan view Partial Plan View 1 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Beam System 2 On the Options Bar click Sketch 3 Click Pick Supports to select the beam system boundary or Lines to sketch the beam sy...

Page 857: ...defined by its sketch lines 3D beam system Note that sketched beam lines Can only define slope when they are created using the Pick Supports tool That have a beam as their support always define slope That have a wall as their support have a Defines slope property that you can edit The default value is true Creating a 3D Beam System 819 ...

Page 858: ...ints of the two nearest sketch lines that do define slope Beam system elevated by nearest sketch lines If there are no lines in the sketch that define slope the beam system behaves like a 2D beam system Adding a 3D Beam System 1 Click Modelling menu Structural Beam System or on the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Beam System 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar click Structural Beam System...

Page 859: ...ce on the Options Bar 5 Place the cursor on a beam system in the view to highlight it 6 After highlighting the beam system click to place the tag If you selected Auto place the tag is placed at the center of the beam system If you did not select Auto place move the cursor to the desired location on the beam system and click to place it NOTE The Structural Beam System Tag rfa family includes a labe...

Page 860: ...lacement Framing Tags Select the Tag checkbox Select Framing from the tag drop down list to display tags on individual beams within the beam system System Tags Select the Tag checkbox Select System from the tag drop down list to display a single tag at the midpoint of the beam system 822 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 861: ...e in the default locations Specifically the tool has the following reset effects Beams that have been moved are returned to their original locations Beams that have been deleted from the system are restored Parameters that have been changed on individual beams such as Beam Type Offset Angle are reset Note that if the sketch of a beam system is modified the beams of a system will remain attached to...

Page 862: ...am System tool 1 In the drawing area click on the beam system you want to reset 2 On the Options Bar click Edit 3 On the Design Bar click Reset structural beam system 4 Click Finish Sketch Beam system reset 824 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 863: ...eters affect all beam systems of this type in the project You can click Duplicate to create a new beam system type 4 When you finish click OK Beam SystemType Properties Description Name Identity Data The beam keynote Add or edit the value Click in the value box to open the Keynotes dialog See Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote The manufacturer internal number Model The shape manufacturer Manufacturer A...

Page 864: ...D The vertical offset of beam system beams from the beam system work plane Elevation This is a read only value that is dependent on the work plane where the element was placed Work Plane Pattern Rules for beam spacing See Beam System Layout Rules and Patterns on page 817 Layout Rule The space between beams This parameter is only accessible for certain values of the Layout Rule parameter See Beam S...

Page 865: ... snapping the pointer to another structural element clicking a start point snapping to another structural element and clicking an end point For example braces can appear between a structural column and a structural beam You can add braces in either a plan view or a framing elevation view Braces attach themselves to beams and columns and adjust parametrically to changes in the building design When ...

Page 866: ...en the Structural Framing folder 3 Select a brace type folder either Steel Light Gauge Steel Concrete or Wood and click Open NOTE When you open a framing family you can select multiple brace sizes In the Specify Types dialog that displays after you click Open press and hold the CTRL key when selecting brace sizes If necessary you can filter the Catalog by clicking the arrow at the column heading 8...

Page 867: ...ing beam or brace in the project On the Options Bar click 3 In the Element Properties dialog click Load 4 In the Open dialog navigate to either the imperial or metric library and open the Structural Framing folder 5 Select a brace type folder either Steel Light Gauge Steel Concrete or Wood and click Open Adding Structural Braces You can add braces in either a plan view or in a framing elevation vi...

Page 868: ...int Snap to begin brace 6 Move the pointer in a diagonal direction to sketch the brace and place the cursor near another structural element to snap it Click to place the end point Sample braces in a framing elevation view To add a brace in a plan view 1 Open a plan view 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Brace 3 On the Options Bar specify both the Start Level and offset distance and t...

Page 869: ...ect Brace Property Terminology Start Attachment Type Start Attachment Distance or Ratio End of Referenced Element End Attachment Type End Attachment Distance or Ratio End of Reference Element Brace attachment properties To modify brace properties 1 Select a brace 2 On the Options Bar click the Properties button To specify attachment parameters 3 In the Element Properties dialog under Structural se...

Page 870: ...ce end point Ratio If the brace end point is placed on a beam this value specifies the percentage along the beam where the end point is placed For example 0 5 would place the end point half way between each end of the attached beam After selecting either option enter a value for Start Attachment Ratio Property Also if the brace start point is placed on a column this option is not available Brace P...

Page 871: ...lue k2 The lange thickness tf The web thickness tw Identity Data The uniformat assembly code selected from hierarchical list Assembly Code The keynote for the brace See Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote The manufacturer internal number Model The brace manufacturer Manufacturer A field for entering general comments about the brace type This information can be included in a schedule Type Comments A link...

Page 872: ...xtension The dimension between the physical edge of the finish end of the brace and the element to which it is connected End Extension Materials and Finishes Specifies the user defined structural material See Material Physical Type Parameters on page 480 Brace Material Structural The rotation about the longitudinal axis of the brace Angle The moment frame or cantilever symbol at the start end of b...

Page 873: ...ering comments about the brace Comments A label created for the brace Possible use shop mark This value must be unique for each brace in a project Revit Architecture warns you if the number is already Mark used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Phasing Indicates in which phase the brace componen...

Page 874: ...l x axis End Mx The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local y axis End My The rotational release at the end of the brace along the local z axis End Mz Determines whether brace conditions contribute to lateral analysis Available for use by external analysis applications See Analyze As Other Defines the maximum distance of start extension parameter Set in family parameters Start E...

Page 875: ...tachment Level Reference The elevation of the start end referenced from the start attachment level ref erence Start Attachment Elevation The constraining level of the finish end of the brace End Attachment Level Reference The elevation of the finish end referenced from the end attachment level ref erence End Attachment Elevation Applies to concrete beams only The rebar cover distance from the colu...

Page 876: ...start release conditions Start Release The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local x axis Start Fx The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local y axis Start Fy The translational release at the start end of the brace along the local z axis Start Fz The rotational release at the start end of the brace along the local x axis Start Mx The rotation...

Page 877: ...l Walls The Structural Wall family type in Revit Architecture has the following possible structural usage options non bearing bearing shear and structural combined Typical structural wall You create a wall by sketching the centerline of the wall in either a plan view or a 3D view Revit Architecture creates thickness height and other wall parameters based on the properties that are specified in the...

Page 878: ...the instance properties of the wall to be placed if desired by clicking See Instance Properties and Type Properties on page 76 Modify the Type Parameters of the wall to be placed by clicking the Edit New button in the Element Properties dialog See Structural Wall Properties on page 845 4 The Height Depth area of the Options Bar is shown in the following illustration You may pre select the height t...

Page 879: ... modify the appearance of structural walls through their properties You can modify the wall properties either before or after you place the wall Modifying Structural Walls You modify wall properties in the Element Properties dialog To open the dialog do one of the following Select the wall and then click On the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Structural Wall and then click Right click the w...

Page 880: ...draws a rectangular wall by default You can modify the shape of the wall or add openings to it by editing its elevation profile To edit a wall s elevation profile the view must be parallel and can be either a section or elevation view You cannot edit the elevation profile of an arc wall For more information see General Rules for Geometry Creation on page 344 Design with non rectangular walls and c...

Page 881: ...the planes unless you explicitly unlock them If you unlock the sketched lines you can modify them independently of the datum planes If you exit sketch mode while the sketched lines are still aligned then as you move a datum handle the sketched lines move with it Sketch lines unlocked 4 Click Finish Sketch Modified wall displayed in 3D NOTE To revert an edited wall to its original shape select the ...

Page 882: ... prior to being attached to the roof As a result you may find the wall is not at the right height to edit the elevation profile To change the unconnected height click Properties on the Design Bar while in sketch mode As you edit the elevation profile keep in mind that after you finish the sketch the wall top or bottom attaches only where horizontal lines are coincident with the reference planes in...

Page 883: ...or Openings on page 591 1 In either a 3D or elevation view select an arc wall 2 On the Options Bar click Opening The Rectangles tool becomes active 3 Sketch rectangular openings in the arc wall 4 When you finish click Modify to end the command As you sketch the openings permanent dimensions appear If the wall has a top constraint set to a level dimensions appear from both the top and base constrai...

Page 884: ...rior rebar cover This allows placing multiple rebar elements together in different area reinforcement layers Additional Bottom Interior Offset Specifies an additional offset from the rebar cover This allows placing multiple rebar elements together in different path reinforcement layers Additional Offset Graphics Specifies a fill pattern for a wall in a coarse scale view See View Properties on page...

Page 885: ...ding Interior and Exterior Walls on page 562 The wall location line remains the same for that wall even if the type changes Location Line Specifies the level from which the wall base is referenced Base Constraint Specifies the offset of the base of the wall from its base constraint Base Offset Indicates whether the base of the wall is attached to another component such as a slab This is a read onl...

Page 886: ...ebar Cover Other Face Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element This is a read only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed Estimated Reinforcement Volume The structural use of the wall Structural Usage Dimensions Indicates the length of the wall This is a read only value Length Indicates the area of the wall This is a read only value Area Indicates the v...

Page 887: ...d for analysis and design Bottom Vertical Projection Wall Foundations Wall foundations are members of the structural foundation category You can place these foundations along structural walls in either a plan or 3D view Wall foundations are constrained to the wall that they support They move with the wall when you move the wall You join wall foundations using the Join tool Creating a Wall Foundati...

Page 888: ...ss its type properties You can specify Structural Usage either Retaining or Bearing If you select Retaining you can specify values for Toe Length Heel Length and Foundation Thickness Toe and heel length define the width of the foundation For more information see Wall Foundation Properties on page 855 Structural usage retaining If you select Bearing you can specify values for Width and Foundation T...

Page 889: ...dation with the Structural Foundation Tag with Elevation tag It is available from the family library under Structural Annotations NOTE The wall foundation is created at the bottom of the selected wall If the created wall foundation is beyond the view range of the active view you will be prompted with a warning To see the foundation you have to either extend the view range for the current view or o...

Page 890: ...at indicate where the end of the selected wall foundation is attached End controls will snap to other visible references You can also use the end controls to resize the footing beyond its wall when necessary Select the wall foundation to be resized and the end controls will appear 852 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 891: ... either end of the foundation as needed The wall foundation will not scale in length Only the end being dragged will extend Extending a footing to accommodate a run of stairs Modifying Wall Foundations 853 ...

Page 892: ...foundation end will extend this distance beyond its host wall The value will be set for the entire project Doors and Windows When a doorway or window is created in a wall the wall foundation remains continuous beneath the opening You can disable this in the Wall Foundation Type Properties See Wall Foundation Type Properties Retaining on page 855 and Wall Foundation Type Properties Bearing on page ...

Page 893: ... FoundationType Properties Retaining Description Name Materials and Finishes Specifies the concrete to be used Material Structural Specifies the wall usage type either Retaining or Bearing For information about the Bearing type see Wall Foundation Type Properties Bearing on page 856 Structural Usage Dimensions Specifies the length from the edge of a wall to outside face of foundation Toe Length Sp...

Page 894: ... you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 The pricing of the foundation Cost Wall FoundationType Properties Bearing Description Name Materials and Finishes Specifies the concrete to be used Material Structural Specifies the wall usage type either Retaining or Bearing For information on Retain ing type see Wall Fo...

Page 895: ...umber value is already Type Mark used but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 The pricing of the foundation Cost Wall Foundation Instance Properties Retaining Description Name Structural Specifies the rebar cover distance from the wall top face Rebar Cover Top Face Specifies the rebar cover distance f...

Page 896: ... was created See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the foundation component was demolished See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Demolished Structural Analysis Indicates the property type for structural analysis Select either Foundation or Not for Analysis Analyze As Wall Foundation Instance Properties Bearing Description Name Constraints Specifies the offset fro...

Page 897: ... a project Revit Architecture warns you when the number value is already used Mark but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 Phasing Indicates in which phase the foundation component was created See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the foundation component was demolish...

Page 898: ...Pile caps with multiple piles Rectangular and triangular pile caps 860 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 899: ...ce the isolated foundation in either a plan or 3D view Rectangular isolated foundation The Bottom Elevation of structural foundations footings is reported in a read only instance parameter called Elevation at Bottom You can then display this value in a view by tagging the foundation with the Structural Foundation Tag with Elevation tag It is available from the family library under Structural Annot...

Page 900: ...solated foundation type 4 When you are finished click OK Isolated FoundationType Properties Description Name Dimensions Specifies the width of the isolated foundation type Applies to the Pile Cap Pile family type Width Specifies the length of the isolated foundation type Applies to the Pile Cap Pile family type Length Specifies the foundation thickness Applies to the Pile Cap Pile family type Thic...

Page 901: ...ints The level to which the slab is constrained to Level The level to which the host of the isolated slab is constrained to Host Specifies the elevation of the top of the isolated foundation relative to its level Offset Toggles column constraint to grid Moves With Grids Materials and Finishes Specifies the material of the isolated foundation Material Structural Specifies the distance of the rebar ...

Page 902: ...ee Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the component was demolished See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Demolished Structural Analysis Indicates the property type for structural analysis Select either Foundation or Not for Analysis Analyze As Structural Slabs You can add a structural slab to the building model Click the Slab tool on the Structural tab of the Desi...

Page 903: ...in a plan view although you can sketch it in a 3D view provided the work plane of the 3D view is set to the work plane in which you want to place the slab The top of the slab is offset relative to the level at which it is placed For information about Height Offset from Level and other Slab parameters see Slab Properties on page 875 For information about slabs and hidden lines see Display of Hidden...

Page 904: ...ng in the Offset text box NOTE Instead of picking walls you can sketch a slab Click Lines and use the sketch tools to form the boundary of the slab The sketch must form a closed loop or boundary condition See Sketching on page 251 7 On the Sketch tab click Finish Sketch NOTE To add openings to a slab see Cutting Openings in Slabs on page 871 866 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 905: ...antilevers when Creating a Slab 1 Open a plan view displaying the beams or bay that will support the slab 2 Select from the Modelling tab of the Design bar to enter sketch mode 3 Select from the Sketch bar 4 Click to open the Element Properties dialog 5 In the Other section enter offset values for both Concrete Cantilever and Steel Cantilever 6 Click OK 7 Select the beams that will support the sla...

Page 906: ...n sketch mode select the slab edge that will receive the cantilever 4 On the Options Bar enter cantilever offset values for both of the concrete slab and metal deck NOTE The cantilever is applied only to the specified selected sketch line not the entire slab 868 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 907: ... the edge and adjust the cantilever values to negative numbers The following section view shows a concrete slab with a metal deck The cantilevered concrete edge extends beyond the supporting beam Span Direction When you place a slab a span direction component is placed in plan view along with the slab The span direction component is used to change the orientation of the steel deck in the plan Deck...

Page 908: ...des three independent ways to create a sloped slab Method 1 While in sketch mode click Slope Arrow to draw a slope arrow that defines the slope of the slab Slab sketch with slope arrow Select the slope arrow and click Do one of the following methods To create a slope by setting height at tail 1 Select Specify to Height at Tail 2 Specify a value for Height Offset at Tail This value determines how h...

Page 909: ...at a certain level For example the floor sketch is on level 1 You could start the slope arrow on level 2 5 Click OK Method 2 Select two parallel floor lines that you sketched and click For Defines constant height property select Yes for both lines By setting this property to Yes you enable the Offset from Base property Then select the lines individually and specify a value for the Offset from Base...

Page 910: ... Lines 4 On the Options Bar click as necessary to place lines or arcs 5 Sketch the slab opening 6 On the Design Bar click Finish Sketch Drop Panels You can add drop panels to reinforce a slab at column locations This is achieved by sketching a second smaller slab 1 Open a plan view with a slab over a column 872 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 911: ...plete a sketch of the drop panel see Sketching on page 251 The sketch must form a closed loop or boundary condition 4 Click 5 View the drop panel in an elevation or cross section view 6 Select the new drop panel 7 Click Adjust the Constraint parameters of the drop panel so that it is at the correct elevation in your model Drop Panels 873 ...

Page 912: ...her by editing slab properties or by directly changing slab geometry in the drawing area To modify a slab before you add it you must select the slab type in the type selector When you activate the Slab command to place slabs you can select different types of slabs in the Type Selector 874 Chapter 12 Working with Structural Components ...

Page 913: ...uction User selects Edit button to add change or delete slab layers See Compound Structure on page 748 Structure Indicates the thickness of a slab type which is determined by the cumulative thickness of its layers See Shape Editing for Slabs Roofs and Floors on page 881 Default Thickness Specifies an additional offset from the top exterior rebar cover This allows placing multiple rebar elements to...

Page 914: ...hierarchical list Assembly Code A value to designate the specific slab This value must be unique for each element in a project Revit Architecture warns you when the number value is already used Type Mark but allows you to continue using it You can see the warning using the Review Warnings command See Reviewing Warning Messages on page 1334 The pricing of the slab Cost Slab Instance Properties Desc...

Page 915: ...s is a read only value Volume Specifies the default Slab thickness This is a read only value unless a shape edit has been applied and its type contains a variable layer When the value is writable Thickness it can be used to set a uniform thickness of the slab The entry can be blank if the thickness varies See Shape Editing for Slabs Roofs and Floors on page 881 Identity Data A field for placing ge...

Page 916: ...Foundation Slabs 1 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar click Slab You can also click Modelling menu Structural Foundation Slab 2 Sketch the foundation slab in the same manner as a regular slab either by using lines picking supports or picking walls 3 When you finish sketching click Finish Sketch The foundation is placed in the project 4 Click the foundation and select the desired Foundation fa...

Page 917: ...ick in the value box to open the Fill Patterns dialog See View Properties on page 210 Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Applies a color to the fill pattern for a slab in a coarse scale view Coarse Scale Fill Color Identity Data Add or edit the slab keynote Click in the value box to open the s dialog See Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote The manufacturer internal number Model The slab manufacturer Manufacturer...

Page 918: ...The rebar cover distance from the foundation slab bottom face Rebar Cover Bottom Face The rebar cover distance from the foundation slab to an adjacent element face Rebar Cover Other faces Specifies the estimated reinforcement volume of the selected element This is a read only parameter that only displays when rebar has been placed Estimated Reinforcement Volume Dimensions Specifies the slope of th...

Page 919: ...ed See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Created Indicates in which phase the slab component was demolished See Project Phasing on page 1263 Phase Demolished Structural Analysis If set to Foundation the slab will provide support for other elements connected to it If set to Slab on Grade the slab will only support itself Structural Usage Analytical Model The plane of the slab used for analysis and...

Page 920: ...e following conditions must be met Slabs must be flat and on a horizontal plane A roof cannot attach to another roof and the roof cannot be a curtain roof If either of these conditions is not met you cannot use the slab shape edit buttons NOTE If these conditions are violated later by an edit to the element the slab shape edit will cause an error with a callback allowing the user to reset the slab...

Page 921: ...it line Warped Slab Roofs A surface will warp when bounded by 4 non planar boundary edges or user created split lines To avoid warping add a split line between opposite vertices Using the Modify Sub ElementsTool You can use the Modify Sub Elements tool to manipulate one or more of the points or edges on a selected slab roof or floor 1 Select the slab roof or floor you want to modify 2 On the Optio...

Page 922: ... the shape modification tools to change the element geometry 1 Select the slab roof or floor you want to modify 2 On the Options Bar click Draw Points tool NOTE The Elevation edit box displays on the Options Bar with a Relative check box next to it If you select Relative new points will be added at the specified value relative to the surface on which they are added So with the default value of 0 t...

Page 923: ...or will snap to 3D vertices and edges and present standard snap controls with temporary dimensions along the edges If no vertex or edge is snapped to then on selection the line end will be projected to the closest point on the surface No temporary dimensions will be created on the face 4 Select another vertex edge face or point anywhere on the slab to end the split line A new edge will be added to...

Page 924: ...bs drawn with arc segments can be altered using slab shape editing tools The Curved Edge Condition tool is an additional tool specific to curved edges It sets them to project a flat surface to the edge or a curved surface that conforms to the arc edge of the slab 1 Select the curved edge slab you want to modify 2 On the Options Bar click 3 In the Element Properties dialog click the Curved Edge Con...

Page 925: ...r Deleting Shape Modifiers To delete shape edit elements 1 Select the modified slab 2 On the Options Bar click Modify Sub Elements tool 3 Click on the shape edit element to select it 4 Either press Delete or right click the element and select Delete The shape edit element is removed and the slab adjusts its geometry accordingly Using the Reset Shape Tool 887 ...

Page 926: ...variable thickness layer of a slab or roof 1 Select a slab or roof to modify 2 On the Options Bar click 3 In the Element Properties dialog click the Edit New button 4 In the value box of the Structure property click Edit 5 In the Edit Assembly dialog specify the material for layers and the thickness of those layers The variable thickness parameter column will contain empty check boxes next to laye...

Page 927: ... and columns are placed on the level below the view you are working in Therefore they fall below the bottom cut plane of the view range and do not display The structural template has been modified specifically to take this into account RELATED See View Range on page 198 Starting a Project with the StructuralTemplate 1 Click File menu New Project 2 In the New Project dialog under Template File clic...

Page 928: ...u can filter the list of types by selecting specific parameters from the list at the top of each column 5 Click Open 6 In the Type Selector select the new family you just loaded and place it in the document window Loading in the Element Properties Dialog You can load a family in the Element Properties dialog See Element Properties Dialog on page 75 After creating a family type open the dialog and ...

Page 929: ... help you lay out a site plan Site Settings You can modify a project s global site settings at any time You can define contour line intervals add user defined contour lines and select the section cut material Defining Site Settings 1 Click Settings menu Site Settings 13 891 ...

Page 930: ...Edges To create a custom line style see Object Styles on page 484 NOTE If you clear the At Intervals Of check box custom contour lines still display 4 Under Section Graphics do the following For Section Cut Material select a material to use to display the site in a section view Appropriate materials include Site Earth Site Grass and Site Sand For Elevation of Poche Base enter a value to control th...

Page 931: ...the cross section of earth for example 30 feet or 25 meters This value controls the poche depth for all topography elements in your project Elevation of Poche Base Property Data Specifies the display of angular values on property line tags You can load property line tags from the Civil folder under the Annotations family folder Angle Display Specifies the units to use when displaying bearing value...

Page 932: ...ing points on it at the elevation you specify To use this option effectively you may want to work in a shaded 3D view 6 Click in the drawing area to place points If needed change the elevation on the Options Bar as you place additional points 7 To complete the surface click Finish Surface Creating aToposurface from Imported 3D Data You can automatically generate a toposurface based on 3D contour d...

Page 933: ... x and y coordinates Revit Architecture uses the point with the largest z value To create a toposurface from a points file 1 Open a 3D or site plan view 2 Click Site menu Toposurface or on the Site tab of the Design Bar click Toposurface 3 On the Toposurface tab of the Design Bar click Use Imported Points File 4 In the Open dialog do the following a Navigate to the location of the points file b Fo...

Page 934: ... Bar Revit Architecture enters Sketch mode 2 On the Design Bar click Lines and use the sketch tools to create a region on the toposurface 3 When you finish a subregion click Finish Sketch After finishing the subregion you can select it and click Element Properties to change its material The following image shows a toposurface that has a toposurface subregion shown in gray Splitting aToposurface Yo...

Page 935: ...ngle closed loop that does not touch boundaries of the surface Sketch any number of open loops Both ends of an open loop must lie on the boundary of the surface No part of the open loop can intersect or be coincident with the boundary of the surface 6 Click Finish Sketch If desired you can select a newly split surface click Element Properties and apply a new material such as Site Grass or Site Asp...

Page 936: ... surface as demolished and makes a copy with a matching boundary Revit Architecture marks the copy as new in the current phase To grade a toposurface 1 Click Site menu Graded Region or on the Site tab of the Design Bar click Graded Region 2 In the Graded Region dialog select one of the following Select and Edit Allows you to edit the surface Select Allows you to select a toposurface to designate a...

Page 937: ...d Area Displays the total surface area This is a read only value Surface Area Identity Data User defined comments about the toposurface Comments The name of the toposurface Name Site mark Mark Phase when the toposurface is created Phase Created Phase when the toposurface is demolished Phase Demolished Property Lines To create property lines you can use the sketching tools in Revit Architecture or ...

Page 938: ... or click Pick Lines to select lines 5 Sketch the property lines Lines should form a closed loop If you sketch an open loop and click Finish Sketch Revit Architecture issues a warning that it will not calculate the area You can ignore the warning to continue or close the loop 6 Click Finish Sketch Converting Sketched Property Lines toTable Based Property Lines 1 Open a site plan view 2 In the draw...

Page 939: ...ove command See Moving Elements with the Move Tool on page 302 Reporting Cut and FillVolumes on a Site Revit Architecture can report cut and fill volumes on a site to aid in determining the costs of landscape modification during site development Revit Architecture reports the values by making a comparison between a surface from one phase and from a later phase another surface whose boundary lies w...

Page 940: ... Schedule or Quantity on page 125 Cut and Fill Reporting with Building Pads If you add a building pad to a graded surface you will see cut and fill reported separately for the pad and the toposurface in a topography schedule This is because the pad divides the graded surface into 2 surfaces one is the surface under the pad the graded surface and one is the surface that is not under the pad the pad...

Page 941: ...sketch a toposurface at an elevation of 10 meters in a floor plan view You then sketch a pad on the surface at an offset of 20 meters from the surface If the view depth of the plan view is not low enough you will not see the pad See View Range on page 198 Adding a Building Pad 1 Open a site plan view 2 Click Site menu Pad or on the Site tab of the Design Bar click Pad 3 Sketch the building pad as ...

Page 942: ...ies dialog for Structure click Edit 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog set the function for each layer Each layer must have a function assigned to it for Revit Architecture to match layers accurately Layers can be assigned the following functions Structure A layer that supports the remainder of the building pad Substrate A material that acts as a foundation for another material Thermal Air Layer A laye...

Page 943: ...h Building Pad Properties You can change the properties of building pad types and building pad instances Modifying Building Pad Properties 1 Open a site or plan view 2 Select the building pad NOTE Use the TAB key to cycle through the selection options Selection options are displayed on the left side of the status bar 3 Click Element Properties To change properties of the building pad instance chan...

Page 944: ...d level Level at Tail Sets the start height of the slope arrow line The default value is 0 Height Offset at Head Starts the slope arrow at the designated level Level at Head Sets the end height of the slope arrow line Revit Architecture uses both parameters to calculate the rise of the slope Height Offset at Head Sets the slope angle for the selected building pad The default value is 0 This para m...

Page 945: ...pen a view that displays the toposurface to modify 2 Click Site menu Parking Component or on the Site tab of the Design Bar click Parking Component 3 Place the pointer on the toposurface and click to place the component Place as many components as desired You can also create an array of parking components See Using Arrays of Elements on page 294 4 After placing the components on the Design Bar cli...

Page 946: ... In the Type Selector select the component type 4 Click in the drawing area to add one or more components To pick a host for the components optional 5 After placing the components on the Design Bar click Modify 6 Select the components 7 On the Options Bar click Pick Host 8 Select the host Contour Line Labels You can label contour lines to indicate their elevation Contour labels display in site pla...

Page 947: ...s Changing the Appearance of Contour Line Labels You can change the display characteristics of labels for contour lines For example you can use a different font size or typeface setting such as bold or italics You can also specify label units and whether labels appear for primary contour lines only or for both primary and secondary contour lines To change the appearance of contour line labels 1 Op...

Page 948: ...l text Italic Applies underlining to label text Underline If selected only primary contour lines are labeled See Site Settings on page 891 Label primary contours only Specifies units and rounding properties for contour lines By default this option uses the project settings Units Format Specifies the source of the elevation base project shared or relative Elevation Base 910 Chapter 13 Working with ...

Page 949: ...A room is a subdivision of space within a building model based on elements such as walls floors roofs and ceilings These elements are defined as room bounding Revit Architecture refers to these room bounding elements when computing the perimeter area and volume of a room In Revit Architecture you can turn on off the Room Bounding parameter of many elements You can also use room separation lines to...

Page 950: ...ou add model elements the area boundaries do not necessarily change automatically You can specify how area boundaries behave Some area boundaries are static That is they do not change automatically and must be changed manually Some area boundaries are dynamic They stay connected with underlying model elements If the model elements move the area boundaries move with them A floor plan divided into p...

Page 951: ...ng To display a room tag with the room click Tag on placement For Upper Limit specify the level from which to measure the upper boundary of the room See Defining the Upper Boundary of a Room on page 930 For example if you are adding a room to a Level 1 floor plan and you want the room to extend from Level 1 to Level 2 or some point above Level 2 specify an Upper Limit of Level 2 For Offset measuri...

Page 952: ...a free space or one that is not entirely bounded and then draw room bounding elements around the room later When you add bounding elements the room expands to the boundaries See Room Boundaries on page 915 Selecting a Room You can select rooms in plan views and section views Select a room to check its boundaries change its properties remove it from the model or move it to another location To selec...

Page 953: ... an interior fill color select Interior Fill 5 To display reference lines for rooms select Reference 6 Click OK Room Boundaries Revit Architecture uses room boundaries when computing the area perimeter and volume of a room You can check room boundaries in plan views and section views To check room boundaries you can select rooms or change visibility graphic settings for the view See Selecting a Ro...

Page 954: ...so use a section view to check the perimeter of a room that has sloped walls or other atypical features In section views the graphic display of room boundaries varies depending on whether volume computation is turned on or off See Enabling Volume Computations on page 929 When volume computation is turned off When volume computation is turned off Revit Architecture shows the room as a rectangle in ...

Page 955: ...Revit Architecture is omitting parts of the room from its volume computations This may be caused by a combination of sloping walls and the computation height that is defined for the corresponding level or by other situations See Computation Height on page 926 and Situations That Can Affect Room Volume Computations on page 929 Room Bounding Elements The following elements are bounding elements for ...

Page 956: ...is boundary is used to compute the area and volume of the room To turn on the Room Bounding parameter 1 Select the element 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog under Instance Parameters select Room Bounding 4 Click OK Related topics Room Bounding Elements on page 917 Room Boundaries in Linked Models on page 920 Room Areas and Perimeters for Design Options on page 1256 Room Separation Lines U...

Page 957: ...n a room you can add one See Creating a Room on page 913 You can also do the following Tag the room See Tagging a Room on page 922 Apply a color scheme to the plan view or to a section view See Color Schemes on page 956 Showing or Hiding Room Separation Lines 1 Open a plan view or 3D view 2 Type vg or click View menu Visibility Graphics 3 Click the Model Categories tab 4 In the Visibility column e...

Page 958: ...g interior More about rooms and linked models If you unload a linked model rooms in the host project are no longer bounded by the room bounding elements in the linked model Elements in a nested link are room bounding when you turn on the Room Bounding parameter of the nested linked model and the Room Bounding parameter of its parent model Related topics Working with Linked Models on page 1213 Room...

Page 959: ...er enhanced to improve accuracy In addition for the purpose of estimating HVAC loads room volumes are now computed to the wall face They are no longer computed to the wall center or wall core As a result in existing projects that contain rooms Revit Architecture may show numbers for room volumes that are different from previous project numbers These numbers reflect more accurate computations for r...

Page 960: ...ce and tag rooms in a floor plan view and you want to see tags for the same rooms in a reflected ceiling plan RCP view See Tag All Not Tagged on page 1067 To tag a room 1 Open a plan or section view 2 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar click Room Tag 3 On the Options Bar do the following Indicate the desired orientation of the room tag See Tag Orientation on page 922 To include a leader li...

Page 961: ...Drag the blue arrow control to the desired position If you drag a tag outside its room or area boundary Revit Architecture displays a warning For instructions see Room Tag Is Outside of Its Room on page 944 Rotating aTag Use the following procedure to rotate a tag for a room or area 1 Select the tag The status bar displays the category and family type for the tag 2 On the Options Bar select Model ...

Page 962: ...ce a new room within bounding elements or separation lines that contain a room that you placed previously Revit Architecture warns you that the new room is redundant and suggests that you either move it or delete it You can delete a room by deleting it from a room schedule The corresponding room tag is deleted as well If you delete a room tag in a plan view the room remains in the project and in t...

Page 963: ... Click OK RoomTagType Properties Description Name Graphics Displays the room s computed volume in the tag If Not Computed displays turn on volume computation See Enabling Volume Computations on page 929 Show Volume Displays the room s assigned number in the tag Show Room Number Displays the room s computed area in the tag Show Area Specifies the shape of the arrowhead on the leader line Leader Arr...

Page 964: ...fined height Revit Architecture determines the area of the room Related topics Room Volume on page 928 Creating Room Area Reports on page 1290 Analyzing a Conceptual Design on page 522 Room Areas and Perimeters for Design Options on page 1256 Computation Height Revit Architecture measures the perimeter of a room at a defined distance above the base level of the room This distance is the computatio...

Page 965: ...ing To use a default computation height select Automatic Room Computation Height By default the computation height is 4 or 1200 mm above the base level of the room the height of the default cut plane See Computation Height on page 926 To specify a computation height clear Automatic Room Computation Height For Computation Height enter the distance above the base level to use when computing the room...

Page 966: ...nd core layers of a wall see Vertically Compound Walls on page 567 RoomVolume Room volumes display in the Element Properties dialog in tags and in schedules for rooms By default Revit Architecture does not compute room volumes When volume computation is turned off room tags and schedules display Not Calculated for the Volume parameter Because volume computation may affect Revit Architecture perfor...

Page 967: ...es space that Revit Architecture omits from the room volume computation To avoid this situation turn off the Room Bounding parameter for the elements Right click the element and click Element Properties Clear the Room Bounding Parameter and click OK In this case the volume of those elements and the space above them is included in the room volume computation Note that Revit Architecture may also om...

Page 968: ...m height parameters This value is read only The room s actual height may be changed by room bounding elements such as intervening floors and roofs See Considering Ceilings and Floors in Room Volume Computations on page 932 Defining the Upper Boundary of a Room Together the Upper Limit and Limit Offset parameters define the upper boundary of the room NOTE If room bounding elements intersect the upp...

Page 969: ...positive number To move the lower boundary below the base level enter a negative number For example in the following section view Room 1 has a Base Offset of 0 The lower boundary of the room starts at Level 1 Room 2 has a Base Offset of 1000 The lower boundary of the room starts 1000 mm above Level 1 Room 3 has a Base Offset of 500 The lower boundary of the room starts 500 mm below Level 1 Changin...

Page 970: ...tion Height is a type parameter for levels See Computation Height on page 926 The dashed line for the computation height displays only when you select the room in a section view If the Areas and Volumes option is turned on the room boundary follows any sloping elements such as roofs walls and ramps If Areas and Volumes is turned off the room boundary does not follow sloping elements Considering Ce...

Page 971: ...oint above the room s lower boundary If this occurs create a new level for the elevated floor and add the room on this level Then Revit Architecture can compute the room volume correctly Sharing Room Space Information Between Revit Architecture and Revit MEP In Revit Architecture architects use rooms and areas to divide a building model by usage occupancy or other criteria In Revit MEP engineers u...

Page 972: ...ngle room in a linked model Rooms can exist in design options See Design Options and Rooms on page 1256 Spaces cannot exist in design options If the architectural model changes spaces are not deleted in the host MEP model Spaces can become unenclosed redundant or ambiguous as they would if the same changes were made in the host model Modification of one model does not propagate to linked models If...

Page 973: ...s and numbers Related topics Room Boundaries on page 915 Project Phasing on page 1263 Scheduling Phase Specific Rooms Schedules for modelling and drafting elements have phases You can create a room schedule specific to a phase and include room area and other information in that schedule When you create a room schedule select the phase you want it to represent in the New Schedule dialog You can als...

Page 974: ... 3 above but for Phase specify New Construction 6 Click Edit Paste Aligned Current View The room is added to the New Construction phase with the same properties that were specified in the Existing phase Phase Specific Rooms and Linked Models If phase specific rooms in a linked model do not reflect the correct phases check phase mapping for the linked model When you link a model to the host project...

Page 975: ... follows To unplace a room 1 Open a plan view or a section view that displays the room 2 Select the room Check the status bar to be sure that you have selected the room and not the room tag The status bar displays the following Rooms Room room name 3 Delete the room from the plan view using any of the following methods Press DELETE or CTRL X Right click the room and click Delete Click Edit menu De...

Page 976: ...d or enclosed You may want to save this schedule so that you can quickly determine which rooms need to be placed or enclosed Hiding Unplaced Rooms in a Room Schedule 1 Display the room schedule in the drawing area The room schedule lists all rooms defined in the building model For any rooms that are currently unplaced the schedule displays Not Placed for any read only fields including Area Perimet...

Page 977: ...ollowing XDATA information for room boundaries Name Number Occupancy Occupant Department and Comments The polylines include the following information for area boundaries Name and Comments Related topics Creating Room Area Reports on page 1290 Exporting to gbXML on page 1296 Exporting to CAD Formats on page 1273 Exporting Rooms and Areas as Polylines 1 In a Revit project click File menu Export CAD ...

Page 978: ...ter 0 zero to use the level specified for the Upper Limit The default is 10 4000 mm See Defining the Upper Boundary of a Room on page 930 The distance at which the lower boundary of the room occurs measuring from the base level defined by the Level parameter Enter a positive number to go above Base Offset the base level or enter a negative number to go below it Enter 0 zero to use the base level T...

Page 979: ...nish Finish for the ceiling such as stucco Ceiling Finish Finish for the wall such as painted Wall Finish Finish for the floor such as carpeting Floor Finish Name of the person group or organization that will use the room Occupant Phasing The project phase to which the room belongs A read only value based on view properties See Phase Specific Rooms and Boundaries on page 934 Phase Troubleshooting ...

Page 980: ...t to export to gbXML and rooms in the building model do not include upper surfaces roofs Solution Do the following Make sure that the roofs in the building model are room bounding See Making an Element Room Bounding on page 918 Where appropriate adjust the upper boundaries of rooms to include the roofs See Defining Room Height on page 930 and Considering Ceilings and Floors in Room Volume Computat...

Page 981: ...es Solution To compute room volumes click Settings menu Area and Volume Computations On the Area and Volume Computations dialog under Volume Computations select Areas and Volumes Not Enclosed Warning Room is not in a properly enclosed region Issue This message displays when a room is not properly enclosed by bounding elements or room separation lines For a room in a schedule Revit Architecture dis...

Page 982: ...ct the room and delete it Issue This message displays when you delete a room tag in a room Solution You can ignore the warning or you can remedy the situation by placing another tag for the room or deleting the room from the project See Tagging a Room on page 922 or Deleting Rooms on page 938 RoomVolumes Overlap Warning Room Volumes Overlap adjust Upper Limit and Upper Offset Issue This message di...

Page 983: ...ng a Conceptual Design on page 522 Area Schemes Area schemes are definable spatial relationships For example you can have an area scheme showing the relationship between core and circulation spaces in a floor plan Area plan with area scheme applied You can create multiple area schemes By default Revit Architecture creates 2 area schemes Gross Building Total constructed area of a building Rentable ...

Page 984: ...ick OK Area Plans Area plans are views that show spatial relationships based on area schemes and levels in your model You can have multiple area plans for every area scheme and level Each area plan can have distinct area boundaries tags and color schemes Area plans are listed in the Area Plans node of the Project Browser You can rename area plans In the Project Browser the area plan name indicates...

Page 985: ...systems are not walls 9 Add more area boundaries as needed See Creating Area Boundaries on page 947 Area Boundaries Area boundaries define usable space in buildings You can define these areas by drawing them or by picking walls If you select the Apply Area Rules option Revit Architecture automatically changes the wall boundary position when you change the area type See Area Types on page 953 For e...

Page 986: ...you plan to use Later you can place these predefined areas in an area plan of the project Related topics Moving a Tag on page 923 Rotating a Tag on page 923 Creating an Area You can create areas using 2 methods Add rows to an area schedule This allows you to predefine areas in an early design of the project See Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page 125 You can later use the Area tool to place th...

Page 987: ...to tag untagged areas See Tag All Not Tagged on page 1067 To add an area tag 1 Open an area plan view 2 Click Drafting menu Area Tag or on the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar click Area Tag Revit Architecture highlights defined areas in the area plan 3 On the Options Bar do the following Indicate the desired orientation of the area tag See Tag Orientation on page 922 To include a leader line w...

Page 988: ...me You can add this parameter to a schedule and it can display in an area tag Area name Name Specific comments about the area Comments Other Type of area NOTE Changing the area type alters the position of area boundaries created with the Apply Area Rules options See Area Types on page 953 for type rules Area Type AreaTag Properties Parameter names values and descriptions for area tags Values are m...

Page 989: ...hen you add an area to a floor plan the project stores information about the area This can include information that you add using area properties such as the area name usage and so on See Area Properties on page 949 You can see information about areas in an area schedule If you want to retain information about an area but remove it from its current location in the building model unplace the area a...

Page 990: ...any areas that are currently unplaced the schedule displays Not Placed for any read only fields including Area Perimeter Level Upper Limit and Volume 3 On the Options Bar for Not placed Not enclosed select Isolate This option filters the schedule so that it lists only the areas that are not placed or enclosed You may want to save this schedule that you can quickly determine which areas need to be ...

Page 991: ...e Revit Links tab 4 Select the linked model to display areas and area boundaries and click the button in the Display Settings column 5 Select By Linked view 6 Select the area plan from the Linked view list 7 Click Apply 8 Click OK AreaTypes Area types are an instance property of area tags Area types contain area measurement rules that Revit Architecture applies to area boundaries See Area Type Rul...

Page 992: ...ble primarily for the use of the tenants on that floor Floor Area Stairs elevator shafts flues pipe shafts vertical ducts and their enclosing walls Major Vertical Penetration Area of an office building suitable for retail occupancy Store Area AreaType Rules The following table shows area measurement rules Rules are determined by one type of space bordering another space To find the appropriate mea...

Page 993: ...asured from wall centerline Building Common Area Office Store Building Common Area Area Boundary measured from wall face bordering Building Common Area Exterior Major Vertical Penetration Building Common Area Office Area Area Boundary measured from wall centerline Building Common Area Office Store Office Area Area Boundary measured from wall face bordering the office area Exterior Major Vertical P...

Page 994: ...mes Use color schemes to color and apply fill patterns to rooms and areas You can apply color schemes to floor plan views and section views based on a specific value or range of values You can apply a different color scheme to each view Colors schemes can be useful for graphically illustrating categories of spaces For example you can create a color scheme by room name area occupancy or department ...

Page 995: ... next image shows a plan view with a color scheme applied by a range of values in this example square footage NOTE To use color schemes you must have rooms or areas defined in the project Color Schemes 957 ...

Page 996: ...r method 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog select the category for which to create a color scheme Areas Gross Building Areas Rentable or Rooms 3 Select an existing scheme Then right click and click Duplicate or click under Schemes 4 In the New color scheme dialog enter a name for the new color scheme and click OK The name displays in the color scheme list 5 In the Scheme Definition field enter a t...

Page 997: ...lue is in use in the project This is a read only value for all list items except any custom values you add Select a row by clicking the row number Click or to move the row up or down in the list These options are available when you select By value 9 Optionally click to add a new value to the scheme definition For more information see Adding Values to a Color Scheme Definition on page 959 10 Option...

Page 998: ...olor scheme to the background of the view only For example in a floor plan view it applies the color scheme to the floor only In a section view it applies the color scheme to the background walls or surfaces only The color scheme is not applied to foreground elements in the view Foreground Applies the color scheme to all model elements in the view 6 Click OK Related topic Adding a Color Scheme Leg...

Page 999: ... Rooms Areas from linked files and click OK 3 Click View menu Visibility Graphics 4 Click the Revit Links tab 5 Select the linked model to apply the host color scheme to and click the button in the Display Settings column 6 If the linked model contains rooms select By Host view or Custom If the linked model contains areas select Custom If you select Custom For Linked View select the view from the ...

Page 1000: ... dialog select none from the list and click OK 4 Click OK to exit the Element Properties dialog You can also remove the color scheme display by selecting the color scheme legend in the drawing area and on the Options Bar clicking Edit Color Scheme In the Edit Color Scheme dialog select none and click OK Color Scheme Legend Color schemes color rooms and areas in a floor plan or section view by valu...

Page 1001: ...f items in the legend change the graphic appearance of legend swatches and change the legend title To resize the legend 1 In the drawing area select the color scheme legend 2 Drag the blue circle control up to move color swatches to new columns or down to move color swatches to the previous column You can have as many columns in your legend as you have swatches 3 Drag the blue triangle control to ...

Page 1002: ... Bar click Edit Color Scheme 3 Edit the text for Title NOTE When you modify the legend title for a color scheme all project views that use the color scheme are affected 4 Click Apply to view your changes Click OK to exit the Edit Color Scheme dialog To show or hide the legend title 1 In the drawing area select the color scheme legend 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 4 In t...

Page 1003: ...Sets the size of the legend values Size Applies bold formatting to the legend values Bold Applies italic formatting to the legend values Italic Applies underline formatting to the legend values Underline Title Text Sets the font of the legend title Font Sets the size of the legend title Size Applies bold formatting to the legend title Bold Applies italic formatting to the legend title Italic Appli...

Page 1004: ...966 ...

Page 1005: ...ge 1027 Construction Documents Overview Construction documents are the records that you share with clients engineers and construction professionals to communicate a design For example clients need to see floor plans elevations and 3D drawings of the design for approval Engineers from other disciplines will want to see those drawings as well as more detailed drawings to help them understand the bui...

Page 1006: ... schedules on each sheet Sheets Overview A sheet also called a drawing sheet is an individual page of a construction document set In Revit Architecture you create a sheet view for each sheet in the construction document set You can then place multiple drawings or schedules on each sheet view 968 Chapter 15 Preparing Construction Documents ...

Page 1007: ...rganization With Revit Architecture you can create a digital cartoon set First add the required views drawings and schedules to the project and sketch the basic design of the building model Add the desired sheets to the project and give them appropriate names and numbers Then add the views to the appropriate sheets If desired you can set the view scales titles and other attributes now so the resul...

Page 1008: ... in the Project Browser As you start to draw the building model in the project views the views on the sheets update automatically This technique streamlines the project documentation process and maintains organizational standards Adding a Sheet 1 Open the Revit project 2 Add a sheet using one of the following methods In the Project Browser right click Sheets all and click New Sheet On the View tab...

Page 1009: ...h one on a different sheet NOTE You can also place legends and schedules including view lists and drawing lists on sheets Legends and schedules can be placed on multiple sheets See Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1002 To add views to a sheet 1 Open the sheet 2 To add a view to the sheet use one of the following methods In the Project Browser expand the list of views and locate the view and dr...

Page 1010: ... of the view to focus on one area Crop region Use the crop region to focus the view on a particular area of the building model See Crop Regions on page 163 Masking regions Use masking regions to hide areas of the view within the rectangular crop region that are not relevant For example in the following floor plan masking regions obscure the upper right and upper left corners of the apartment unit ...

Page 1011: ... title See Viewport Types on page 995 AligningViews on a Sheet When positioning views on a sheet you can align the view titles The view titles stay aligned even if the size of a viewport changes NOTE This method of aligning views on a sheet does not apply to schedules To align views on a sheet 1 In a project add 2 or more views to a sheet See Adding Views to a Sheet on page 971 2 Drag a view to th...

Page 1012: ... sheet 2 Select the view to lock in place on the sheet 3 On the Edit toolbar click Pin The pin icon displays on the view indicating that it is locked in place To unlock a view on a sheet 1 On the sheet select the locked view The pin icon displays on the view indicating that it is locked in place 2 Click the pin icon The pin icon displays with a red slash through it indicating that the view is no l...

Page 1013: ...er and Sheet Name parameters SpecifyingTitle Block Information for Sheets A title block typically displays information about the project as well as information about individual sheets Use the following procedures to specify the information that you want to display in the title blocks of sheets in a project NOTE To add custom fields to a title block see Adding Custom Fields to a Title Block on page...

Page 1014: ...iew Properties In the Element Properties dialog for the sheet change the values of the sheet specific parameters that display in the title block Click OK Modifying aView on a Sheet 1 Open the sheet 2 Select the viewport for a view on the sheet and click View menu Activate View or right click the viewport and click Activate View TIP If views on the sheet overlap press TAB until the correct view hig...

Page 1015: ... page 79 Annotating and Detailing on page 1027 and Dimensions on page 213 2 Create duplicate dependent views See Creating Dependent Views on page 146 In each dependent view use crop regions to show the part of the model to display in that view and the annotations to include If any unwanted annotations or model elements display in a dependent view right click the element and click Hide in view Elem...

Page 1016: ...ck the view and click Deactivate View 3 On the Options Bar for Rotation on Sheet select the desired rotation option The view rotates on the sheet Creating aTitle Sheet A construction documentation set usually includes a title sheet also called a cover sheet The title sheet typically includes a rendering 3D drawing or other view of the building model It may also include the following types of infor...

Page 1017: ...ing the appropriate title block See Adding a Sheet on page 970 2 Rename the sheet to indicate that it is the title sheet See Renaming a Sheet on page 975 3 Add the desired view to the sheet See Adding Views to a Sheet on page 971 4 Create a drawing list omit the title sheet from the list and add the drawing list to the sheet See Drawing Lists on page 1005 5 Add the required information to the titl...

Page 1018: ...on page 120 For keynote legends see Keynote Legend on page 1061 2 Open the sheet on which you want to place the legend view 3 In the Project Browser expand Legends click the name of the legend view drag it into the drawing area and click to place it on the sheet You can place a legend view on multiple sheets 4 Optional For a component legend or symbol legend hide the view title See Removing a View...

Page 1019: ...ote Block on page 127 3 Add a sheet See Adding a Sheet on page 970 4 Place the note block on the sheet as follows a In the Project Browser expand Schedules Quantities b Select the name of the note block drag it onto the sheet and click to place it Using External Information on a Sheet You can include information that is external to a Revit project on the sheets that Revit Architecture generates Yo...

Page 1020: ...ting its contents does not change the original document from which it was copied See Modifying Text Notes on page 1028 Adding a Spreadsheet to a Sheet 1 In the spreadsheet application open the spreadsheet Display the data as you want it to display on the Revit sheet 2 Use a screen capture utility to take a screenshot of the spreadsheet For example you can use a screen capture utility such as SnagI...

Page 1021: ...plays on the sheet such as the issue date designer and reviewer NOTE To track printing times Revit Architecture displays a date and time stamp on sheets To format the display of this stamp modify the regional and language settings on your computer Modifying Sheet Properties To modify sheet properties do either of the following In the Project Browser right click the sheet name and click Properties ...

Page 1022: ...r for the sheet in the construction document set Sheet Number Brief description of the sheet This name displays in the Project Browser drawing lists and other areas of Revit Architecture Sheet Name An issue date for the sheet This value is separate from the Project Issue Date label contained in the title block Sheet Issue Date Default value is selected If you clear the check box the sheet is exclu...

Page 1023: ... select one of the predefined title block sizes or select New Size rft to create a title block with a new size Click OK The Family Editor opens 3 Add lines and text to the title block See Family Editor on page 376 You can also add the following to a title block Images or corporate logos See Logos and Images in a Title Block on page 986 Custom fields See Adding Custom Fields to a Title Block on pag...

Page 1024: ...double click the text and edit it To create custom fields that display information on a title block see Adding Custom Fields to a Title Block on page 992 NOTE To update project specific information or sheet specific information that displays within the title block of sheets in a project see Specifying Title Block Information for Sheets on page 975 3 To save the title block click File menu Save spe...

Page 1025: ...lock family in the Family Editor click Load into Projects If multiple projects are currently open select the open projects into which you want to load the title block and click OK If only one project is open Revit Architecture loads the title block into that project without further input When adding a sheet to a project See Adding a Sheet on page 970 Using the File menu in a project Use the follow...

Page 1026: ...n designing a title block you can include a revision schedule You can specify the information to include in the revision schedule You can also specify its layout height and placement on the title block When you add a sheet to a project the revision schedule displays information about revisions in that project Adding a Revision Schedule to a CustomTitle Block 1 Open a title block for editing See Mo...

Page 1027: ...Building a Revision Schedule from the Top Down or Bottom Up on page 991 c For Height specify whether the height of the revision schedule is user defined fixed or variable See Defining the Height of the Revision Schedule on page 990 d Use the remaining options of the Appearance tab to define attributes for grid lines header text and body text See Formatting a Schedule on page 136 8 Click OK Revit A...

Page 1028: ...yond the boundaries of a sheet See Defining the Height of the Revision Schedule on page 990 6 To save the title block click File menu Save specify a location and file name if needed and click Save 7 Load the title block into a project See Loading a Title Block into a Project on page 987 Defining the Height of the Revision Schedule By default revision schedules use a variable height so that the sch...

Page 1029: ...e dot up or down until the revision schedule is the desired height The blue dot indicates the bottom boundary of the revision schedule If a sheet in a project has more revisions than can fit in this space Revit Architecture omits the oldest revisions from the schedule 5 To save the title block click File menu Save specify a location and file name if needed and click Save 6 Load the title block int...

Page 1030: ...ock click File menu Save specify a location and file name if needed and click Save 9 Load the title block into a project See Loading a Title Block into a Project on page 987 Adding Custom Fields to aTitle Block In general a title block contains placeholders for 2 types of information Project specific information This information applies to all sheets in the project Examples project name client inf...

Page 1031: ...title block After loading the title block into a project and adding sheets you can see the custom fields on the sheets Project specific fields Click Settings menu Project Information to display the shared parameters that belong to the Project Information category You can change these values in that dialog or on a sheet Whenever you change project specific information Revit Architecture updates all...

Page 1032: ...t e Specify the desired import options See Import Options for CAD Formats and Revit Models on page 1312 f Click Open If you cannot see the imported title block in the drawing area enter ZF Zoom to Fit 4 If needed adjust the defined print area When you selected a title block size in the New dialog Revit Architecture placed lines in the drawing area These lines define the size of the printed page th...

Page 1033: ... page 987 Viewports When you add a view to a sheet a viewport displays on the sheet to represent the view The viewport is like a window through which you can see the actual view If desired you can activate the view and modify the building model from the sheet See Modifying a View on a Sheet on page 976 NOTE Viewports apply only to project drawings such as floor plans elevations sections and 3D vie...

Page 1034: ...ters for the viewport type See Viewport Type Properties on page 997 8 Click OK twice Revit Architecture applies the new viewport type to the selected viewport Applying aViewportType After creating a viewport type you can apply it to viewports on sheets in a project The following procedure assumes that you have created sheets in a project placed views on the sheets and created one or more viewport ...

Page 1035: ...nsion line for the view title The extension line displays only if the view title displays See View Titles on Sheets on page 997 To change the length of the line for an individual view title see Modifying a View Title on a Sheet on page 998 Show Extension Line Specifies the weight of the horizontal line for the view title Line Weight Specifies the color of the horizontal line for the view title Col...

Page 1036: ...thod retains the current view name in the Project Browser but specifies a different view title to display on the sheet a Click b In the Element Properties dialog under Identity Data for Title on Sheet enter the view title to display on the sheet c Click OK If you want to change the display attributes for the view title create or modify a view title type See View Title Types on page 999 4 To change...

Page 1037: ...port type on sheets in the project 6 For Show Title select No 7 Click OK twice 8 On the sheet apply the viewport type to the desired view See Applying a Viewport Type on page 996 ViewTitleTypes View title types provide standard settings for view titles on sheets Use view title types to do the following Define the type of information that displays in view titles on sheets such as the view name numb...

Page 1038: ...le type into a project See Loading a View Title Type into a Project on page 1000 Loading aViewTitleType into a Project You can load a view title type into a project as follows When creating or modifying a view title type After saving changes to the view title type in the Family Editor click Load into Projects on the Design Bar Select the open projects into which you want to load the view title typ...

Page 1039: ... displays the viewport type that currently applies to the selected viewport 2 Click 3 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 4 For Title select the desired view title type from the list NOTE If the list does not include the desired view title type click Cancel twice Load the desired view title type See Loading a View Title Type into a Project on page 1000 Then repeat this procedure to app...

Page 1040: ...atting a Schedule on a Sheet You can change the attributes that control the display of a schedule on the sheet including grid lines and text attributes The following procedure assumes that you have added a sheet to a project and placed a schedule on the sheet See Adding a Sheet on page 970 and Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1002 To format a schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser under ...

Page 1041: ... controls allow you to move and manipulate the schedule The Z break control in the middle of the right border splits the schedule 3 Click the Z break control The schedule divides into 2 sections splitting at the approximate location of the Z break control 4 To split a section of the schedule further click the Z break control again NOTE You cannot delete schedule sections from a sheet You cannot dr...

Page 1042: ...you can rejoin section 2 with section 1 or 3 To rejoin schedule sections 1 On a sheet that displays a split schedule drag one schedule section over the other 2 Release the mouse button The split schedule sections rejoin into one section Adjusting Schedule Columns on a Sheet When you place a schedule on a sheet text that does not fit within a column wraps to a new line To adjust the column width se...

Page 1043: ...eet do the following a On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog under Fields select the field b For Heading orientation select Vertical This setting affects the column heading on a sheet only It does not affect its display in the schedule view 4 Click OK twice 5 Open the sheet to see the results In the schedule the column headings for the selected fields display vertically instead o...

Page 1044: ...ts from a Drawing List You can omit sheets from the drawing list For example you may not want the cover sheet to display in the drawing list To omit a sheet from a drawing list 1 In the Project Browser right click the name of the sheet to omit and click Properties 2 On the Element Properties dialog clear Appears In Drawing List This option is selected for all sheets by default 3 Click OK Revit Arc...

Page 1045: ...n create a custom Sheet Order parameter and add it to the drawing list properties The following procedure assumes that you have created a drawing list and added multiple sheets to the project See Creating a Drawing List on page 1006 and Adding a Sheet on page 970 To organize a drawing list 1 Open the drawing list 2 In the Project Browser under Schedules Quantities right click the drawing list name...

Page 1046: ...cture hides the Sheet Order column in the drawing list NOTE To redisplay the Sheet Order column right click in the drawing list and click Unhide All Columns You can place the drawing list on a sheet and format it as desired See Adding a Schedule to a Sheet on page 1002 and Formatting a Schedule on a Sheet on page 1002 Revisions When working on building projects you must often make changes to meet ...

Page 1047: ...evision to a Revision Cloud on page 1015 5 Tag the revision clouds to identify the assigned revisions See Tagging a Revision Cloud on page 1016 6 Check sheets to make sure that the revision schedules show the desired information See Specifying the Revisions to Include in a Revision Schedule on page 1018 7 Issue the revisions See Issuing a Revision on page 1019 Entering Revision Information When yo...

Page 1048: ...e revision tag and draws the revision cloud but does not display the cloud in the drawing To move or edit the cloud in the drawing move the cursor over the cloud area to highlight and select the cloud Cloud and Tag Displays the revision cloud and the revision tag in the drawing This option is the default 8 Click OK Merging Revisions You can merge combine revisions into a single entry For some proj...

Page 1049: ...tion about revisions carefully consider how you want to number revision clouds on sheets by project or by sheet Use the Numbering setting in the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog to control the display of revision numbers for clouds in tags and schedules If you change this setting after creating revisions revision numbers of all revision clouds may change Numbering Per Project default Revit Architectu...

Page 1050: ...et NOTE If you change the Numbering setting after creating revisions revision numbers of all revision clouds may change Specify the desired setting before entering revision information for the project 1 In the project click Settings menu Revisions 2 In the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog for Numbering select the revision numbering method for clouds on a sheet Per Project or Per Sheet See Revision Cl...

Page 1051: ...t Issues Revisions dialog maintains an overall project based sequence for all revisions regardless of their individual numbering schemes Related topic Revision Cloud Numbering by Project or by Sheet on page 1011 Assigning a Numbering Scheme to a Revision You can assign a numbering scheme to a revision when you first add it to the project See Entering Revision Information on page 1009 You can also ...

Page 1052: ...so on 4 Click OK Revisions with No Numbering Scheme In some cases you may want a revision to use no numbering scheme For example an unnumbered revision can indicate a project milestone or a document issuance When assigning a numbering scheme to the revision select None See Assigning a Numbering Scheme to a Revision on page 1013 Revision Clouds Use revision clouds to indicate design areas that have...

Page 1053: ...a Revision to a Revision Cloud When you add a revision cloud to a view by default Revit Architecture assigns the most recent revision to the cloud If needed you can assign a different revision to the cloud You can assign one revision to each cloud or assign the same revision to multiple clouds To assign a revision to a cloud 1 In a project view select the revision cloud 2 On the Options Bar for Re...

Page 1054: ...nother revision tag family is loaded in the Project Browser under Families Annotation Symbols look for the revision tag family name To load a revision tag family see Loading Families on page 352 for instructions 2 Open the view that contains revision clouds 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Tag By Category 4 In the drawing area select the revision clouds to tag As you select each cloud...

Page 1055: ...ew See Crop Regions on page 163 Hide in view Elements In a view select one or more revision clouds right click and click Hide in view Elements Revision Cloud Properties The following table describes parameters for revision clouds To see or change these parameters right click a revision cloud in a view and click Element Properties Description Name The revision assigned to the cloud To change the as...

Page 1056: ... the Revisions to Include in a Revision Schedule By default the revision schedule on a sheet lists the revisions relating to revision clouds in the views of the sheet Use the following procedure to list more revisions on the revision schedule This procedure assumes that you have created a project with views and sheets that include revision schedules entered revision information added revision clou...

Page 1057: ...vision clouds You cannot edit revision clouds to which the issued revision is assigned To issue a revision 1 In the project click Settings menu Revisions 2 In the Sheet Issues Revisions dialog do the following a For Issued to indicate the person or organization to whom the revisions will be issued b For Issued by indicate the person or organization who will issue the revision c Check the other val...

Page 1058: ...1300 Publishing to Buzzsaw on page 1304 PrintingTips Keyboard shortcut CTRL P Before printing be sure that you have installed the most recent version of the printer driver Consult with the printer manufacturer To print to PDF see Printing to PDF on page 1024 To print many views and sheets unattended use Batch Print for Revit See Batch Printing on page 1025 To generate DWF files use the Publish to ...

Page 1059: ...he project are maintained and printed provided the printer supports colors 9 Under Options specify additional print settings When printing you can hide the following elements scope boxes reference planes and crop boundaries Hide unreferenced view tags Select this option if you do not want to print section elevation and callout tags that are not on sheets View links print black by default but you c...

Page 1060: ... draft version of a view or sheet before printing it Print Preview is not available if you are printing multiple sheets or views To see a print preview click File menu Print Preview NOTE If the print job is of substantial size the status bar displays a Cancel button The file size necessary to trigger this option depends on system speed and amount of memory PrintingViews and Sheets Use the Print co...

Page 1061: ...ngViews to Print Publish or Export When you are outputting project views or sheets to various formats you can specify which views and sheets are to be included in the output The following procedure applies to these commands File menu Print The Print dialog displays File menu Export CAD Formats The Export dialog displays File menu Publish DWF 2D DWF The Publish dialog displays File menu Publish DWF...

Page 1062: ...truction documents to DWF DWF files are smaller in size than PDF files and they can be easily shared with colleagues for online review See Publishing 2D or 3D DWF on page 1300 To print to PDF 1 Click File menu Print or on the Standard toolbar click 2 In the Print dialog for Name select your PDF print driver If the list does not include a PDF print driver talk to your system administrator about ins...

Page 1063: ... as it is created To avoid the need to provide individual file names for PDFs change your system s default PDF settings The following procedure describes how to change this setting for Adobe PDF The steps may vary for other PDF drivers To change the default Adobe PDF print settings 1 On the Windows desktop click Start menu Settings Printers and Faxes 2 In the Printers and Faxes window right click ...

Page 1064: ...3 Open a Revit project and click Tools menu External Tools Batch Print 4 In the Batch Print dialog click Help to learn how to use the utility 1026 Chapter 15 Preparing Construction Documents ...

Page 1065: ...ts Text Notes You can insert wrapping or non wrapping text notes Text notes are measured in paper space For example a 1 4 text note indicates that the text note will appear as 1 4 high on a sheet Text notes automatically scale with the view For example if you reduce the size of the view scale the text automatically resizes 16 1027 ...

Page 1066: ...utton before entering text The attribute is applied only to the text note instance or to any part of the text note you select Create a text note with non wrapping text 5 Click once to place the note and Revit Architecture inserts a text box in which to type Create a text note with wrapping text 6 Place the cursor in the drawing area do not click Drag the cursor to form a text box NOTE If you are p...

Page 1067: ... right or center Change the typeface Access Properties and then click Edit New In the Type Properties dialog you can set the properties Italic Bold and Underline Edit the text Select the text note and then click on the text Change the background of the note Right click the text note and click Properties Click Edit New In the Type Properties dialog set the Background value to either Opaque or Trans...

Page 1068: ...ving Leader Lines from aText Note 1 Select the text note 2 On the Options Bar click one of the following options to add leaders Add a left leader Add a right leader Add a left arc leader Add a right arc leader 3 Click as many times as desired to place leaders The first 2 options are available for one and 2 segment leaders only The other 2 options are for arc leaders only TIP You can convert a text...

Page 1069: ...kness of the leader line You can change the definition of the line weight Line Weight numbers using the Line Weights command in the Settings menu See Line Weights on page 486 Sets the background for the text note With Opaque the background of the note itself covers material behind it Transparent allows you to see material behind the note This is useful with text notes placed in color defined rooms...

Page 1070: ...whead Properties Parameter names values and descriptions for text note leader arrowheads Many values are modifiable Settings are global for the project To access properties for leader arrowhead types click Settings menu Annotations Arrowheads Arrowhead Properties Description Name Sets the arrowhead shape on the leader line Arrow Style Fills the arrowhead Fill Tick Sets the width of the arrowhead T...

Page 1071: ... Grids 1 Click Drafting menu Grid or on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Grid 2 On the Options Bar click or Use to snap the grid to an existing line such as a wall 3 If you selected the Draw option you must click a sketching command to create the grid For more information about these commands see Sketching on page 251 4 Click when the grid is the correct length Revit Architecture automatic...

Page 1072: ...ou can enter a number or a letter You can also change the value by selecting the grid line and clicking Enter a different value for the Name property Offsetting a Grid Line from Its Bubble There may be times when you sketch a grid line and want to offset its bubble from the rest of the grid line 1 Sketch a grid line or select an existing grid line The end of the line near the bubble has drag contr...

Page 1073: ... near the grid bubble You may need to zoom in to see it clearly 3 Clear the check box to hide the bubble or select it to show the bubble You can repeat this process to show or hide the bubble at the opposite end of the grid line To show or hide grid bubbles using type properties 1 Open a view that displays grid lines 2 Select a grid line and click Element Properties 3 In the Element Properties dia...

Page 1074: ...ot display through the middle of a model element This feature is available when the grid line uses a grid type for which the Center Segment parameter is Custom or Gap See Customizing Grid Lines on page 1037 A grid line that has been adjusted to end at the wall To adjust the center segment of a grid line 1 Select the grid line in the view Revit Architecture displays a blue dot on the grid line You ...

Page 1075: ...the entire grid line Modify the Bubble grid type or create your own See Changing a Continuous Grid Line on page 1038 Hide the center segment of the grid lines to create a gap displaying only the end segments in views Modify the Bubble Gap grid type or create your own See Creating a Grid Line with a Center Gap on page 1038 Display the center segment of the grid line using a different line color wei...

Page 1076: ...e Properties on page 1040 5 Click OK twice Revit Architecture updates all grid lines of this type in all views Creating a Grid Line with a Center Gap 1 Open a view that displays grid lines 2 Select a grid line and click Element Properties 3 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 4 In the Type Properties dialog do the following For Center Segment select None For End Segment Weight End Segm...

Page 1077: ... the line weight color and pattern of the end segments of the grid line For End Segments Length enter the length of the segments in paper space to display on each end of the grid line Use the other parameters to indicate which grid bubble to use and where it should display See Grid Type Properties on page 1040 5 Click OK twice Revit Architecture updates all grid lines of this type in all views Gri...

Page 1078: ...he end segments End Segment Color The line style to use for a continuous grid line or if Center Segment is None or Custom the line style for the end segments End Segment Pattern If the Center Segment parameter is None or Custom the length of the end segments in paper space End Segments Length In a plan view the default setting to display a bubble at the start point of a grid line That is when you ...

Page 1079: ...ign option in which the grid lines display Read only Design Option Extent The scope box applied to the grid See Controlling Visibility of Datums Using Scope Boxes on page 1053 Scope Box Levels Use the Level command to define a vertical height or story within a building You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building for example first floor top of wall or bottom of...

Page 1080: ...oose to create only the view types that you specify in the Plan View Types dialog If you clear Make Plan View the level is considered to be a non story level or a reference level no associated plan view is created Walls and other level based elements can use reference levels as their top or base constraint As you draw level lines the heads and tails of the lines can align to one another When you s...

Page 1081: ...ing Levels You can move level lines in the following ways Select a level line A temporary dimension displays between that level line and any level lines immediately above and below Selected level line shown in red with temporary dimensions above and below it To move the selected level up or down click the temporary dimension type a new value and press ENTER Drag the selected level line up or down ...

Page 1082: ... line style You cannot change this style As you drag a control the cursor snaps at points similar to neighboring level lines the cursor also snaps as the segments form straight lines Level Properties Parameter names values and descriptions for levels Most values are modifiable Modifying Level Properties 1 In a project view select a level line and click 2 In the Element Properties dialog edit insta...

Page 1083: ...he line style of level lines The line pattern can be solid or a combination of dashes and dots You can choose from a list of values defined in Revit Architecture or define your own line pattern Line Pattern Determines whether the head of a level line displays a level number in a bubble Level Head Circle a level number but no bubble Level Head No Bubble or no level number none Symbol Places a bubbl...

Page 1084: ...ference planes to use as a guideline in your design Reference planes are an integral part of family creation See Family Editor Basics on page 341 Reference planes appear in each new plan view that you create for a project See Datum Extents and Visibility on page 1048 Adding Reference Planes 1 Click Drafting menu Ref Plane or on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Ref Plane 2 Place the cursor ...

Page 1085: ...ide in View Category To redisplay the hidden annotation lines see Revealing and Unhiding Hidden Elements on page 160 Reference Plane Properties Parameter names and descriptions for reference planes To modify reference plane properties select a reference plane and click Reference Plane Instance Properties Description Name Construction Wall Closure Identity Data The name of the reference plane Name ...

Page 1086: ...the cursor rests on the object you are placing For example as you place a rectangular column the cursor rests at the centerline of the column shape Defines Origin Datum Extents andVisibility Datum planes such as those for levels grids and reference planes are not visible in all views If the datum does not intersect a view s plane or does not intersect the plane in the correct way then it will not ...

Page 1087: ...ane but not its model extent as the next figure shows The open circle in the figure shows the 3D model extent which is not intersecting the section The filled circle is showing the 2D extent which has intersected the section As a result Level 3 will not display in the section view Visibility of Non Perpendicular Datums inViews If a datum element such as a reference plane is not perpendicular to a ...

Page 1088: ...s such as floor plans and ceiling plans you can define grid lines that are arcs rather than straight lines Arc grid lines will appear in section views where the center of the arc intersects and is perpendicular to the section line For example the following floor plan shows 2 arc grid lines Grid Line 2 intersects the section line but its center is not perpendicular to the section line As a result G...

Page 1089: ...also have the 3D model extent control NOTE When you select a datum it is selected in all views in which it is visible Model extent control Resize datum in all views 2 Drag the hollow circle 3D control at either end of the datum to the desired location Resize datum in a specific view only 3 Click the 3D control It changes to display 2D and the control changes from an open circle to a filled circle ...

Page 1090: ...3D control the 2D control becomes a 3D control Maximizing 3D Model Extents A datum may be of a certain size such that it is not visible in all views of the model You can change the 3D model extents to intersect the boundary of the model so that the datum will be visible in more views In the following example the grid is not visible in the 2 section views of the model because its 3D model extents d...

Page 1091: ...ay in all plan views of the model However you may want the grid lines to display in only certain views This is exactly what a scope box is for to specify the views in which the datum elements will display Scope boxes control the visibility of datum elements in views whose cutting plane intersects the scope box Scope boxes are particularly useful to control the visibility of datums that are not par...

Page 1092: ...fy a height for the scope box if desired TIP You can also change the name of the scope box after creating it Select the scope box click and enter a value for the Name property 3 To draw a scope box click in the upper left hand corner to start the box Click in the lower right hand corner to finish it The following floor plan shows 2 scope boxes one around the main building and another around the av...

Page 1093: ...ox For example for a project with 2 scope boxes named Scope Box 1 and Scope Box 2 select Scope Box 1 from the drop down list 3 Click OK The datum now displays only in views whose cutting plane intersects the selected scope box If a view s cutting plane lies outside the scope the associated datum does not appear in the view For example in the following illustration the top view shows scope boxes ar...

Page 1094: ... moves with it Dragged scope box moves level lines associated with it To revert the extents of a level datum back to its default select the level right click and click Reset to 3D Extents The model 3D extent cannot be moved from the edge of a scope box to which it is assigned but the 2D extent can be modified in a view This command returns the extent to the default position slightly offset to the ...

Page 1095: ...he scope box the scope box is not visible in that view Consequently any datums associated with that scope box do not display in that view For example suppose a building has 8 floors You resize the scope box so that its top boundary extent is at Level 4 As a result the scope box and associated datums will not display in the plan views for Levels 5 through 8 Conversely if you resize the scope box to...

Page 1096: ...more scope boxes display Right click any scope box and click Override Graphics in View By Category The Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog displays the Annotation Categories tab with Scope Boxes highlighted Clear Scope Boxes and click OK All scope boxes are no longer visible in the view To redisplay hidden scope boxes see Revealing and Unhiding Hidden Elements on page 160 Keynotes A keynote param...

Page 1097: ...chitecture expects to find the keynote file in this new folder location as well At Library Locations Finds the keynote file where the stand alone installation or network deployment specified Numbering Method By keynote Determines the keynote value by the value stored in the keynote parameter or selected from the keynote table This value displays in the keynote as well as filling in the keynote par...

Page 1098: ...l already has a value entered for the parameter keynote it appears in the tag automatically If it does not the Keynotes dialog opens where you can select the keynote value To add or create your own keynote data see Adding Additional Categories on page 1063 Keynote PlacementTips In order for Revit Architecture to keynote a material the element must be visible in the view and the material must be di...

Page 1099: ...gned a keynote value the objects that use these materials inherit the keynote value accordingly A great deal of time can be saved if the materials of a project have their keynote values applied before you apply keynote tags to materials Assigning KeynoteValues to Elements All elements have a Keynote Type parameter These can be supplied in advance using the Element Properties dialog see Element Pro...

Page 1100: ...log click the Filter by Sheet check box Filtering Keynotes by CSI Heading To filter keynotes scheduled to one main category of keynotes 1 Open the keynote legend from the Schedules Quantities category in the Project Browser 2 Right click the view and click View Properties 3 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit for the filter parameter 4 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog for Filter By ...

Page 1101: ... Value parent value 11060 tab Theater and Stage Equipment tab 11000 11061 tab Acoustical Shells tab 11000 For sub categories of sub categories 11060 A1 tab Counter Weight Rigging tab 11060 Sample User KeynoteText File For User Keynotes you can place them in front of the CSI structure by using the following format Main Heading Parent Category 00000 tab Division 00 User Notes Sub Category Heading Ch...

Page 1102: ...nd of the leader is free to be relocated to another location and not connected to just the boundary of an element Therefore when placing a keynote you can select the leader option Free End or Attached End Material tags are assigned Free End and cannot be assigned Attached End A material keynote tag s leader end identifies the material as you move it over different materials The keynote value autom...

Page 1103: ...ced in the project For example if the label is set to display element type name the tag displays the type name of each tagged element Some parameters such as type name are automatically updated by Revit Architecture while other parameters such as comments are user defined Editing the Label of a PlacedTag Tags are edited in the Family Editor Select the tag and click Edit on the Options Bar or right...

Page 1104: ...tag to have a leader line on the Options Bar select Leader If the tag has multiple leader options enter a value for Number of Leaders 3 If desired enter a value for the length of the leader in the text box next to the Leader check box 4 To set the orientation of the tag select Vertical or Horizontal on the Options Bar After you place the tag you can change its orientation by selecting the tag and ...

Page 1105: ... view do not have tags you can apply tags to untagged elements in one operation The Tag All Not Tagged tool applies to many types of elements such as doors windows detail items and masses It also applies to rooms and areas Some elements such as walls must be tagged separately This function can be useful for example when you place and tag rooms in a floor plan view and you want to see tags for the ...

Page 1106: ... selecting multiple tag categories you can tag different types of elements such as detail items and generic models in one operation To select multiple categories while pressing SHIFT or CTRL select the desired categories 6 To attach a leader to each tag do the following Under Leader select Create For Length enter a default leader length 7 For Orientation select Horizontal or Vertical 8 Click OK NO...

Page 1107: ... You can move the end of the leader to a new material and the new material will display in the material tag NOTE You can highlight the material before you select it by moving the mouse over the material The material must be displayed by setting the detail level to medium or fine If the material is not visible the tag will not display properly ModifyingTags You can modify the appearance of tags thr...

Page 1108: ...the Room Number parameter To create sequential room number tags 1 Place a room 2 Click Modify select the room not the room tag and click Alternatively you can right click the room and click Element Properties To select the room move the cursor near the center of the room until a large X appears This X indicates the room boundaries When you click the X the room is highlighted in transparent blue in...

Page 1109: ...xample you place a French door and then a single flush door into a plan view The French door is number 1 the single flush door is number 2 Symbols A symbol is a graphic representation of an annotation element or other object Symbols are sometimes referred to as tags For example the following symbol legend identifies the annotation symbols that are used in a set of construction documents Revit Arch...

Page 1110: ...ols Annotation Symbols An annotation symbol is a tag or symbol applied to a family to uniquely identify that family in a project The tag can also include properties that appear on schedules See Creating a Schedule or Quantity on page 125 You create annotation symbols by selecting the family category with which you want to associate the symbol sketching the symbol and applying values to its propert...

Page 1111: ...u can add a new parameter If you select a numerical or dimension value you can specify the formatting of the value 11 Click OK 12 To modify the placement of the label select Modify select the label and drag it to the new location Specify sample text 13 Select the label and on the Options Bar click the Properties button 14 In the Element Properties dialog under Other enter a value for Sample Text a...

Page 1112: ...idth Ratio 1 x A smaller value increases the bulge while a larger value decreases it Detailing Revit Architecture is a building information modeler You construct a project as a digital representation of the physical objects in the real world However not every component needs to be modeled in 3D Architects create standard details to represent how materials in the larger project are constructed Deta...

Page 1113: ... intersection This same callout can appear as a section view with annotations within the overall building section view For annotations to display in the overall building section view you must select the Intersecting Views option for the Show In instance parameter You set this parameter in the Element Properties dialog Right click the detail view in the Project Browser and click Properties to open ...

Page 1114: ...display as half tones allowing you to visually see the difference between the model geometry and added detail components Sample callout with half toned roof ceiling and wall for background 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar click Detail Lines 9 Sketch along lines of the underlay elements or use them as part of your detail As you sketch lines the cursor snaps to the model geometry in that view...

Page 1115: ...rence detail DetailView Instance Properties This table lists parameters specific to detail views Description Name Indicates whether the detail view tag displays in intersecting views or just the parent view If you create a detail view as a callout then the callout appears as a section in intersecting views Show in Depending on the value of this parameter the detail view tag does not display in any...

Page 1116: ...o a particular area of the building information model NOTE The Reference Other View option appears when you activate the section or callout view creation command Before defining the callout or section select this option and select the view to reference See Creating a Detail View on page 1075 The View Name instance parameter in the Element Properties dialog shows the name of the view or if the deta...

Page 1117: ... may want to create detail conditions where the model is not needed for example a carpet transition detail which shows where carpet switches to tile or roof drain details not based on a callout on the roof You create this unassociated view specific detail in a drafting view The drafting view is not associated with the model In a drafting view you create details at differing view scales coarse medi...

Page 1118: ...ct Custom enter a value for Scale value 1 3 Click OK The drafting view opens in the drawing area 4 In the Project Browser expand Drafting Views to see the newly created drafting view listed 5 To create the drafting view use the detailing tools on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar The detailing tools include Detail Lines Insulation Masking Region Filled Region Text Symbol and Dimension See Detaili...

Page 1119: ... this view on a sheet if desired 8 Reference to this view when placing a callout or section if desired Sample of an Imported DraftingView The following image shows a sample of imported CAD detail to a drafting view DraftingView Display and Filled Regions The behavior of filled regions changes in drafting views depending on the display setting By default drafting views display in hidden line See Hi...

Page 1120: ...s drafting view View tags and annotations will display correctly Saving DraftingViews to an External Project Use the following procedure to save drafting views to an external Revit Architecture project for use in another Revit Architecture project You can also use this procedure to save sheet views and schedule views to an external project For information on sheet views and schedule views see Shee...

Page 1121: ...ail component in the detail view You can add additional detail components by loading them from the family library or you can create or edit existing ones in the Family Editor Revit Architecture contains over 500 Detail Component Families They are organized by the 16 CSI Construction Specifications Institute divisions Detail components can be tagged using detail item tags To load tags into the proj...

Page 1122: ...wood along the length of the drawn line at 1 2 If you wanted to adjust the thickness of the plywood you would first have to edit the 2D detail component Before reading this topic familiarize yourself with families by reading Family Editor Basics on page 341 and Creating a New Family on page 349 Following is the general procedure for creating a 2D line based detail component family Your steps may d...

Page 1123: ...gth of the path such that the spacing is equal to the width of the component Fixed Distance indicates that the detail component is spaced at the exact value specified for the Spacing parameter starting from the beginning of the path See the description for Spacing below Fixed Number indicates that a defined number of detail components are placed along the path while the spacing is adjusted to main...

Page 1124: ...onents might be actual construction components such as structural steel jambs or metal studs See Creating a Detail Component Family on page 1083 Symbols Place a symbol such as a direction arrow or a break mark symbol to indicate omitted information See Symbols on page 1071 Masking Region Create masking regions to obscure elements in a view See Masking Regions on page 1087 Filled Region Create deta...

Page 1125: ...n placed in a view You can create 2D and 3D masking regions 2D masking regions can be created in a project and in the Family Editor when you are creating a 2D family annotation detail or titleblock 3D masking regions can be created in the Family Editor when you are creating a model family Masking regions do not participate in shading they are always drawn the background color of the drawing area M...

Page 1126: ...ation on sketching see Sketching on page 251 6 When finished click Finish Sketch The following is a sample detail family with a masking region applied You can view this detail family by opening the Nominal Cut Lumber Section family in the following directory Imperial or Metric Library Detail Components Div 06 Wood and Plastic 06100 Rough Carpentry 06110 Wood Framing After you add a masking region ...

Page 1127: ...reference level In the first image the Draw in Foreground parameter is selected for both the table and the chair The chair masks the table because the chair back is higher than the table In the second image the Draw in Foreground parameter is cleared for the chair so that the masking region is drawn where it was sketched The Draw in Foreground parameter is still selected for the table Therefore th...

Page 1128: ...rder to accomplish the goal clear the Draw in Foreground parameter for the counter top family and select the Drawn in Foreground parameter for the cabinet family NOTE You can change the work plane of a masking region after you sketch it For more information see Changing the Work Plane of an Element on page 268 Adding a Masking Region to a 2D Element in a Model Family If you create a model family t...

Page 1129: ...sking region or regions Masking region sketches must be closed loops For more information on sketching see Sketching on page 251 IMPORTANT If your model family only contains 2D elements for example a 2D toilet fixture and you want to apply a masking region to the 2D element you must include an invisible line to represent the Z dimension which is where the masking region is drawn The invisible line...

Page 1130: ...ing regions as necessary 12 When finished click File menu Save to save the family 13 If you need to load the family into a project on the Design Bar click Load into Projects If you have only one project open the family loads into that project If you have multiple projects open the Load into Projects dialog opens where you can select the projects to load the family into When you load the family int...

Page 1131: ...a Comments for the masking region Comments Filled Region The Filled Region command creates a 2 dimensional view specific graphic with a boundary line style and fill pattern within the closed boundary The filled region is parallel to the view s sketch plane The command is useful for defining a filled area in a detail view or for adding a filled region to an annotation family Filled regions contain ...

Page 1132: ... the Element Properties dialog view the Area instance parameter The area value is the area of the region s closed perimeter loop less the area of any closed loops within the perimeter The area property is reported in the project units for example square meters or square feet The area property is read only and cannot be scheduled or tagged Fill Pattern Category A filled region created for a detail ...

Page 1133: ...g it at the bottom of the pile You can also send the detail component back one step at a time Think of this as taking the top piece paper and placing it behind the next piece of paper in the stack Of course you can do the reverse as well You can bring the detail to the top of the stack or bring it forward one step at a time NOTE Detail components always appear on top of model geometry You cannot s...

Page 1134: ... families and for raster images To specify element draw order 1 Place or select an element The following commands become available on the Options Bar Bring to Front Immediately places the detail component in front of all detail components in the view Send to Back Immediately places the detail component behind all detail components in the view Bring Forward Moves the detail component one step close...

Page 1135: ...n enter a file name and click Save To save several views from the project click File menu Save to Library Save Views In the Save Views dialog select the views to save and click OK Navigate to the desired location enter a file name and click Save For more information see Reusing Details From Callouts on page 1078 and Reusing Drafting Views on page 1082 SavingViews 1097 ...

Page 1136: ...1098 ...

Page 1137: ...us effects and content such as lighting plants decals and people As an alternative you can export a 3D view and use another software application to render the image See Exporting to 3ds Max on page 1297 Rendering Workflow In Revit Architecture the process of rendering a 3D view is as follows The first 4 steps can be performed in any order 1 Create a 3D view of the building model See 3D Views on pa...

Page 1138: ...ddress lighting needs and plan the visual impact of lights You can define lighting fixtures and their light sources placing them in the building model for best effect When you render a 3D view you can specify whether the artificial lights natural light or both will display in the rendered image Related topic Defining the Sunlight Source for Shadows on page 204 Lights Overview Lighting is an import...

Page 1139: ... families for wall lights ceiling lights table lamps floor lamps exterior lighting and other types of lighting fixtures You can use the Family Editor to design your own lighting fixtures You can also download additional lighting fixture families from the Revit Web Content Library and other sources Related topics Creating and Modifying Lighting Fixtures on page 1105 Using Lighting Fixtures in a Bui...

Page 1140: ... page 1106 Defining a Light Source on page 1116 Controlling the Brightness of a Light Source on page 1133 Adjust Light Sources Before Rendering on page 1104 Displaying Light Sources in a View on page 1129 Photometrics and IES Files In Revit Architecture photometrics are parameters for creating realistic lighting fixture families Photometrics help to define the visible light that displays in a rend...

Page 1141: ...otometric properties for a lighting fixture set the light distribution to Photometric Web and use the manufacturer s IES file on page 1102 if one is available Because an IES file provides a more accurate representation of the light source you get better results in a rendered image To obtain an IES file go to the web site of the lighting manufacturer and search for ies Locate the IES file for the d...

Page 1142: ...f lighting on the building model For example suppose you want to evenly illuminate the facade of a building After placing lighting fixtures you want to make sure that the lights provide the desired result However the rendering process can be resource intensive Before rendering therefore do as much as possible to plan the placement of lighting fixtures for maximum effect In Revit Architecture you c...

Page 1143: ... use the Family Editor Related topics Lighting Fixtures on page 1101 Using Lighting Fixtures in a Building Model on page 1126 Creating Your Own Components Families on page 341 Creating a Lighting Fixture with One Light Source 1 Click File menu New Family 2 In the New Family Select Template File dialog select a light fixture template The names of all lighting fixture templates include the words Lig...

Page 1144: ... for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1119 7 Click OK 8 On the Design Bar click Load into Project to load the light fixture into the current project or save the fixture and exit the Family Editor Creating Lighting Fixtures with Multiple Light Sources To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources such as a chandelier or a set of track lights create a nested family The hos...

Page 1145: ...ight sources are listed as one item Not shared settings for individual light sources For ex For example for a chandelier the individual ample you can change the initial intensity candles cannot be listed individually grouped or totalled for the entire chandelier but not for its indi vidual candles To share a lighting fixture family 1 Open the lighting fixture family in the Family Editor 2 Click Se...

Page 1146: ... Turning on the light source allows you to specify photometric parameters for it c Select Shared Sharing the light source family ensures that a lighting fixture schedule can display information for individual lights and that you can adjust lighting parameters for individual lights See Sharing a Lighting Fixture Family on page 1107 d Click OK e Save the light source family 3 Create the host lightin...

Page 1147: ... source family the can lights into the host lighting fixture family the track See Editing a Family Within a Project or Nested Family on page 353 6 Place one or more instances of the light source family into the host lighting fixture family as follows a If needed open the host lighting fixture family in the Family Editor b On the Design Bar click Component c In the Type Selector select the light so...

Page 1148: ...ting a chandelier You can also use this procedure to create a lighting fixture family that has multiple light sources and for which you do not want to schedule the light sources or control their lighting parameters individually The specific steps required will vary depending on your needs and design intent To create a chandelier 1 Create the host chandelier family as follows a Create the geometry ...

Page 1149: ... create one candle light source as follows a Create geometry for the candle b Put the candle in the desired position on the chandelier and lock it in place c Define the geometry of the light source See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1117 d Define its parameters See Defining Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1118 e In the drawing area move the light source ...

Page 1150: ...urce on page 1117 Geometry of the light source for the chandelier candle d Define parameters for the light source See Defining Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1118 e Save the light source family In the following steps this family is referred to as the candle family 5 Load the candle family into the host chandelier family See Editing a Family Within a Project or Nested Fa...

Page 1151: ...See Linking Family Parameters on page 421 a In the host chandelier family select one of the candles from the candle family b Click Element Properties c In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New The Type Properties dialog displays a column with an equal sign in the column heading A gray button displays in this column for each type parameter that you can link to other parameters d Click the gr...

Page 1152: ...file for a light source is a 2 step process First in the light source definition you must specify Photometric Web for its light distribution To perform this step you edit the lighting fixture family Second you must specify the particular IES file to use You can perform this step when editing the lighting fixture family or when modifying type parameters for particular lighting fixture in a project ...

Page 1153: ...elect a lighting fixture in the project Right click and click Element Properties Click Edit New Click Duplicate specify a name for the new family type and click OK c In the list of type parameters scroll down to Photometrics d For Photometric Web File click in the Value column e Click Browse NOTE The Browse button displays after you click in the field f Navigate to the desired IES file select it a...

Page 1154: ...eters for the lighting fixture including photometrics on the Design Bar click Family Types Change the parameters and click OK See Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1119 3 To save changes to the lighting fixture click File menu Save 4 Load the lighting fixture into a project See Load into Projects on page 400 Defining a Light Source The light source is the part of a lightin...

Page 1155: ...for editing See Creating a Lighting Fixture with One Light Source on page 1105 or Modifying a Lighting Fixture Family on page 1115 2 In the drawing area select the light source In the Family Editor the light source is generally represented by a yellow outline or shape NOTE If the light source does not display in the Family Editor the light source is not turned on To turn it on click Settings Famil...

Page 1156: ...definition settings 7 Save changes to the lighting fixture family Defining Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources The parameters that you can define for a lighting fixture and its light source vary depending on the light source definition settings that you specify See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1117 NOTE In addition to defining these parameters for a lighting fixtu...

Page 1157: ...ar area Coefficient of Utilization default This value shows the percentage of lumens that reach the work plane after light is lost due to the fixture s efficiency at transmitting light the room proportions and the ability of room surfaces to reflect light If you select Calculate Coefficient of Utilization default this parameter is read only If you clear Calculate Coefficient of Utilization default...

Page 1158: ...bol lengths plan view Identity Data Keynote for the lighting fixture Enter text or click to select a standard keynote See Keynotes on page 1058 Keynote Model number or code assigned to the lighting fixture by the manu facturer or vendor Model Name of the manufacturer of the lighting fixture Manufacturer User defined comments or other information about this family type for the lighting fixture fami...

Page 1159: ...IES file on disk you must also update this parameter by navigating to the new version of the file The angle to tilt the light source to direct its light See Angles for Spotlights on page 1132 Enter a value between 0 and 160 This para Spot Tilt Angle meter is available when the Light distribution setting is Spot or Photo metric Web See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1117 The angle ...

Page 1160: ...hape of the light visible as a self lumin ous surface glow when the camera of the 3D view is aimed directly Emit Shape Visible in Rendering at the light source This parameter is available when the Emit from Shape setting is Rectangle or Circle See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1117 In addition to setting this parameter when defining render settings you must select the Soft Shadow...

Page 1161: ...e sliders for each parameter or enter a value in the text box See Light Loss Factor Parameters on page 1123 c Click OK The Family Types dialog displays the new Light Loss Factor value 7 Click OK 8 Save changes to the lighting fixture family Light Loss Factor Parameters When you turn on a lighting fixture light travels through the light source lamp or ballast and the lighting fixture such as a lamp...

Page 1162: ...t produces decreasing amounts of light on a predictable curve A typical strategy is to use an average Lamp Lumen Depreciation Lamp Lumen Deprecation LLD value at 40 of its life Valid values are between 0 and 1 For example a compact fluorescent has an LLD factor of 0 85 indicating an average output at 85 of its initial lumens losing an average of 15 over its life as the lamp ages A measure of the a...

Page 1163: ...5 while a 32 W fluorescent tube T8 is 60 Wattage The amount of light luminous flux measured in lumens produced by a light source as a ratio of the amount of energy consumed to produce it measured in watts Efficacy The quantity of light energy per unit of time arriving leaving or going through a surface The lumen lm is the unit of luminous flux in both the International System SI of units Luminous ...

Page 1164: ...itial Color parameter and click in its Value column 5 In the Initial Color dialog specify values for the parameters See Initial Color Parameters on page 1126 6 Click OK The Family Types dialog displays the new Initial Color value 7 Click OK 8 Save changes to the lighting fixture family Initial Color Parameters When defining the Initial Color for the light source of a lighting fixture define the pa...

Page 1165: ... the desired location 6 To exit the Component tool press ESC twice When placing the lighting fixture consider the following To see the light source symbol in a view in addition to the lighting fixture geometry make the light source visible See Displaying Light Sources in a View on page 1129 If you want to place a table lamp on an elevated surface such as a desk or table do so in a section view or ...

Page 1166: ... the drawing area select a reference plane that is near the wall and parallel to it If the lighting fixture family does not include a reference plane that is parallel to the wall add one See Adding Reference Planes on page 1046 c Right click the reference plane and click Element Properties d In the Element Properties dialog for Name enter a name for the reference plane wall plane for example 6 Add...

Page 1167: ...dialog change parameter values as desired The type parameters that are available vary depending on the lighting fixture family and how its family parameters are defined See Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1119 To specify an IES file for the light source see Specifying an IES File for a Light Source on page 1114 c Click OK 5 Click OK Displaying Light Sources in aView When...

Page 1168: ... of a spotlight to achieve the desired lighting effects To position a spotlight use its angle parameters and the Rotate tool To aim a spotlight 1 Add spotlights to the building model placing them in their approximate locations See Adding a Lighting Fixture to a Building Model on page 1127 2 Set up views as follows a Leave open or re open the view in which you added the lighting fixtures For this p...

Page 1169: ...otlight and click Element Properties b In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New c Click Duplicate to create a new type d Enter a name for the type and click OK e In the Type Properties dialog scroll down to locate the Spot Tilt Angle Spot Field Angle and Spot Beam Angle parameters f Enter the desired values for each parameter See Angles for Spotlights on page 1132 g Click OK twice h Check t...

Page 1170: ...htly for even illumination of the wall Angles for Spotlights When defining a spotlight you can specify the following angles Beam angle The angle at which light intensity reaches 50 of the peak intensity Enter a value between 0 and 160 degrees To make a spot that is small and bright enter a smaller value Field angle The angle at which light intensity reaches 10 of the peak intensity Enter a value b...

Page 1171: ...eate mood lighting in a rendered image Changing the Initial Intensity of a Light Source When you change the initial intensity of a light source the change affects all relevant project views 1 In a project view select a lighting fixture and click Element Properties 2 In the Element Properties dialog click Edit New 3 Click Duplicate to create a new type 4 Enter a name for the type and click OK 5 In ...

Page 1172: ...der settings See Defining Render Settings on page 1159 3 In the Rendering dialog under Lighting for Scheme select a setting that includes artificial lights 4 Click Artificial Lights 5 In the Artificial Lights dialog in the Dimming column enter dimming values for light groups or individual lighting fixtures Enter a value between 0 and 1 to indicate the relative amount of dimming A value of 1 means ...

Page 1173: ...ed off Central light is turned on task lights are turned off Light groups are available in all relevant areas of Revit Architecture However settings to dim or turn on or off light groups or individual lighting fixtures apply to individual 3D views only NOTE The number of lights in a 3D view to be rendered can significantly increase render time Use light groups to turn off unnecessary lights in the...

Page 1174: ...en a 3D view 2 Open the Rendering dialog See Opening the Rendering Dialog on page 1160 3 Under Lighting for Scheme select a setting that includes artificial lights 4 Click Artificial Lights Creating a Light Group 1 Open the Artificial Lights dialog See Opening the Artificial Lights Dialog on page 1136 2 Under Group Options click New 3 In the New Light Group dialog enter a name for the light group ...

Page 1175: ...ed light group and click OK In the Artificial Lights dialog the selected lighting fixture displays under the selected light group name 3 To remove an individual lighting fixture from a light group do the following a In the Artificial Lights dialog under Grouped Lights expand the light group name b Select the lighting fixture to remove from the group c Under Fixture Options click Remove from Group ...

Page 1176: ...del elements continue to display as halftone indicating that you cannot select them b Select each lighting fixture that you want to add to the group When you select a lighting fixture Revit Architecture displays it as green to indicate that it is being added to the group c If necessary you can open another project view click Add and select more lighting fixtures to add to the group 4 To remove lig...

Page 1177: ...lights in the rendered image You can also enter values in the Dimming column to dim individual lighting fixtures or entire light groups See Dimming Lights on page 1134 3 Click OK 4 To see the results render the image See Rendering an Image on page 1158 Renaming a Light Group 1 Open the Artificial Lights dialog See Opening the Artificial Lights Dialog on page 1136 2 In the Artificial Lights dialog ...

Page 1178: ...rage objects are defined in Revit families Revit Architecture provides a library of entourage families If you have additional entourage objects that you want to use in projects you can add them to existing families or create families for them In 2D and 3D views entourage is represented using simple line drawings as placeholders When you render a 3D view a photorealistic representation of the entou...

Page 1179: ...ted by a placeholder You cannot place people in elevation views or section views When you render a 3D view the people are displayed in detail Revit Architecture provides 2 RPC families for people RPC Male and RPC Female for metric systems M_RPC Male and M_RPC Female In each family types provide render appearances for different men and women For example when you load these RPC families into a proje...

Page 1180: ... Selector displays the following Select the desired RPC tree and then place it in a project In line and shaded views a placeholder represents the plant Revit Architecture offers autumn versions of many deciduous trees To control the size of a plant you can modify its type parameters in the family or in a project Cars andVehicles When you render a building and its surrounding site you may want to i...

Page 1181: ...n See Office Clutter Properties on page 1147 Creating an RPC Family Use the Family Editor to create a Revit family for entourage including people cars plants and office clutter In an RPC family you can specify an ArchVision RPC file to use for the render appearance NOTE To create a Revit family for entourage that will use a source other than an RPC file for the render appearance see Creating an En...

Page 1182: ...ility Settings dialog select the desired settings See Visibility and Detail Levels on page 360 d Click OK 6 Save the family 7 Load the family into a project Specifying a Render Appearance for an RPC Family An RPC family is a Revit entourage family created using the RPC Family rft or Metric RPC Family rft template files See Creating an RPC Family on page 1143 For these entourage objects use the fol...

Page 1183: ...hows a repeat image in the reflecting surface instead of a reversed mirror image See Cast Reflections on page 1148 Glass How much light passes through the windows of the vehicle Use the slider to specify less transparency left or more transparency right Transparency How much black is mixed in with the vehicle windows to tint them thus re ducing the visibility of interior details Use the slider to ...

Page 1184: ...nges based on the position of the Lock View camera If you use RPC Stills content in a walkthrough the plant seems to jump as the camera moves and the image is updated This property applies to RPC content in rendered walkthroughs only See Walkthrough Views on page 116 Furniture Properties Description Property Swivel Chair The following properties display for swivel chairs Rotation of the chair from...

Page 1185: ...ce for Storing Image Files on page 507 Screen File Name Picture Frame The following properties display for picture frames Whether the frame is oriented in portrait mode vertically Clear this option to orient the frame in landscape mode horizontally Portrait Whether the frame leans on a stand Clear this option if the frame hangs on a wall Stand Material for the frame Select a value from the list Fr...

Page 1186: ...x RPC content provides a specialized texture that is applied to a flat plane When the texture is applied to the opposite side of the plane unusual reflections can result The Cast Reflections property for RPC content produces a more realistic result When you turn on Cast Reflections the object includes a second plane that faces away from the camera This plane shows the image of the opposite side of...

Page 1187: ...y Parameters for Rendering Appearance Source select Third Party NOTE If you want to use the geometry that you create or import for a render appearance for Rendering Appearance Source select Family Geometry c Click OK d Specify the render appearance See Specifying a Render Appearance for an RPC Family on page 1144 7 Save the family 8 Load the family into a project Using the ArchVision Content Manag...

Page 1188: ...ender Appearance Paths add a path to indicate the location of the additional RPC files that you have downloaded from ArchVision To add a path click New navigate to the desired location and click OK If needed you can add multiple paths for RPC files 4 Under ArchVision Content Manager Location select Network 5 For Address specify the network address where the ACM resides You can enter a machine name...

Page 1189: ...ed RPC or entourage family files for example RPC female rfa or RPC Shrub rfa and click Open 3 Place a plant or entourage object in the drawing area as follows a On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar click Component b In the Type Selector select the desired family type c Click in the drawing area to place a plant or entourage object in the view d Move and rotate the object as needed To move the ob...

Page 1190: ...ce 4 If you want to change the height of the selected plant only do the following a Click Duplicate b Specify a name for the new plant type and click OK c In the Type Properties dialog for Height enter a value to indicate the new height of the plant d Click OK 3 times Decals Use the Decal tool to place images on surfaces of a building model for rendering For example you can use decals for signs pa...

Page 1191: ...ify the remaining attributes of the decal See Decal Attributes on page 1157 6 Click OK Now you can place instances of the decal type in the building model See Placing a Decal in a View on page 1153 Placing a Decal in aView 1 In a Revit Architecture project open a 2D view or a 3D orthographic view The view must contain a flat or cylindrical surface on which you can place decals You cannot place dec...

Page 1192: ...als of the same type To place a different decal select the desired decal in the Type Selector and then click the desired location on the building model 7 To exit the Decal tool click ESC twice 3D view showing placeholders for decals Modifying a Placed Decal 1 In a project view select the decal 2 To move the decal drag it to a new location 3 To resize the decal drag its blue grips or on the Options...

Page 1193: ...elete 3 Click Delete 4 To confirm that you want to delete the selected decal type click Yes at the prompt Sharing Decals Between Projects If you create several decals in one project you can use them in another project To do this click File menu Transfer Project Standards In the Select Items to Copy dialog select Decal Types See Transferring Project Standards on page 438 Make sure that the image fi...

Page 1194: ...o change the decal image and its attributes by clicking Settings menu Decal Types 5 Click OK Decal Instance Properties Description Parameter Dimensions Physical width of the decal Width Physical height of the decal Height Whether the ratio between the height and width is maintained Clear this option to change the Width or Height without also affecting the other dimension Lock Proportions Identity ...

Page 1195: ...Comments URL of the web site for the manufacturer or vendor URL Description of the decal Description Description of the selected assembly code read only Assembly Description Uniformat assembly code for the decal See Uniformat Assembly Codes on page 754 Assembly Code User specified identifier for this type of decal Type Mark Cost of the decal Cost Decal Attributes The following properties display i...

Page 1196: ...ied to the surface on which the decal is placed For example if you place a decal on a brick wall the texture of the brick wall affects the decal in addition to the decal texture specified here Relative amplitude of the bumps Enter 0 to make the surface flat Enter higher decimal values up to 1 0 to increase the depth of the surface irregularities Bump Amount Shapes cut into the surface of the decal...

Page 1197: ... Rendering dialog under Quality specify the render quality See Specifying the Render Quality on page 1162 4 Under Output specify the following Resolution To generate a rendered image for screen display select Screen To generate a rendered image for printing select Printer DPI When Resolution is Printer specify the DPI dots per inch to use when printing the image If the project uses metric units Re...

Page 1198: ...e on page 1168 These render settings are view specific They are saved as part of the view properties To apply these settings to other 3D views use a view template See View Templates for Render Settings on page 1171 When you finish defining render settings create the rendered image See Creating the Rendered Image on page 1168 Opening the Rendering Dialog 1 Open the 3D view to render You can render ...

Page 1199: ...he building model To define the view area to render use one or more of the following methods Crop region Open the 3D view and apply a crop region to define the area to render See Cropping a View on page 165 When you select the crop region the Options Bar displays the size of the cropped view Click Size to specify a height and width for the crop region Render region Open the Rendering dialog and cl...

Page 1200: ...inate the entire room affecting the rendered image and increasing render time See Render Performance and Lighting on page 1173 Specifying the Render Quality To present a design to clients you typically want a high quality rendered image However high quality rendered images can be slow to generate For testing purposes you may want to generate a draft quality image quickly Use the Quality Setting on...

Page 1201: ...ting select Edit The Render Quality Settings dialog displays 2 For Setting select the predefined setting to use as a starting point for your custom settings and click Copy to Custom 3 Under Advanced Render Settings specify the desired parameter values See Render Quality Settings on page 1163 4 Click OK 5 Continue to define other render settings Render Quality Settings Use the following parameters ...

Page 1202: ...ges or surfaces of objects in blurred reflections are speckled Enter a value between 1 speckled and 11 smoothest Blurred Reflections Precision Increase this value when the edges of objects seen through rough glass are speckled Enter a value between 1 speckled and 11 smoothest Blurred Refractions Precision Shadow Options Select this option to make shadow edges blurred Clear it to make shadow edges ...

Page 1203: ...s for indirect illumination Further bounces can add more subtle effects but they are often not significant Daylight Portal Options only applies to sunlit interiors These settings are available only for interior views that include daylight See Daylight Portals on page 1165 Whether the rendering engine calculates daylight portals for windows By default this setting is turned off Windows Whether the ...

Page 1204: ...endering a 3D view you can use the following techniques to control its print size in pixels and file size in bytes The width and height of the rendered image display on the Rendering dialog under Output Render part of the 3D view Use a render region a crop region or a section box See Defining the View Area to Render on page 1161 Zoom in or out When creating a rendered image for screen output you c...

Page 1205: ... lighting quality in interior views you can enable daylight portals if needed Daylight portals improve the quality of the rendered image but they can also increase render time By default daylight portals are turned off See Daylight Portals on page 1165 5 Continue to define other render settings Specifying the Background for a Rendered Image In the Rendering dialog use the Background settings to sp...

Page 1206: ...splays the rendered image in the drawing area You can then do the following Change render settings and render the image again See Defining Render Settings on page 1159 Adjust exposure settings See Adjusting the Exposure of a Rendered Image on page 1168 Save the rendered image as a project view See Saving the Rendered Image as a Project View on page 1170 Export the rendered image to a file See Expo...

Page 1207: ...matic exposure Enter a value between 6 brighter and 16 darker The default value is different for each lighting scheme Exposure Value Light level for the brightest areas of the image Enter a value between 0 darker highlights and 1 brighter highlights The default is 0 25 Highlights Light level for areas of the image whose brightness lies between the highlights and the shadows Enter a value between 0...

Page 1208: ... results If you export to PNG and open the file in Adobe Photoshop the background sky and clouds may not display To export the rendered image 1 In the Rendering dialog under Image click Export 2 In the Save Image dialog for Save In navigate to the desired location 3 For Files of type select a file type 4 For File name enter a name for the image file 5 Click Save Changing Render Settings for aView ...

Page 1209: ... it to other 3D views For more information about view templates see View Templates on page 498 To create a view template for render settings 1 In a 3D view define the render settings as desired See Defining Render Settings on page 1159 2 In the Project Browser right click the 3D view name and click Create View Template from View 3 In the New View Template dialog enter a name and click OK The View ...

Page 1210: ...ether you need a high quality image or a draft quality image In general start by rendering a draft quality image to see the results of the initial settings Then refine materials lights and other settings to improve the image As you get closer to the desired result you can use the low or medium quality setting to produce a more realistic image Use the high quality setting to produce a final image o...

Page 1211: ...ndering process involves the simulation of light interactions with materials As a result render performance is significantly affected by lighting calculations When preparing to render an image consider the following Number of lights Render time is directly proportional to the number of lights in the scene In general mental ray requires more time to render more lights Consider turning off lights th...

Page 1212: ... being simulated In fact complicated render appearances for materials can slow down the rendering process more than complicated geometry in the building model When preparing to render an image consider the following How Colors and Patterns Affect Render Performance The complexity and size of a color or pattern affect render speed More complex patterns require the rendering engine to calculate more...

Page 1213: ...ns increase render time further In the Render Quality Settings dialog use the Reflections and Transparency options See Render Quality Settings on page 1163 Render Performance and Image Size Quality The image size or resolution of a rendered image has a predictable effect on render time The Image Precision Antialiasing setting affects render time in a similar way See Render Quality Settings on page...

Page 1214: ...l ray cannot locate files used in render appearances including decals it continues the rendering process and it renders that part of the view as black Click Cancel if you want to cancel the rendering process instead of proceeding For example if an image file that defines a custom color or texture is missing elements to which that material is applied display as black in the rendered image Likewise ...

Page 1215: ...e It also provides recommendations and tips on how to balance the need for a quality image with the amount of time required to render it Rendered Image Is Black Symptom All or part of the rendered image is black Issues and Solutions If parts of the rendered image are black some image files used by render appearances or decals may be missing See Missing Images on page 1176 If the rendered image is ...

Page 1216: ...d Image Symptom In the rendered image some of the elements display as gray They do not display render appearances as expected Issue This problem occurs when you upgrade a Revit 2008 or an earlier release project that uses custom materials During the upgrade process Revit Architecture upgrades all standard materials to use the new render appearances However it cannot upgrade any custom materials So...

Page 1217: ...family you specified an Emit from Shape of Circle or Rectangle See Defining the Geometry of a Light Source on page 1117 In the lighting fixture parameters you selected Emit Shape Visible in Rendering See Parameters for Lighting Fixtures and Light Sources on page 1119 Therefore you expect the light to display a self luminous surface in the rendered image However the luminous surface does not displa...

Page 1218: ...View Properties TIP You can also right click in the drawing area and click View Properties to access the Element Properties dialog 3 In the Element Properties dialog under Graphics select True North for Orientation and click OK 4 Click Tools menu Project Position Orientation Rotate True North 5 On the Options Bar for Angle from Project to True North enter a value to set the angle of rotation For e...

Page 1219: ...er a descriptive name and click OK 7 Specify settings for the solar study For a still study see Specifying Settings for a Still Solar Study on page 1181 For a single day study see Specifying Settings for a Single Day Solar Study on page 1183 For a multi day study see Specifying Settings for a Multi Day Solar Study on page 1184 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog select Use Sun Positio...

Page 1220: ... displays for City When you click OK the value for Place in the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog is User Defined d If you want Revit Architecture to calculate whether to use daylight savings time select Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings changes e Click OK 3 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog enter a date and time for the solar study 4 To specify the level to be used for shadow dis...

Page 1221: ... from 7 00 AM to 7 00 PM on June 22 Changing the place allows you to set up solar studies for the same building model in different locations For example if the same retail store will be constructed in Los Angeles and London change the Place setting at the project level and then export a solar study for each city location Use this procedure after performing the initial steps to create the study To ...

Page 1222: ...etting at the project level and then export a solar study for each city location Use this procedure after performing the initial steps to create the study To create a multi day solar study 1 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog click the Multi Day tab 2 Select a solar study from the list or select the default Multi Day Solar Study User Defined 3 To change the place do the following a For Place c...

Page 1223: ...un and Shadows Settings click 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog on the Single Day or Multi Day tab select the solar study and click OK 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog click OK 6 On the View Control Bar click Shadows On and click Preview Solar Study 7 To play the animation from start to finish on the Options Bar click Play 8 To stop the animation on the status bar click Canc...

Page 1224: ...xcept those occluded by surfaces Shading This option displays the image with all surfaces shaded according to their material settings and project light locations Shading with Edges This option displays the image in shaded mode but with all non occluded edges drawn as well Rendering This option uses defined render settings to create a photorealistic image for each frame in the solar study 7 Enter d...

Page 1225: ... The animation plays while the AVI file is being saved NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size Typically the AVI file can be played from within the ZIP file Exporting a Solar Study 1187 ...

Page 1226: ...1188 ...

Page 1227: ... different members assigned to work on specific functional areas such as the interior layout the exterior shell and the furniture layout 2 Enable worksharing When you enable worksharing Revit Architecture creates the central file for the project The central file is like the project database It stores all changes made to the project and stores all current workset and element ownership information I...

Page 1228: ...are added The active workset name displays on the Workset toolbar active workset Allows you to edit an element that is in a workset you do not own If no one owns the workset permission to borrow is element borrowing automatically granted If another team member is currently editing the workset that team member is the owner of the workset and you must place a request to borrow the element from that ...

Page 1229: ...elected by default and cannot be changed 10 In the Save As dialog click Save The file is now the central file for the project Revit Architecture creates the file in the directory you specified and creates a backup folder for the file For example if your central file is called OfficeBuilding_CentralFile you see the Revit project file and the backup folder OfficeBuilding_CentralFile_backup in the di...

Page 1230: ...e workset name also displays on the Worksets toolbar Gray Inactive Workset Graphics displays all elements in the drawing area that are not part of the active workset as gray This has no effect on printing Name indicates the name of the workset You can rename all user created worksets Editable indicates the editable status of a workset You cannot change editable status until you save to central Own...

Page 1231: ...r created worksets Shared Levels and Grids Contains all existing levels grids and reference planes You can rename this workset Workset1 Contains all existing model elements in the project When you create worksets you can reassign elements from Workset1 into the appropriate workset You can rename this workset but you cannot delete it Families Each family that is loaded in the project is assigned to...

Page 1232: ...ot visible by default This visibility control eliminates the time required to draw additional views of the project To identify visibility requirements determine the frequency with which the elements in the workset display in the project Under this guideline you might have an exterior workset visible by default while a specific furniture workset would not be Groups and families Groups and families ...

Page 1233: ...a Workset 1 If the Worksets toolbar is not already open right click on the toolbar and click Worksets 2 On the Worksets toolbar select a workset to make it the active workset NOTE You can select a non editable workset as the active workset If you place an element in a non editable workset the element becomes non editable after you save to central If you add view specific elements such as detail li...

Page 1234: ...elect the name of the workset you want to rename and click Rename 3 In the Rename dialog enter a new name 4 Click OK twice Deleting Worksets NOTE You must be the owner of the workset to delete it 1 Click File menu Worksets 2 In the Worksets dialog select the name of the workset you want to delete and click Delete The Delete option is not available if another user is editing the workset 3 In the De...

Page 1235: ... to a network to make your changes or to open or edit worksets This is useful for team members who work offsite and access the central file remotely WARNING Working offline can put your project at risk See Working Offsite and Offline on page 1207 Creating a Local Copy of the Central File It is generally recommended that you create a local copy of the central file every day 1 Open the central file ...

Page 1236: ...n the drawing area 2 Click Make element editable or right click the element and click Make Elements Editable If no one else is editing the element it opens for you to edit If another team member is editing the element or has ownership of the workset to which the element belongs a message displays indicating that you cannot edit the element until the other team member the owner relinquishes it NOTE...

Page 1237: ...the user name of the person submitting the request You can expand the request to see the element name To view the element select it from the list and if the element is not visible in the current view click Show NOTE If you have modified the requested element and you have not saved your changes to central an asterisk appears next to the request 4 Click Grant or if you do not want the other user to ...

Page 1238: ...red Elements If another user changes an element and saves it back to central that element in your local file is outdated It cannot be edited even if you borrow it until you reload latest or save to central Using Worksets When you work on a workshared project you specify an active workset Each new model element you add to the project is then contained in the active workset View specific elements su...

Page 1239: ... previous Revit Architecture session Only worksets open in the last session open If you are opening the file for the first time all worksets open Specify opens specified worksets When you click Open the Opening Worksets dialog displays and you select the worksets to open Press CTRL A to select all worksets in this dialog 4 Click Open To open worksets from the Worksets dialog 1 Open your local copy...

Page 1240: ...g area and click Edit menu Make Worksets Editable To make project view worksets editable from the Project Browser In the Project Browser right click a project view and click Make Workset Editable To make a sheet view workset editable In the Project Browser right click a sheet view and click Make Workset Editable With All Views The sheet view workset and all the project view worksets that are on th...

Page 1241: ...ements from Selection When you select elements in the drawing area you can filter any that are non editable This option is not selected by default 1 On the Design Bar click Modify 2 On the Options Bar select Editable Only 3 In the drawing area make your selection Controlling WorksetVisibility 1 Click View menu Visibility Graphics 2 Click the Worksets tab 3 Clear any worksets you do not want to dis...

Page 1242: ... 69 You can automatically save your local file when you save to central You can specify save reminders for saving local files and saving to central For more information see Setting Save Reminders on page 70 Saving to Central 1 In the local project file click File menu Save to Central The Save to Central dialog displays Alternatively click Save to Central on the toolbar to skip the dialog and use d...

Page 1243: ... Your changes are saved to the central file and any changes from other team members are loaded into your local file NOTE If you have saved all changes to central but still have editable elements when you close your local file a Suggest Relinquish dialog displays Click Relinquish Save to relinquish all checked out worksets and borrowed elements and to save your local file Closing a Workshared File ...

Page 1244: ...s for which you have editing permissions 1 With either a local file or the central file open click File menu Relinquish All Mine Revit Architecture checks for any changes that require a save to central If there are no changes the command relinquishes ownership of worksets and borrowed elements Skip the remaining steps in this procedure If there are changes ownership status does not change A dialog...

Page 1245: ...r name as the User Name See Options on page 504 2 Ask the colleague to open the central file check out all the worksets that you have at risk close the file and reset the User Name to their name It is not necessary to save the central file This procedure prevents other users from making the workset editable and changing the same elements If someone else has checked out that workset or has borrowed...

Page 1246: ...ior version as a new project file When you roll back a file all later versions in the backup directory are lost In addition you lose all information on workset ownership borrowed elements and workset editability You must coordinate with team members to reassign workset and element ownership Central File Backup Files and Folders The backup folder for the central file contains files that store infor...

Page 1247: ...e or a local copy of the central file was saved and who saved it The list also shows any comments entered in the Save to Central dialog 1 Click File menu Show History 2 In the Show History dialog navigate to the shared file select it and click Open 3 In the History dialog click the column headers to sort alphabetically or chronologically 4 If desired click Export to export the history table as del...

Page 1248: ... file even though the file may now be in a different location NOTE Moving or copying the file using Windows Explorer or DOS creates a local copy of the central file Revit Architecture still looks for the central file in its original location A central file is identified as having worksharing enabled and as residing in the central file location identified in the project To view or modify this locat...

Page 1249: ...tion you can prevent other team members from saving to this obsolete central file by deleting it or making it read only Worksharing Monitor The Worksharing Monitor is a utility that allows you to find out information about a workshared project Who is currently working on this project Is my local copy of the project up to date When will my Save to Central operation finish Has my request to borrow e...

Page 1250: ...1212 ...

Page 1251: ...models Linking Revit models is primarily intended for linking separate buildings such as those that compose a campus When you link a Revit model into a project Revit Architecture opens the linked model and keeps it in memory The more links a project contains the longer it can take to open Linked Revit models are listed in the Revit Links branch of the Project Browser You can convert linked Revit m...

Page 1252: ...hers will need to be in the host project Linking Revit Models that Contain Links When you import a Revit model that contains a linked Revit model links become nested You can show or hide nested linked models in the host model By default nested linked models are not visible in the host model When a nested link is visible you can use TAB to select nested link instances and view properties of element...

Page 1253: ...he Reference Type setting in their parent model Options are Overlay and Attachment Overlay does not load nested linked models therefore they do not display in the project and Attachment displays nested linked models The following image shows that Project A is linked into Project B so Project B is the parent link for Project A The Reference Type setting for Project B is Overlay therefore when Proje...

Page 1254: ... map in the properties of the linked model and then apply the phase map in the host model NOTE Phase maps must occur in chronological order For example a phase map cannot be set up like the following table Since phase 1 occurs before phase 3 phase 3 cannot be mapped to phase 1 Phase from linked file Phase Phase 1 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 2 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase mapping is always maintained unless pha...

Page 1255: ...load a link Displaying Linked Revit Model Data Display settings control how a linked model displays its data To view or change display settings for a linked model 1 Click the linked model in the drawing area 2 Click View menu Visibility Graphics 3 Click the Revit Links tab 4 View or override the Display Settings By Host View means that the host project s view settings determine how the linked mode...

Page 1256: ...e paste operation If you want to edit the pasted linked model click Edit Pasted Elements See Editing Pasted Elements on page 322 Copying Elements from a Linked Revit Model Elements from linked Revit models can be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into the host model To copy and paste elements from linked Revit models 1 In the drawing area move the cursor over the element in the linked model ...

Page 1257: ...s tab is also available if Design Options are used in the linked file 5 If you selected a linked model instance select the Override display settings for this instance check box 6 From the Basics tab select one of the following By Host View When you select this option you cannot override any visibility settings for the linked model because the host view governs its appearance When the primary linke...

Page 1258: ...ppearance of objects colors line weights and so on will be based on the settings in the Object Styles dialog from the host file or from the linked model Nested links Specify the visibility and graphics overrides settings that you want nested linked models to use For more information see Controlling Visibility and Graphic Override Settings for Nested Linked Revit Models on page 1220 For all other t...

Page 1259: ...egories in the nested link which also exist in the parent link By Linked View applies the visibility and graphic override settings specified in the top level nested linked model The top level nested linked model is the first nested linked model For example you have the host model a linked model the parent link and then a model that is linked into the parent link the nested link The nested link is ...

Page 1260: ...ines whether nested linked models are shown Attachment or hidden Overlay See Showing or Hiding Nested Linked Revit Models on page 1215 Reference Type Allows you to set up the phase map for the linked model See Phase Mapping Linked Revit Models on page 1216 Phase Mapping Linked Model Instance Properties Description Name Specifies the name of the linked model instance Names are automatically generat...

Page 1261: ...ved Path column displays the path of the central file and the Local Alias displays the path of the local copy of central file For more information on the central file and worksharing see Working in a Team on page 1189 Command Choices Click Save Locations to save the new location of a linked instance Click Save Markups DWF Markups tab only to save changes to imported markups For more information on...

Page 1262: ...204 Also you may want to create a workset exclusively for links so that workflow is not interrupted See Setting Up Worksets on page 1191 Multi Discipline Coordination Building projects that are worked on by teams of architects and structural engineers require a method for monitoring and coordinating changes between teams from the different disciplines The Copy Monitor tool accomplishes this task E...

Page 1263: ...pe Don t copy this Type the original type for example 1 4 Head or the new type for example No Head 8 If desired you can change the appearance of the element For levels you can offset the copy vertically from the original You can also add a suffix or prefix to its name For grids you can add a suffix or prefix to the copied grid For columns you can split columns into smaller ones at level lines For ...

Page 1264: ... Use Current Project or click Tools menu Copy Monitor Select Link or Use Current Project Revit Architecture enters Copy Monitor mode The Design Bar changes to a Copy Monitor tab 15 On the Design Bar click Monitor You establish relationships between pairs of corresponding elements For example you select one grid and then another grid to form a relationship You cannot monitor unlike pairs such as a ...

Page 1265: ... elements in the current project or click Tools menu Coordination Review Select Link to check warnings between the linked and the host projects The Coordination Review dialog displays If you are running a review on the current project click the In host project tab If you are running a review on a link and the host project and linked project are linked both the In host project tab and the In a link...

Page 1266: ...odel Typical Workflow for Interference Checking This tool can be used during the design process to coordinate major building elements and systems It can be used to prevent conflicts and reduce the risk of construction changes and cost overruns A common workflow might occur like this An architect meets with a client and creates a basic model The building model is sent to a team that includes member...

Page 1267: ...esired categories For example to complete a roof floor interference check select floors as the category 7 Click OK If there are no interferences to report a dialog displays informing you of this If there are interferences to report the Interference Report dialog displays The dialog lists all elements that are in conflict with one another Interferences are grouped according to the way you generated...

Page 1268: ... position is not relevant to other models or to a site However if you want the position of the model to be known to other linked models you need to share coordinates Shared coordinates are used for remembering the mutual positions of multiple interlinked files Those interlinked files can be all Revit files or a combination of Revit DWG and DXF files Recommended Uses for Shared Positioning If the s...

Page 1269: ...t and click Make Current 8 Click OK Repositioning Named Locations After you have set up a shared coordinate system between the host model and linked models the position of the linked instance is determined by the corresponding location in the linked model You can drag the linked instance to another position inside the host model When you do this you are actually changing the corresponding location...

Page 1270: ...y how to set the location of the linked instance Select Move Instance To and choose a location name The listed location names are from the linked model file When you click OK the linked instance moves to the recorded position for that named location Select Record Current Position As to record the current location of the linked model instance back to its file If you want to create a new location na...

Page 1271: ...roject The host project s True North and shared origin are recorded in the linked project based on the current location of the linked instance This location is now named in both the host project and the linked project More than one location of the link can be recorded When you publish shared coordinates from a host Revit Architecture project to a linked DWG this changes the linked DWG The origin o...

Page 1272: ... on page 1230 Relocating and Rotating a Project To see the results of relocating and rotating a project the host project must contain linked instances at shared locations The relocate and rotate functions will modify the position of all elements in the project and any import instances that are not linked In addition any linked instances that are not at shared locations move relative to all linked ...

Page 1273: ...e project was rotated and lists any errors that were encountered You can export errors to review and correct them For more information see Exporting Warnings to a File on page 1335 Relocating a Project by Entering Points You can relocate a project and rotate the project to True North by entering specific coordinates for North South East West and Elevation You can also set the angle between True No...

Page 1274: ... between elements are not supported as in the original orientation of the project This can lead to unexpected results and errors for example some elements may deviate from exact reflection After you mirror the project a message displays to indicate any errors encountered You can export errors to review and correct them For information on exporting errors see Exporting Warnings to a File on page 13...

Page 1275: ...used and simplified as a project progresses They are typically used as follows Changing the entry design Exploring different layouts for rooms or furniture Trying different window configurations Developing sustainable design alternatives You can use design options to explore multiple designs as the project develops At any time in the design process you can have multiple sets of design options Typi...

Page 1276: ...1238 Chapter 20 Design Options ...

Page 1277: ...gn options will appear in views only when you specify Edit the primary option to add elements to the design as desired See Editing a Design Option on page 1244 For an alternative approach see Viewing the Main Model Without Design Options on page 1253 5 Create secondary options for each design option set You can create one or more secondary options for each set See Adding Design Options on page 124...

Page 1278: ...ne or more design options in a set This button corresponds to Tools menu Design Options Add to Design Option Set Add to Design Option Set Displays a menu of options which allow you to select a design option for editing or to indicate that you are finished editing the active option This Choose a Design Option to Edit or Editing design button corresponds to Tools menu Design Options Pick to Edit and...

Page 1279: ...icating Views to Design Options on page 1252 Dedicated view Best Practices for Design Options When implementing design options consider the following strategies To prepare the main model for design options In the main model create as much of the model as possible before adding any design options Include elements that will be common to all design options Use design options for only those parts of t...

Page 1280: ...s from the specified design option You create schedules that are dedicated to design options in the same way that you create dedicated views See Dedicating Views to Design Options on page 1252 To incorporate a design option After a design option is selected for implementation incorporate it into the main model and delete all other options using the Accept Primary function See Incorporating a Desig...

Page 1281: ...e a Design Option to Edit Adding Design Options A design option is one possible solution for a particular design issue Each design option set contains one primary option and one or more secondary options When you create a set Revit Architecture also creates a primary option which you must edit to add its elements See Editing a Design Option on page 1244 Use the following procedure to add secondary...

Page 1282: ...ault See Viewing Design Options on page 1252 Working with Design Options The following topics describe how to modify and work with design options Editing a Design Option 1 In the Project Browser open a view where you can add the desired elements for the design option 2 Prepare the view to show the active design option a On the keyboard type VG for Visibility Graphics b On the Visibility Graphics d...

Page 1283: ...Design Options toolbar See Design Options Toolbar on page 1240 If it appears to be pressed instead of raised you are in Design Option Edit mode Changes that you make will affect the active option To determine which design option is currently active for editing move the mouse over the Editing button It displays a tooltip that indicates the active option using the following format Editing design opt...

Page 1284: ...ondary option For example If you sketch 4 walls in the main model and then sketch a roof in a secondary option you cannot attach the walls to the roof To add a door or window to a design option the host wall must also be part of the design option To add a skylight to a design option the host roof must also be part of the design option If main model elements need to reference and update with elemen...

Page 1285: ...ions tab c For the appropriate design option set in the Design Option column select Automatic d Click OK 3 On the Design Options toolbar click and select the design option in which the elements reside 4 In the drawing area select one or more elements and press CTRL X Cut See Selecting Elements in Design Options and the Main Model on page 1247 and Selecting Elements on page 269 5 Click to finish ed...

Page 1286: ...ly and type of the element If the element belongs to a design option they also indicate the design option set and the design option to which the element belongs using the following format design option set design option category family type If the element belongs to the main model the status bar and the tooltip do not show design option information Duplicating a Design Option Suppose you are creat...

Page 1287: ...ht click the view name and click Duplicate View Duplicate with Detailing This command creates a copy of the view including annotations and details Repeat this step to create a copy of the view for each design option 3 Dedicate each duplicate view to a different design option See Dedicating Views to Design Options on page 1252 4 Rename each duplicate view to indicate the design option that it displ...

Page 1288: ...tion settings on the Visibility Graphics dialog will be changed to Automatic for the related design option set NOTE If the Visible in Option parameter for a view specifies the unwanted design option you cannot clear its check box in the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog If you do not want to delete this view when deleting the design option cancel the delete operation Change the Visible in Optio...

Page 1289: ...ck OK Incorporating a Design Option into the Main Model After choosing a design option to implement you can incorporate it into the main model and delete other options that are no longer necessary NOTE Accepting the primary option deletes all secondary options and the design option set You can undo this action but you should be sure that you do not need any other options Consider making a backup c...

Page 1290: ...beams that are in the specified design option To create a dedicated view 1 Open a view that you want to dedicate to a design option By default the view displays the primary option with the main model 2 In the Project Browser right click the view name and do the following then If you want the duplicate view to click Duplicate View Duplicate include model elements only with no annotations or detaili...

Page 1291: ...s on page 968 Related topics View Tags in Dedicated Views for Design Options on page 1254 Deleting Views Associated with Design Options on page 1251 Viewing the Main Model Without Design Options If you want to be able to view the main model only with no design options create an empty design option and make it the primary option See Adding Design Options on page 1243 If you are using multiple desig...

Page 1292: ... in Option for the view tag is set to All The tag is visible in the view for all design options If you create a view while you are editing a design option the view tag s Visible in Option parameter is set to the active option If you change the value of Visible in Option the view tag is visible in views for the specified option only For example if you create an elevation to display a particular des...

Page 1293: ...erencing Elements in Design Options In Revit Architecture elements can reference each other in many ways including the following Explicit constraints such as locked alignments and dimensions guarantee that the defined relationships will be maintained Conflicts cause errors and must be resolved Looser constraints such as dimensions and alignments that are not locked are often maintained unless a co...

Page 1294: ... so you can add rooms to a design option As a general rule the perimeter area and volume of the room are defined by the room bounding elements available to that option These room bounding elements include elements in the main model elements in primary options of other option sets and elements in the secondary option itself However a room in a secondary option cannot reference elements that are def...

Page 1295: ...iple option sets do the following 1 In the main model use room separation lines to divide the space into rooms Do not however add room elements to the main model 2 Create one option set for each of these rooms 3 In the design options for a set add the rooms You can then create dedicated views to display different combinations of the design options from each set See Dedicating Views to Design Optio...

Page 1296: ...mary options of other option sets and in the main model Design Options and Worksets You can enable worksharing so that team members can work on different parts of a project at the same time For a workshared project all design options and design option sets are included in a Project Standards workset called Design Options See Setting Up Worksets on page 1191 To edit an element in a design option th...

Page 1297: ...properly A wall in a secondary option joined to the main model To avoid the above problem with wall joins in a secondary option add the horizontal wall to that option The wall join then cleans up properly as shown See Wall Joins on page 580 Design Options and Wall Joins 1259 ...

Page 1298: ...when you copy an element from the main model to a design option In this case the element exists in the main model and in the design option As a result these 2 elements overlap Solution To resolve the issue delete the element from the main model or from the design option If you tried to move an element from the main model to a design option cut the element from the model instead of copying the elem...

Page 1299: ...he following Check visibility of elements in the view Click View menu Visibility Graphics On the Model Categories tab and Annotation Categories tab check the Visibility settings for the types of elements that you added If visibility for these elements is turned off select the Visibility check box to make them visible See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 150 Check design opti...

Page 1300: ...nflict NOTE If you have created a room schedule the Room Area column in the schedule also displays an Option Conflict To learn the cause of the option conflict select the room tag in the plan view or in a room schedule select a cell in a row that has a conflict Then on the Options Bar click Explain Error A warning dialog displays which you can expand to read about the conflict and learn possible r...

Page 1301: ...a Phase Filter property The Phase property is the name of the view phase When a view is opened or created it automatically has a Phase value You can copy a view and then choose a different phase value for that view For example the original view has Phase 1 the copy has Phase 2 You create an element in Phase 1 and demolish it in Phase 2 The element appears as new in the original and as demolished i...

Page 1302: ...olished you could create one pre demolition schedule and one post renovation schedule applying the appropriate phase to each See Applying a Phase to a Schedule on page 141 Creating Phases 1 Click Settings menu Phases The Phasing dialog opens displaying the Project Phases tab By default each project has phases called Existing and New Construction 2 Click the number box adjacent to a phase Revit Arc...

Page 1303: ...Shows demolished elements and all new elements added to the building model Show New Shows all new elements added to the building model Show Previous Demo Shows existing elements and demolished elements Show Previous New Shows all original elements that were not demolished Show Previous and all new elements added to the building model New Show Previous Phase Shows all elements from the previous pha...

Page 1304: ...e following A default phase filter See Default Phase Filters on page 1265 A phase filter that you created See Creating Phase Filters on page 1266 None to apply no phase filter to the view All elements are shown in the view without any graphic overrides 3 Click OK Defining the Graphic Display for Phase Filters You define graphic overrides to change the appearance of elements in views that use phase...

Page 1305: ...ied on the Graphics Overrides tab of the Phasing dialog 6 Click Apply to apply the change and keep the Phasing dialog open or OK to apply the change and close the dialog Infill Elements for Phasing If an insert such as a window and its host such as a wall do not have the same values for the Phase Created and Phase Demolished properties Revit Architecture automatically places an infill element in t...

Page 1306: ... insert New window placed near demolished window If you apply a phase filter to the view that does not show demolished elements such as Show Previous New you see only the new insert New window only Viewing Infill Elements To see an infill element create a section view whose cut plane runs through the demolished insert and the host Sample section passing through wall and demolished window 1268 Chap...

Page 1307: ... Right click in the view and click View Properties 3 In the Element Properties dialog for Phase Filter select Show Previous New This filter shows all original elements that were not demolished and all new elements added to the building model 4 Click OK 5 Select the infill element in the view You may need to move the cursor along a face of the element until it highlights Watch the status bar for in...

Page 1308: ...splay as black dashed lines If you turn off the display of demolished elements in that phase filter then demolished elements are hidden in the view when you click them NOTE If you build and demolish an element in the same phase it is considered to be a temporary element It displays in the view according to the phase filter s setting for temporary elements The following images show a view whose pha...

Page 1309: ...rsor changes to a hammer 3 Click the elements to demolish Elements that can be demolished highlight as you move the cursor over them The graphical display of demolished elements updates based on the phase filter setting See Phase Filters on page 1265 4 To exit the Demolish tool click Modify on the Design Bar Using the Demolish Tool 1271 ...

Page 1310: ...1272 ...

Page 1311: ...s Revit Architecture supports exporting to CAD DWG and DXF ACIS SAT and MicroStation DGN file formats DWG drawing format is supported by AutoCAD 2009 and other CAD applications DXF data transfer is an open format that is supported by many CAD applications A DXF file is a text file that describes a 2D drawing The text is not encoded or compressed so DXF files are generally large If you use DXF for ...

Page 1312: ... in the importing application Use the following techniques to reduce the amount of geometry to be exported Turn off visibility of graphics Turn off visibility for categories of elements in the view as appropriate For example you might want to omit rooms areas and topography from a 3D view to be exported If you want to render an exterior scene turn off any elements that appear in the interior of th...

Page 1313: ...ingle view do the following a Under Naming select Manual Specify file name or select Automatic Long Specify prefix or Automatic Short to use an automatically generated file name See File Names for Exported Files on page 1278 b Under Range select Current View 5 If you are exporting multiple views and sheets do the following a Under Range select Selected Views Sheets b Click c In the View Sheet Set ...

Page 1314: ...oduced Exporting to DXF 1 Click File menu Export CAD Formats 2 In the Export dialog for Save In navigate to the target folder for the exported files 3 For Files of Type select a DXF file format 4 If you are exporting a single view do the following a Under Naming select Manual Specify file name or select Automatic Long Specify prefix or Automatic Short to use an automatically generated file name Se...

Page 1315: ...he exported files or select Automatic Long Specify prefix to use a longer prefix See File Names for Exported Files on page 1278 6 To specify export options click Options select the desired options and click OK For DGN files you can specify the following options Layer Settings and Enable DGN Template File See Export Options on page 1278 NOTE When you export to DGN format a 3D view that contains sol...

Page 1316: ... the exported files as follows Manual For exporting the current view only This option is not available when exporting multiple views Enter a name for the exported file Revit Architecture automatically combines any Revit or DWG links during export and so always creates a single file Automatic This option adds a prefix to the file name of the current view or multiple views and sheets Select one of t...

Page 1317: ...graphics are referred to as overrides Select one of the following values Category properties BYLAYER overrides BYENTITY When a Revit element with view specific graphics is exported in AutoCAD 2009 those differences overrides are applied to the individual entity but the entity resides on the same layer as other entities in the same Revit category or AutoCAD 2009 layer All properties BYLAYER no over...

Page 1318: ...l are assigned to one layer in AutoCAD 2009 The blue wall retains its unique attributes but it is assigned to its own layer Linetype Scaling For Linetype Scaling in the Export Options dialog select a value to control the LTSCALE and PSLTSCALE settings in AutoCAD 2009 and how linetype definitions are exported from Revit Architecture NOTE You can define Linetype Scaling when exporting to DXF or DWG ...

Page 1319: ...d PSLTSCALE Revit Architecture linetype definitions are scaled to reflect project units but otherwise they are exported as is Coordinate System Basis For Coordinate System Basis in the Export Options dialog select a value to indicate whether the exported file will use the internal coordinates of the Revit Architecture project or coordinates that are shared with other linked models See Linking Revi...

Page 1320: ...D Views Only when exporting to DXF or DWG When exporting to SAT geometry always exports as ACIS solids When exporting to DGN geometry always exports as polymeshes Modelling programs generally represent 3D shapes using either of the following technologies ACIS is a solid modelling technology For example ACIS represents a cube as a single object or shape with 6 sides A polymesh is a 3D shape consist...

Page 1321: ... not available when exporting to DGN or SAT Enable DGNTemplate File In the Export Options dialog select Enable DGN Template File when you want to use a template a MicroStation seed file for the exported DGN file Then click Load to navigate to and load the template Revit Architecture exports the project to a DGN file using the settings in the specified template If you do not use a DGN template file...

Page 1322: ...ou can however use crop regions to export part of a 2D view To export part of a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser right click the 3D view to export and click Duplicate View Duplicate The duplicate view displays in the drawing area In the Project Browser the duplicate view is named Copy of View 2 Rename the duplicate view in the Project Browser right click the duplicate view and click Rename Enter a...

Page 1323: ...ing another surface through it or join geometry to create an edge Intersected wall and extrusion in hidden line mode no edges at the intersection of the surfaces Exporting Layers When exporting a project to another format such as DWG or DGN you want the exported file to contain as much information about the project as possible Revit Architecture stores a wealth of project information in its catego...

Page 1324: ...ew mapping file click Standard select a standard from the dialog and click OK 3 Edit mapping values as desired To change a Cut or Projection value click in the Layer Name or Color ID column for the appropriate category and enter the new value NOTE Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD 2009 or MicroStation color ID For Export Layers DGN the columns are labeled Level Number corresponding to MicroStatio...

Page 1325: ...lationships between tables in the database using primary keys and reference values See Table Relationships Within the Database on page 1289 Revit Architecture can export to the same database multiple times When exporting to an empty database Revit Architecture creates new tables When you export a project to a populated database Revit Architecture updates table information to match the project This...

Page 1326: ...e a new one For example For Microsoft Access click Select to select an existing database or click Create to create a new empty database to export data to For Microsoft Excel first use Excel to create a new empty workbook with the desired name Then on the dialog click Select Workbook and navigate to the new workbook 6 In the Select Data Source dialog click OK 7 In the ODBC Setup dialog click OK NOT...

Page 1327: ...sembly Code column in type tables references the Assembly Code column in the Assembly Codes table Revit Architecture does not create a reference for the Host Id column because the host may be a wall floor roof or other such host so there is no unique table to reference The relationships between tables are established only when Revit Architecture first creates the tables if you use Revit Architectu...

Page 1328: ...project views to HTML 1 Click File menu Export Image 2 In the Export Image dialog under Export Range select Selected Views Sheets 3 Click Select 4 In the View Sheet Set dialog select the views and sheets to export and click OK 5 Under Output do the following For Name specify the desired path and a prefix for resulting file names Select Create Browsable Web Site with a Linked HTML Page for Each Vie...

Page 1329: ...his functionality is primarily intended for the European market Exporting aView as a Room Area Report 1 Click File menu Export Room Area Report The Export Room Area Report dialog displays 2 For Files of Type select the type of report to create triangulation or numerical integration 3 If you are exporting a single view do the following a Under Range select Current View b If the current view is a fl...

Page 1330: ...odel using the IFC format to an IFC certified application that does not use the RVT file format The drawing can be opened and worked on in the non native application Similarly in Revit Architecture you can import an IFC file create a RVT file and work on the building model in Revit Architecture IFC uses architecturally meaningful containers to describe real world building objects Those containers ...

Page 1331: ...k Open In the IFC Export Classes dialog each row represents an element category or subcategory For standard building elements an assigned class name appears in the IFC Class Name column For building elements that do not have automatic mapping to IFC export classes Not Exported appears in the IFC Class Name column 3 For each category or subcategory to export do the following For IFC Class Name ente...

Page 1332: ...e 1293 Split wall and columns by level allows you to divide multi level walls and columns by level 6 For File Name enter a name for the IFC file 7 Click Save Specifying IFC Entities for Families Revit Architecture exports building elements to an IFC file based on the categories and subcategories to which the elements belong For example Revit Architecture exports a wall to the IFC entity IfcWallSta...

Page 1333: ...d parameter and click Select 13 In the Shared Parameters dialog under Parameters select IFCExportType and click OK 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog under Parameter Data for Group parameter under select IFC Parameters 15 Make sure that Type is selected and click OK In the Family Types dialog IFCExportType appears in the parameter list Specify values for IFCExportAs and IFCExportType When you a...

Page 1334: ...s the IFC specific files 1 In a web browser go to http revit autodesk com library html index html 2 Click Revit Instruction and Help Samples 3 Click IFC The web page displays a list of the available IFC files 4 To download the IFC files click Download Directory On the File Download dialog click Save and navigate to the target folder 5 In Windows Explorer navigate to the target folder and double cl...

Page 1335: ... Architecture preserving model geometry lights materials camera settings and other metadata from a Revit project With Revit Architecture and 3ds Max Design working together designers can extend the building information modelling process to include design visualization NOTE For simplicity the following topics refer to 3ds Max but this information also applies to 3ds Max Design You can export a 3D v...

Page 1336: ...e Using Lighting Fixtures in a Building Model on page 1126 and Turning Lights On and Off on page 1139 In addition follow best practices for rendering to optimize the results See Rendering Best Practices on page 1172 Before exporting to FBX to render in 3ds Max you may want to generate an initial rendering using the native Revit rendering engine By rendering in Revit Architecture first you can chec...

Page 1337: ...erformance may be slow for large projects that contain lots of objects and their data To improve performance limit the model geometry being exported In Revit Architecture you can use a section box hide categories of model elements that you do not need for the scene and set the detail level as appropriate See Limiting Model Geometry Before Exporting on page 1274 and Rendering Best Practices on page...

Page 1338: ...p coordinates In the Microsoft XPS Viewer when attempting to open views containing any of these unsupported features a warning directs you to view the DWFx file in Design Review NOTE All references to DWF in this documentation implicitly include DWFx unless specified 2D DWF Files You can publish all Revit Architecture views or sheets to 2D DWF files If you publish multiple views in a project to on...

Page 1339: ...for a selected wall Revit Architecture automatically includes object data for elements in 3D DWF files To include this element specific information in a 2D DWF file you must do the following Ensure that the model graphics style for selected views is set to Hidden Lines or Wireframe not Shaded nor Shaded with Edges See Model Graphic Styles on page 201 When published to DWF views that are Shaded or ...

Page 1340: ...rent View 7 If you are exporting multiple views and sheets do the following a Under Range select Selected Views Sheets b Click c In the View Sheet Set dialog select the views and sheets to export and click OK d Under Naming select Automatic Short to use a short default name for the DWF file or select Automatic Long Specify prefix to use a longer file name See File Names for Exported Files on page ...

Page 1341: ...intout After you have marked up the DWF you can link it back into Revit Architecture Link the markups in Revit Architecture 3 Return to Revit Architecture 4 Click File menu Import Link Link DWF Markup Set 5 In the Import Link DWF File dialog navigate to the marked up DWF file select it and click Open The Link Markup Page to Revit Sheets dialog displays Under the DWF View column the dialog displays...

Page 1342: ...iew to which the DWF file is linked Other commands on this tab work similarly to the commands on the other Manage Links tabs For more information on these commands see Managing Links on page 1222 Publishing to Buzzsaw Autodesk Buzzsaw is an online collaboration service that allows you to store manage and share project documents from any Internet connection thus enhancing team productivity and redu...

Page 1343: ...WFx For more information on DWFx see Publishing 2D or 3D DWF on page 1300 5 Click OK Revit Architecture generates a DWF file and posts it on the specified Buzzsaw site Adding a New Buzzsaw Location When publishing project files to Buzzsaw you can add a Buzzsaw location This process defines the location to Revit Architecture and provides access to the site for uploading the project files However th...

Page 1344: ...nformation about variations in imported geometry see Suitability of Imported Geometry on page 1306 When you import files you may need to zoom in the drawing area to see the imported data See Zooming Project Views on page 193 For information about linking Revit models see Working with Linked Models on page 1213 Suitability of Imported Geometry When you import a file into Revit Architecture the form...

Page 1345: ...version 7 0 do not import into Revit Architecture You should determine which version your solid modelling program is creating Some solid modelling products such as form Z create SAT file formats later than version 7 0 by default Snapping to Imported Geometry Suppose that you import an AutoCAD 2009 drawing into Revit Architecture and then want to trace over walls in that drawing As you place the cu...

Page 1346: ...actly as it appeared in MicroStation 7 If you chose to manually place the imported data it displays in the drawing area and moves with the cursor Click to place the imported data You may need to zoom in to see the imported data See Zooming Project Views on page 193 Importing CAD Files Using i drop Revit Architecture supports the Autodesk i drop drag and drop feature When i drop objects are pulled ...

Page 1347: ...y 3 If you created the family outside the project load the family into the project NOTE Revit Architecture does not support linking of SketchUp files As a result if you import a SketchUp file into a Revit project and later make changes to the SketchUp file you cannot easily update the Revit project to reflect the changes Therefore complete as much of the design in SketchUp as possible before impor...

Page 1348: ...ons on page 555 When creating content in SketchUp for use in Revit Architecture consider the following restrictions Exploding 3D data In Revit Architecture you will not be able to explode 3D data If you try this 3D faces will disappear and you will receive a warning message Parameters In Revit Architecture you cannot add parameters to control geometric flexing However you can add some controls tha...

Page 1349: ...uded surface Revolved surface NURB surfaces You can import NURB non uniform rational B splines surfaces on ACIS objects in DWG or SAT files into Revit Architecture mass or generic model families while you are creating the family You can then use the Roof by Face and Curtain System by Face tools to create roofs and curtain systems on these imported surfaces For more information see Creating Curtain...

Page 1350: ...d of importing it Linking is similar to having an xref in AutoCAD 2009 When the original linked file changes these changes are reflected if possible in Link the file when you reload the project See Implications of Importing vs Linking for Xrefs on page 1307 Colors Invert inverts the colors of all line and text objects from the imported file to Revit Archi tecture specific colors Dark colors become...

Page 1351: ...om factor for Import Units and specify a value of 10 in the adjacent text box Each unit from the source file is now equal to 10 meters in the Revit Architecture file The value you enter here displays in the Scale Factor type property of the import symbol If the units are known you can select Custom factor and enter a scale factor This can increase or decrease the size of the imported elements in R...

Page 1352: ...vit Models on page 1312 NOTE If no values display for these parameters you must reload the link or reimport the file 4 Click OK Setting Line Weights for Imported DWG or DXF Files When you import a DWG or DXF file each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number line weight settings Revit Architecture can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Arch...

Page 1353: ...e file You do not need to restart Revit Architecture for the font mapping to take effect If you have already imported the file you will need to import it again Setting Constraint Parameters for Imported Geometry If you have imported geometry into all views you can set the base level for it and specify a height offset from that level To set constraint parameters 1 Select the imported geometry and c...

Page 1354: ...ally with 2 crossing lines indicating the extents of the image 4 Click to place the image Related topic Adding an Image to a Sheet on page 983 Modifying Imported Images You can modify imported images using commands on the Edit toolbar such as Rotate and Copy NOTE These commands also affect captured rendered 3D images To modify an imported image 1 Select the image so that handles display on the ima...

Page 1355: ...s IFC on page 1292 When you import an IFC file Revit Architecture creates a new file based on the default template For information about selecting the default template see Selecting a Template for Imported IFC Files on page 1317 You can load your own IFC class mapping files and override the categories and subcategories for imported IFC objects TIP Make sure you import the geometric data needed for...

Page 1356: ... you may want to use linked files as follows Some team members use AutoCAD to create details or elevations but the rest of the project is created using Revit Architecture You want to link the AutoCAD drawings to the Revit project and place them on sheets Then these drawings can be included in the set of construction documents that Revit Architecture generates Team members from other disciplines su...

Page 1357: ...yed only in relevant 2D Revit drawings such as floor plans In a 3D view the linked file is displayed as flat 2D shapes Linking to an AutoCAD File 1 Open the Revit project 2 If you want the linked file to display only in a particular view open that view 3 Click File menu Import Link CAD Formats 4 Specify the file to link as follows For Look in navigate to the location of the file For Files of type ...

Page 1358: ...n to indicate whether the path is absolute or relative In general use a relative path instead of an absolute path If you use a relative path and later move the project and the linked file together to a new directory the link is maintained The new working directory becomes the relative path for the linked file If you use an absolute path and later move the project and the linked file to a new direc...

Page 1359: ...rve Graphic Overrides option If this option is not selected Revit Architecture discards graphic overrides when the linked file is reloaded Solution See Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files on page 1325 Layers in the DWG File Do Not Display in the Revit Project Symptom Some layers in the linked file do not display in the Revit project Issue The layers may be hidden or deleted...

Page 1360: ...in Autodesk Design Review using its Markup Tools you can modify the Status and Notes properties in Revit Architecture This feature allows you to add information to the markup or maintain information about its status To modify markups created in Design Review 1 Select a markup object that was created in Design Review A markup object might look as follows 2 On the Options Bar click Element Propertie...

Page 1361: ...rt or link a file to a Revit project you can query the file for information about its objects This allows you to determine the identity of an object and the layer on which it resides You can also hide the object s layer or delete it To query objects in layers 1 Open a project view in Revit Architecture 2 Highlight the import symbol for the file and click to select it When you highlight the import ...

Page 1362: ...layers When you delete layers they are not available to the Revit project However they still exist in the original CAD file If you want to restore the layers you must delete the file and either import or link it to the project again Related topic Changing the Graphic Display of Layers on page 1325 Hiding Layers When you import or link a file you can specify how to hide its layers in each Revit vie...

Page 1363: ...the Options Bar click Delete Layers 4 In the Select Layers Levels to Delete dialog select the layers to delete and click OK The deleted layers do not display in any views in the Revit project Changing the Graphic Display of Layers When you import or link a file to a Revit project you can control the graphic display of each layer in the file For example you can change the line color weight and styl...

Page 1364: ... 484 6 Click OK Related topics Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files on page 1325 Hiding and Deleting Layers on page 1324 MakingView Specific Changes to the Graphic Display of Layers When you import or link a file to a Revit project you can control the graphic display of its layers in individual views To make view specific changes to the graphic display of layers 1 Open a pro...

Page 1365: ...Related topics Preserving or Discarding Graphic Overrides for Linked Files on page 1325 Hiding and Deleting Layers on page 1324 Managing Layers in Linked and Imported Files 1327 ...

Page 1366: ...1328 ...

Page 1367: ...ew sheet view and add a titleblock to it Add any views plans elevations sections to the sheet After you add a view change its view scale through the view properties You can plot multiple views at different scales on the same sheet Only a portion of a print job comes out on a sheet Several printers have limited on board memory to process print data When plotting large format sheet sizes to plotters...

Page 1368: ...a wall s surface Click File menu Print Setup In the Print Setup dialog select the Vector Processing option Images Printed output of imported images is different than the on screen display Click File menu Print Setup In the Print Setup dialog select the Raster Processing option Plotting When I create a plot file in Revit Architecture using an OCE 9800 plotter and Windows 2000 the plot file when vie...

Page 1369: ...used If you are running Windows NT 4 0 perform the following 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Select the TechJET 720c 56xx driver 3 Click File menu Document Defaults 4 Click the Advanced tab 5 Scroll down to Graphic and expand the group 6 Click on Color Appearance The options appear in the lower portion of the window Select Gray Scale or Color 7 Scroll down to Document Options and expand it 8 Scr...

Page 1370: ...e the ID number and click Show Revit Architecture locates the element and selects it in the view This command is especially useful if you are trying to locate a view specific element by its ID Finding an Element s ID Number 1 Select an element in a view 2 Click Tools menu Element Ids Ids of Selection The ID number is reported in the Element IDs of Selection dialog Error Handling If errors occur du...

Page 1371: ...t action To see more information about each error click the plus sign in the tree structure A sample error structure might be 3 Error s must be addressed in order to continue Error Message Error 1 element associated with error element associated with error Error 2 element associated with error element associated with error Error Message 2 Error 3 element associated with error element associated wi...

Page 1372: ... Messages 1 Click Tools menu Review Warnings 2 Click the arrow buttons as needed to scroll through the list of warning messages 3 Click OK to close the list NOTE This command is not enabled if there are no warning messages Warnings for Selected Elements If there are any warnings associated with an element you select in a drawing the Options Bar displays a button Show Warnings related to selected E...

Page 1373: ...ee Placing Permanent Dimensions on page 215 Problem Typically this problem occurs in a panel on a sloped glazing A hori zontal and vertical curtain grid on a panel are not meeting exactly at a point There is an invalid curtain panel in the model This is probably caused by two creating a small triangular panel within the main panel the triangular panel grid lines almost meeting at a border of canno...

Page 1374: ...an elevation view or a section view you see this message Try pasting in a plan reflected ceiling plan or 3D view This message would also appear if you try to paste a group of components that cannot be pasted into a certain view for example a column group into an elevation view Problem Revit Architecture requires a proper host for the copied element for example a window needs a wall a tag or dimens...

Page 1375: ...g is triggered by elements based on lines that are misaligned by 1x 10 9 to 2 degrees with either the horizontal or vertical directions or with a line at 45 degrees to the horizontal vertical direction Element is slightly off axis and may cause inaccuracies The problem can be caused by sketching or rotating elements when angle snaps are turned off or it can result from pre existing elements when y...

Page 1376: ...e geometry properly this message appears This might happen if you move a window onto a door in a plan view Revit Architecture cannot cut both a door instance and a window instance simultaneously The error might also occur if you move a component outside a wall by either dragging the component or shortening the wall such that it cannot host the component You can either cancel the move or delete the...

Page 1377: ...ing many types of elements Importing and exporting external file formats Revit provides an Application Programming Interface API that allows you to extend the functionality of the product Experienced developers and Autodesk partners may already know that the Revit API lets them add customized commands to the Tools External Commands menu or add new menus and toolbars In addition to those API extens...

Page 1378: ...e products generically as Revit without a further qualifier Once installed Revit VSTA provides New items on the toolbar s Tools menu Tools Macros Macros Tools Macros Launch VSTA IDE Macro Manager a user interface launched by the Tools Macros Macros menu option Macro Manager presents a list of macros you built previously that you can run edit or debug StepInto Macro Manager also provides options to...

Page 1379: ...r Edit and use the Revit VSTA IDE to define the macro adding your implementation code When you are ready you build the macro in the IDE After the build succeeds you can run the macro in Macro Manager and observe the results The following workflow illustrates the overall process with the numbering continued from the previous diagram Getting Started with Macros 1341 ...

Page 1380: ...our computer If it is close Revit 2 Start the Revit installation program again from the product DVD or download kit the same program used to install the base Revit product 3 On the main menu select the option to Install Tools and Utilities as shown here 4 Proceed to the screen that lists the option for the Revit VSTA For example here is the option from the Revit Architecture installer 1342 Chapter...

Page 1381: ...t or create a new one Notice that the Tools menu contains a Macros submenu Here is an example from Revit Architecture You can also display toolbar shortcuts for Macro Manager and the VSTA IDE by right clicking in any gray region of the docked toolbar and selecting VSTA Macros from the menu Clicking the VSTA Macros option results in the addition of the following icons on the Revit toolbar Installin...

Page 1382: ...selecting your preferred programming language C or VB NET you must choose one of two levels for macros Application level macros Choose this level if you want the macros to be available to all opened Revit projects in the current instance of the Revit application Note that if you send the rvt file to a person on another computer application level macros would not be available Document level macros ...

Page 1383: ...e Macro Manager s categorized list Before we look at an example of the initial code loaded into the Revit VSTA IDE let s discuss where macro project files reside on your computer On disk Application level macro projects are stored in a subfolder of the Revit installation directory For example C Program Files Revit Architecture 2009 Program VstaMacros AppAddIns defaultAddIns Here is an example with...

Page 1384: ...d level and language for your macro highlight that type on the Macro Manager list and then click New Let s walk through an example In this first screen select an Application level macro and C as the implementation language Click the New button Revit prompts you to name the macro For example The Revit VSTA IDE presents a starting template for Application level macros in C Here is a portion of the s...

Page 1385: ...lass definition Started the methods for ThisApplication_Startup and ThisApplication_Shutdown Started your new macro s method named MyFirstMacroAppCS giving you the opportunity to add your implementation code between the braces Also note in the following screen how the Revit VSTA Project Explorer shows your context You are editing ThisApplication cs CreatingYour First Set of Macros 1347 ...

Page 1386: ... App level C double lineWidth 4 0 12 0 View pView this ActiveDocument ActiveView this ActiveDocument Create NewTextNote pView origin baseVec upVec lineWidth align strText In the example the Revit API Geometry XYZ class is used to define a position with X Y Z coordinates for a Text Note that the macro will add to the active view of the active document For now you can skip any implementation of the ...

Page 1387: ...a First Floor plan As you will note from the code this Application level macro adds the Text Note to the active view of the active document View pView this ActiveDocument ActiveView this ActiveDocument Create NewTextNote pView origin baseVec upVec lineWidth align strText Launch Macro Manager again by selecting Tools Macros Macros from the toolbar menu In Macro Manager find your macro select it and...

Page 1388: ... 0 0 0 Dim upVec As Autodesk Revit Geometry XYZ Me Create NewXYZ 0 0 0 0 1 0 Dim origin As Autodesk Revit Geometry XYZ Me Create NewXYZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dim align As Autodesk Revit Enums TextAlignFlags Autodesk Revit Enums TextAlignFlags TEF_ALIGN_LEFT Or Autodesk Revit Enums TextAlignFlags TEF_ALIGN_TOP Dim strText As String My First Macro App Level VB NET Dim lineWidth As Double 4 0 12 0 Dim pView As...

Page 1389: ... Create NewXYZ 1 0 0 0 0 0 Autodesk Revit Geometry XYZ upVec this Application Create NewXYZ 0 0 0 0 1 0 Autodesk Revit Geometry XYZ origin this Application Create NewXYZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 Autodesk Revit Enums TextAlignFlags align Autodesk Revit Enums TextAlignFlags TEF_ALIGN_LEFT Autodesk Revit Enums TextAlignFlags TEF_ALIGN_TOP string strText My First Macro Document level CS double lineWidth 4 0 12 0 V...

Page 1390: ...e when you build the project in the Revit VSTA IDE notice that you are building the DocVisualBasic project and your Document level VB NET macro s code resides in ThisDocument vb You can use the IDE s Project Explorer to see its temporary location on disk Recall that the code for successfully built Document level macros are stored in the rvt file after you Save the rvt file the project files are re...

Page 1391: ...ull SDK API samples and the Revit VSTA samples The Revit SDK is available on The Revit DVD The Autodesk web site at http www autodesk com revit sdk The Autodesk Developer Network http adn autodesk com If you are interested please contact your Autodesk representative for information about getting an ADN account The SDK is packaged in a ZIP file After unzipping it and agreeing to the license text lo...

Page 1392: ... samples provided with the SDK Copy and open the following Revit project file Revit release SDK VSTA Samples Revit_VSTA_Samples rvt Included in this rvt are a number of Document level macros In Revit start Macro Manager select one of the Document level macros and choose Run Note that when you open Revit_VSTA_Samples rvt from the SDK it may contain more samples than the ones shown in the following ...

Page 1393: ... types of references or properties for your macros see the next section Integrating Macros into RevitVSTA Let s walk through the steps to integrate a macro into a Revit VSTA project You can skip this section if the Document level samples described in the section Using the Revit VSTA Samples from SDK on page 1354 meet your needs This section explains where to create folders in the IDE projects that...

Page 1394: ...display For the macro project example AppCSharp right click on the References section and select Add Reference from the menu In the Add Reference dialog find and select System Drawing and System Windows Forms on the list Hold down the Ctrl key to do the multi select operation For example When you are ready click OK The IDE s Project Explorer is updated with the references Create Folders in RevitVS...

Page 1395: ...ry folder such as Rooms Here is the resulting Project Explorer screen Outside of the IDE using Windows Explorer navigate to the Revit installation folders on the file system and find the VstaMacros folder Notice that the corresponding Samples Rooms subfolders have been created in this location For example Integrating Macros into RevitVSTA 1357 ...

Page 1396: ...lder Still outside of the Revit VSTA IDE copy your macro s files to the subfolder you created on the file system In our example we now have NOTE If your macro uses a resx file copy it too 1358 Chapter 24 Creating Macros with RevitVSTA ...

Page 1397: ...ur project you can write a method that runs the macro For example in C Sample Rooms test public void RunSampleRooms SamplesRoom sample new SamplesRoom this sample Run Be sure to add a using directive for the macro s namespace For example using Revit SDK Samples Rooms CS Save the project and then click Build from the IDE toolbar menu In Revit launch Macro Manager and select your macro from the cate...

Page 1398: ...it_VSTA_Samples rvt from the SDK However for macros you develop yourself you may need to define properties in the project s resources resx file This section shows an example In Project Explorer navigate to the Properties folder for your macro Example AppCSharp Samples GridCreation Properties Highlight the resources resx file In the Properties pane select the Custom Tool property and enter ResXFile...

Page 1399: ...plication Application object ment object for Document level macros Use the Me keyword in VB NET For Document level macros this Application points to the Application object Me Application in VB NET The Revit API objects that can be created by new oper ator in external commands cannot be created by new Some Revit API objects can be cre ated directly by new operator such as Geometry XYZ For example X...

Page 1400: ...d API samples from the SDK into your Revit VSTA macro project are similar to the section Integrating Macros into Revit VSTA on page 1355 Except instead of copying files from the SDK s VSTA Samples sample name folders you will copy files from the SDK s Samples sample name folders To review the steps are 1 In the IDE add required references 2 In the IDE create folders for the SDK samples you want to...

Page 1401: ... as Revit Proxy Remember to add other required references as shown earlier in this topic For example you have to add System Windows Forms and System Drawing references when running samples that present a user interface Some samples have resources that must be defined in the resources resx file GridCreation is one such sample If you migrate the SDK standard API sample for GridCreation to Revit VSTA...

Page 1402: ...Reference This section answers frequently asked questions about Revit macros Q I was expecting to see my newly created macro listed in Macro Manager s categorized list but it is not there Why A You must successfully build the macro project in the Revit VSTA IDE use the Build menu before your new macros will appear in Macro Manager Q Do I need to add RevitAPI dll as a reference when writing a new m...

Page 1403: ... projects Therefore File Open Project in the IDE is disabled Q What are the differences between Application level and Document level macros A Application level macros can be run on all opened Revit projects within a single instance of the Revit application Document level macro projects are stored within an rvt file They can be loaded from within the current active document and run on that document...

Page 1404: ...ssage box when a new Revit project is created Note One of the VSTA samples provided on the Revit SDK may show an example of a Document level event handler s startup and shutdown This FAQ shows Application level event handler examples VB NET example Application level Private Sub ThisApplication_Startup ByVal sender As Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Me Startup AddHandler Me OnDocumentNew...

Page 1405: ...it Programming is a video on autodesk com that you can download The narrated video covers the Revit API for external commands and external applications It does not describe the macros functionality with Revit VSTA but should be of interest to developers who are looking for more details about the full Revit SDK API and its samples See http usa autodesk com adsk servlet index siteID 123112 id 248497...

Page 1406: ...1368 ...

Page 1407: ...ng model displayed in the Revit interface For example floor plans and elevations are 2D views Compare with 3D view on page 1369 See Project Views on page 79 3D model A 3 dimensional 3D representation of a building or other design See also building information modelling BIM on page 1376 3D view A 3 dimensional 3D representation of a building model displayed in the Revit interface Compare with 2D vi...

Page 1408: ... with 6 sides Compare with polymesh on page 1439 Revit Architecture can import ACIS objects contained in DWG DXF and SAT files See Importing ACIS Objects on page 1311 Revit Architecture can export 3D shapes as ACIS solids See Solids 3D Views Only on page 1282 annotation A 2D view specific element that you use to document a building or design For example symbols tags keynotes and dimensions are ann...

Page 1409: ...round structural columns and for decorative applications Compare with structural column on page 1460 For more information see Architectural Columns on page 691 area Usable space that is defined by walls or boundary lines or both In Revit Architecture you can perform an area analysis to define spatial relationships in a building model See Area Analysis on page 945 Glossary 1371 ...

Page 1410: ...sign area types to individual areas in an area plan For more information see Area Schemes on page 945 array An arrangement of elements in a building model For example in a large office you can create an array of desks and chairs In a structural design you can create an array of beams or columns You can create a linear array in which the elements are distributed evenly along a line or a radial arra...

Page 1411: ...2 The following image shows a floor attached to the structural layer of a wall attached detail group A group of view specific elements that are associated with a model group For example an attached detail group may be comprised of door tags and window tags See Editing Elements in Groups on page 284 AutoCAD An Autodesk product AutoCAD enables you to create visualize document and share your ideas fr...

Page 1412: ...information see Beams on page 768 bearing wall A wall that supports a vertical load in addition to its own weight Compare with non bearing wall on page 1429 For more information see Structural Walls on page 839 BIM See building information modelling BIM on page 1376 blend A combination blending of 2 shapes to create a 3D shape You can create blends using solid geometry and void geometry For exampl...

Page 1413: ...iple sections or break a crop region into sections In the following elevation view the blue Z shaped break controls allow you to break the crop region into sections break line The Z shaped line used in a drafting view or detail view to obscure parts of the drawing to focus the drawing on a particular area The following drafting view uses break lines above and below the section to obscure less intr...

Page 1414: ...tation of information from the same underlying building model database For more information see What Is a Project on page 73 Building Maker A conceptual design and modeling environment that takes any overall building form described conceptually and maps it to building elements such as roofs curtain walls floors and walls See Massing Studies and Building Maker on page 518 building model A design cr...

Page 1415: ...tecture the callout appears in a separate view In the callout you can add annotations and detail which will not display in the parent view In the parent view the callout area is marked with a callout tag The following views show a callout tag in a section view and the detail view for the callout For more information see Callout Views on page 98 camera A visualization tool that you use to create a ...

Page 1416: ...group of elements that you use to model or document a building design For example categories of model elements include walls windows columns and beams Categories of annotation elements include dimensions tags and text notes Categories are organized into families of elements with similar purposes and characteristics Families are further organized into types as shown ceiling plan A drawing that show...

Page 1417: ...entral file so that other users can see their work For more information see Working in a Team on page 1189 chain A linked set of lines or walls When drawing walls or lines in a building model you can simplify the process by drawing a chain You can also select a chain of lines or walls to manipulate them simultaneously clean To resolve joins between 2 or more host elements that share a common face ...

Page 1418: ...otted lines define the clip planes for an elevation view closed loop A sketched line that connects to itself creating a 2 dimensional shape A closed loop cannot contain coincident or intersecting segments In Revit Architecture you sketch closed loops to create floors ceilings plan regions openings in walls and roofs solid extrusions and other parts of a building design In the following sketch a cl...

Page 1419: ...y department set the Department parameter for each room to the desired value and create a color scheme based on the values of the Department parameter You can then add a color scheme legend to identify the department that each color represents For more information see Color Schemes on page 956 column A vertical element in a building Architectural columns add visual interest to a design See Archite...

Page 1420: ...ivered and installed on site rather than built in place Also referred to as a hosted component For example windows doors and furniture are components In contrast walls floors and roofs are built in place these are called hosts or host elements See Hosted Components on page 731 compound wall A wall that consists of multiple vertical layers Each layer can use a different material such as concrete in...

Page 1421: ...ors so they can create the building Revit Architecture generates construction documents using the information about the building model stored in the project file along with user added annotation detailing and layout information For more information see Preparing Construction Documents on page 967 Construction Specifications Institute CSI An association that provides technical information standards...

Page 1422: ...ch a control to change the shape of the walls Other controls allows you to flip lock rotate view and change the shape or size of elements See Controls and Shape Handles on page 279 coping 1 In structural design the process of cutting a piece of steel from a beam to fit it to a column Beam before coping is applied left and after coping is applied right coping 2 In architectural design a finishing o...

Page 1423: ... core or from the interior face or exterior face of the core See Vertically Compound Walls on page 567 and Dimensioning to Core in Compound Structures on page 226 crop To limit the boundaries of a view omitting parts of the building model from the view See also crop region crop region A user interface mechanism that defines the boundaries of a view Elements in the building model that are outside t...

Page 1424: ...e made of glass brick or other materials See Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions on page 700 cut line style A graphic style applied to an element when a view such as a section view cuts through the element so that you are seeing a representation of its interior surface Compare with projection line style on page 1440 For the cut line style of an element you can specify the line weight color an...

Page 1425: ... a join This is the visible gap seen in a steel beam connection within the Revit project See Beam Cutback on page 782 D datum A non physical item that is used to establish project context Also called a datum element Datum elements include levels grids and reference planes For example the following image shows a grid which is used for the placement of columns and other model elements The grid is no...

Page 1426: ...view scale and annotations are made in one view they are reflected in all views For more information see Duplicate Dependent Views on page 144 Design Bar A part of the Revit user interface that contains tools for designing a building model The Design Bar appears in the left pane of the Revit window Click a tab such as Drafting or Modelling to see tools for that design function Right click the Desi...

Page 1427: ...l level A Revit setting that determines the amount of geometry displayed in a view Detail level settings include coarse medium and fine where coarse shows the least detail and fine shows the most detail The following image illustrates the 3 detail levels for a desk For more information see Detail Level on page 503 Glossary 1389 ...

Page 1428: ...n page 1094 detail view A view of a model that displays as a callout or section in other views This type of view typically represents the model in finer detail than shown in the parent view It is used to add more information to specific parts of the model A detail view reflects geometry of the building model If a related part of the building model changes the detail view updates to reflect the cha...

Page 1429: ... more information see Dimensions on page 213 discipline A functional area such as structural mechanical electrical or architectural or an area of expertise such as architecture structural engineering or construction In a Revit project you can assign disciplines to categories and to views You can then control the visibility or graphic display of elements in a view based on assigned disciplines For ...

Page 1430: ...ed on a sheet However a drafting view does not reflect the actual building model and it does not update when the model changes Compare with detail view on page 1390 The following image shows a drafting view created using the 2D detailing tools in Revit Architecture It is not a 3D view For more information see Drafting Views on page 1079 drag control A graphical icon in the Revit drawing area that ...

Page 1431: ...ts as DWF files the files can be marked up electronically using a program such as Autodesk Design Review You can link the markups back into Revit Architecture to see the desired changes See Linking DWF Markup Files on page 1321 DWG A drawing file format supported by AutoCAD and other CAD applications Revit Architecture can import and export DWG files See Interoperability on page 1273 DXF Drawing E...

Page 1432: ...permission to borrow is automatically granted See Borrowing Elements on page 1198 element properties Parameters or settings that control the appearance or behavior of elements in a project Element properties are the combination of instance parameters and type parameters To view or change element properties select the element in the drawing area and on the Options Bar click Element Properties For m...

Page 1433: ...ourage An architectural term that refers to the landscaping and other environmental features shown in a rendering of a building For example entourage can include plants trees people cars and signs Revit Architecture provides a library of entourage families and you can create or load additional entourage into a project For more information see Plants and Entourage on page 1139 and Decals on page 11...

Page 1434: ...D geometry for a building model You begin a solid extrusion by sketching 2D shapes on a plane Revit Architecture then extrudes the sketch between a start point and an endpoint See Creating Solid Extrusions on page 386 You can also create a void extrusion by cutting a shape out of a 3D solid See Void Extrusions on page 390 F face A surface of a model element or mass You can apply paint materials an...

Page 1435: ...nts and annotation elements For more information see Building with Elements on page 73 and Creating Your Own Components Families on page 341 family type Also referred to as simply a type See family on page 1397 and type on page 1466 far clip plane The clip plane that is at the side of the view farthest from the start point of an elevation view a section view a 3D view or a walkthrough view In the ...

Page 1436: ...r example in the following drawing the red area indicates the cut volume and the blue area indicates the fill volume required to level the site for a building See Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site on page 901 filled region A 2D view specific graphic You can use filled regions to represent various surfaces such as concrete or compacted earth You can add a filled region to a detail view a dra...

Page 1437: ...ters in the following ways To select or deselect elements in a view See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 271 To override the graphic display and control the visibility of elements in a view See Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters on page 156 To control the display of elements based on their phase status new existing demolished or temporary See Phase Filter...

Page 1438: ...a flip control floor area face See mass floor floor plan A 2D drawing of a building model that shows the layout of walls and other building components In Revit Architecture a floor plan is also referred to as a floor plan view See Plan Views on page 79 focal point The point in the distance on which a camera is focusing See camera on page 1377 footing The base of a foundation that rests directly on...

Page 1439: ...oof on each side formula A mathematical equation used to determine the dimension of an object or a calculated value for a schedule Formulas allow you to create parameters that depend on other parameters for their values For example you can create a width parameter that equals twice the height of an object The following type properties include a formula for the sill length of a new window family Se...

Page 1440: ...tion An elevation view that shows the structural framing of a building model You can work in a framing elevation when adding vertical bracing to the model or for any task that requires quick work plane alignment to a grid or to a named reference plane See Framing Elevation Views on page 89 full explode The process of completely disassembling an import symbol which represents imported geometry into...

Page 1441: ...amilies so that the annotations display in the project This is useful if you want to include a label with a model family and display that label in the project See Adding a Generic Annotation on page 423 and Loading Generic Annotations into Model Families on page 422 generic model A family of geometry that does not fit into any of the other pre defined categories such as columns roofs and floors In...

Page 1442: ...page 1033 ground plane A horizontal plane that represents ground level in a building model In Revit Architecture you can specify the ground plane when creating a solar study for 2D and 3D views See Solar Studies on page 1179 group A defined set of elements that can be placed as a unit in a building design Grouping elements is useful when you need to create entities that represent repeating units o...

Page 1443: ...oof Gutters on page 629 H halftone A display color that blends the line color of an element half way with the background color of the view For example the following image shows some elements in halftone gray and others in black You can specify the halftone display properties using the Visibility Graphics dialog See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 150 Glossary 1405 ...

Page 1444: ... level For example in a floor plan you can double click a section head to go to the section view In the following floor plan the blue symbol is a section head head 3 For windows and doors the piece that goes across the top of the window or door to create the rough opening head height For windows and doors a measurement from the floor to the top of the rough opening hidden element An element that y...

Page 1445: ...ht To move the cursor over an object in the drawing area so that Revit Architecture displays the object s outline in a different weight bold and color such as gray instead of black A description of the element displays on the status bar at the bottom of the Revit window After a brief delay the element description also displays in a tooltip near the cursor This highlighting indicates that the objec...

Page 1446: ...Revit project For example you can import DWG files created using a CAD application such as AutoCAD into Revit Architecture See Import Link on page 1306 import symbol A Revit element that contains all objects such as blocks and xrefs from an imported drawing When you move the cursor over the imported objects Revit Architecture shows information about the import symbol You can explode an import symb...

Page 1447: ...For more information about Revit Architecture and IFC see Exporting to Industry Foundation Classes IFC on page 1292 and Importing Industry Foundation Class IFC Files on page 1317 For more information about the IFC file format go to http www iai international org infill element An insert that fills patches a hole in a host element after changes are made during different phases of a building project...

Page 1448: ... see Insulation on page 1073 interior The inside of a building or the inside surface of an object interoperability The ability of Revit Architecture to interact with other software applications Examples of interoperability include importing files from other applications into a Revit project and exporting a Revit project to a file format that can be used by other applications For more information s...

Page 1449: ...e they are joined top and after they are joined bottom in a view with a coarse detail level See Joining Geometry on page 334 Before joining geometry After joining geometry joist A beam that supports a floor or ceiling Joists are generally made of wood steel or concrete They are often set parallel from wall to wall or across or abutting girders See Structural Usage of Beams on page 770 Glossary 141...

Page 1450: ... Service and Units Each key specifies different floor wall and base finishes for its room style Rather than manually specifying finishes for all 100 rooms you can assign a room style to each room When you create a room schedule fields in the schedule automatically update with the appropriate finishes based on the assigned Room Style keys For more information see Key Schedules on page 125 Key sched...

Page 1451: ...roject can be documented on one sheet For more information see Keynotes on page 1058 L label A text placeholder added to tags or title blocks You create a label as part of a tag or title block family while in the Family Editor When you place the tag or title block in the project you replace the label with the actual value for that instance For example the following title block template contains la...

Page 1452: ...s an annotation to an element or part of the building model in a view Also referred to as a leader line In Revit Architecture you can control the line weight style and color of the leader as well as its position shape and arrowhead legend A table that provides descriptions or information about symbols used in drawings In Revit Architecture you can create a legend and include it on multiple sheets ...

Page 1453: ...of templates detail components entourage materials and families of model elements and annotation elements Revit Architecture provides some libraries Other libraries are available on the Internet Family categories in the Imperial library line pattern A series of dashes or dots alternating with blank spaces Glossary 1415 ...

Page 1454: ... line of a particular pattern weight and color used to indicate different effects For example in the following site plan a red dashed line indicates the zoning setback Revit Architecture predefines several line styles and uses them for default purposes You can change these and add your own line styles to suit your needs and preferences For more information see Line Styles on page 485 line weight T...

Page 1455: ...ng with Linked Models on page 1213 listening dimensions A Revit feature that allows you to specify a value for a dimension as you sketch an element in a view You specify a start point for the element start sketching in the desired direction type the exact dimension desired and press ENTER Revit Architecture draws the element to the specified length The following image shows the text box that appea...

Page 1456: ... the wall the wall centerline core centerline interior or exterior wall face or interior or exterior face of wall core In the following illustration the green dashed lines indicate the location line of the wall See Walls on page 561 lock To secure a dimension or the location of an element so that it cannot be changed When you select a locked dimension or element a lock control displays next to it ...

Page 1457: ...chitecture to display the desired changes See Linking DWF Markup Files on page 1321 masking region A defined area that obscures elements in a view Masking regions are useful when you are creating a model family from an imported 2D DWG file and you need the model element to obscure other elements when placed in a view You can also use them to hide parts of a drawing For more information see Masking...

Page 1458: ...esign mass families or in place masses See Conceptual Design with Massing Studies on page 517 mass face See face on page 1396 mass floor An interior horizontal surface in a mass During the conceptual design stage of a building project a mass floor represents a story in the building You can divide masses into mass floors to perform various types of analysis on the design See Analyzing a Conceptual ...

Page 1459: ... conceptual design is complete you can add building elements directly to these shapes See Conceptual Design with Massing Studies on page 517 Massing study used as the basis for a building design Final building design matchline A sketch line that indicates where to split a view for a dependent view as shown See Duplicate Dependent Views on page 144 Glossary 1421 ...

Page 1460: ...ny Revit family Material takeoff schedules have all the functionality and characteristics of other schedule views but they allow you to show more detail about the assembly of a component Any material that is applied to a component within Revit Architecture can be scheduled For more information see Material Takeoff Schedules on page 127 Max See 3ds Max on page 1370 menu bar A user interface mechani...

Page 1461: ...ference plane the wall flips opposite the original wall You can pick the mirror axis or draw a temporary axis Use the Mirror tool to flip a selected element or to make a copy of an element and reverse its position in one step The following image shows the results of mirroring and copying a door using the center wall as the mirror axis See Mirroring Elements on page 310 miter A joint at a 45 degree...

Page 1462: ... following image shows only model elements It does not include annotation elements such as dimensions or text notes or datum elements such as grid lines or levels See Building with Elements on page 73 model graphics style A method of displaying model elements in views For example you can choose to display a model using wireframe hidden lines shading or shading with edges You can specify the model ...

Page 1463: ... in 3D space and is visible in all views of a Revit project You can use model lines to represent 3D geometry in a building design such as cords or cables that secure a tarp You can sketch straight curved arc circular fillet and tangent lines Compare with detail line on page 1390 and symbolic line on page 1462 The following truss uses a model line to represent the beam stick symbol For more informa...

Page 1464: ...ore information see Model Text on page 727 modelling The process of representing a design See also building information modelling BIM on page 1376 moment The amount of rotation at an axis caused by downward force applied to a beam at a distance from its supporting members A moment connection is a connection that is designed to transfer moment and other forces between a beam and its supporting memb...

Page 1465: ...ype properties You can also specify the material for monolithic stairs See Stair Type Properties on page 671 mullion In Revit Architecture a vertical or horizontal strip between panels of a curtain wall or curtain system For more information see Mullions on page 709 Glossary 1427 ...

Page 1466: ...xample various window types or different categories for example an exterior door and two lighting fixtures You create nested families using the Family Editor The following nested family includes a door 2 sidelights and 2 lighting fixtures For more information see Nested Families on page 407 See also shared family on page 1454 1428 Glossary ...

Page 1467: ... referred to as an annotation schedule Note blocks are useful for listing notes that are applied to elements in a project For more information see Annotation Schedules Note Blocks on page 127 Sample note block NURB surface Non uniform rational B spline A mathematical model commonly used in computer graphics for representing and generating curves and surfaces In Revit Architecture you can create ro...

Page 1468: ...he element or line will move or a new element or line will be created For example when creating walls you might specify an offset of 5 meters When you select an existing wall Revit Architecture draws a new wall 5 meters from the selected wall The following illustration shows that when you move the cursor near the outside of a chain of walls Revit Architecture draws a preview line to show the offse...

Page 1469: ...he orientation of a compound wall to reverse the order of its layers origin A fixed starting point or the point in a coordinate system where the axes intersect In Revit Architecture you use an origin for many functions such as positioning a linked project creating a custom fill pattern positioning a group resizing walls or sketching lines for a new family The origin of each element is defined in t...

Page 1470: ...rame and window frame are painted different colors See Applying a Material to an Element on page 338 pan In a 3D context primarily when using 3D SteeringWheels pan dollies the camera left and right In a 2D context pan scrolls the view If you are using pan with an active view on a sheet pan scrolls the sheet view not the active view on the sheet See Navigating Views on page 169 panel In Revit Archi...

Page 1471: ...ration on page 149 and Datum Extents and Visibility on page 1048 parameter A setting that determines the appearance or behavior of an element type or view Also called a property See Element Properties Dialog on page 75 and View Properties on page 210 parametric Controlled by parameters In a Revit project parameters define the relationships between elements of the building model These relationships...

Page 1472: ...ange In Revit Architecture you can print construction documents as PDF files You can then share the construction documents with team members view them online or print them See Printing to PDF on page 1024 permanent dimension A dimension that specifies a particular size for an element or a distance between elements or points Permanent dimensions always display in the view in which they are created ...

Page 1473: ...n page 109 phase A stage or time period in the construction process of a building project Typical phases include existing construction demolition remodeling and new construction Revit Architecture tracks the phase in which views or components are created or demolished and lets you apply phase specific filters to views so you can define how the project appears during various stages of work The foll...

Page 1474: ... in movement of the pinned element See Preventing Elements from Moving on page 311 plan A 2D drawing of a building model that shows the layout of walls rooms and other building components A floor plan presents a view of the building as though you are looking down on it from above with the roof and intervening levels removed A reflected ceiling plan is a drawing that shows the ceiling in a building...

Page 1475: ...see Plan Region on page 83 plan view A view of a floor plan or a reflected ceiling plan for a building model For more information see Plan Views on page 79 planting Vegetation used to create a landscape around a building design Revit Architecture provides a library of planting families You can also create or download additional plants For more information see Plants and Entourage on page 1139 Glos...

Page 1476: ...isplay in 3D views You can also specify the poche depth for a cross section of earth in topography elements In the following floor plan the poche for the walls is a solid fill pattern polyline A set of connected straight line segments Polylines typically define open loops See Export Rooms and Areas as Polylines on page 1283 1438 Glossary ...

Page 1477: ... one or more dependent views are based The dependent views remain synchronous with the primary view and other dependent views so that when view specific changes such as view scale and annotations are made in one view they are reflected in all views See Duplicate Dependent Views on page 144 profile A series of 2 dimensional lines and arcs that form a closed loop Use profiles to define cross section...

Page 1478: ...et of initial conditions for a project Revit Architecture provides several templates and you can create your own templates Any new project based on a template inherits all families settings such as units fill patterns line styles line weights and view scales and geometry from the template Templates use the file extension RTE See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 437 project view A represe...

Page 1479: ...itecture when you use the Beam tool to add beams between joists the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly In the following floor plan the dotted lines indicate purlins placed along the midpoints of the joists See Structural Usage of Beams on page 770 pushpin A user placed control that provides a quick way to allow or...

Page 1480: ...ilding R radial Arranged along a radius or arc In Revit Architecture when you create a radial array the elements in the array are arranged along a curve rail A hand rail or a horizontal bar extending between posts in a railing See Railings on page 680 railing A barrier consisting of horizontal rails supported by posts and balusters In Revit Architecture you can add railings as free standing compon...

Page 1481: ...w When you add a reference elevation to a project Revit Architecture does not create a new view for it Instead the reference elevation uses an existing elevation allowing you to indicate different areas that have identical elevations You can place a reference elevation in a plan or callout view For more information see Reference Elevation on page 88 reference label Text displayed in a callout tag ...

Page 1482: ...r Geometry Creation on page 344 reference plane A 2 dimensional plane used when designing families of model elements or placing elements in a building model See also reference line on page 1444 For more information see Reference Planes on page 1046 reference point A point in the current view that you can use for positioning or dimensioning a model element When you move the cursor near a reference ...

Page 1483: ...cing sheet and referencing detail occur in view properties and sheet properties You can create labels for these values and include them in callout tags or section tags to create a cross referencing documentation system for a Revit project See Referencing a Drafting View on page 1082 and Referencing a Callout View on page 1078 referring view A view in which the annotation symbol for the current vie...

Page 1484: ...9 resize To change the size of a model element For example in Revit Architecture you can resize a wall or a foundation to adjust to changing specifications See Resizing Elements on page 312 retaining wall A wall that holds back earth for example at the edge of a terrace or excavation In Revit Architecture you can specify that a wall type functions as a retaining wall in the type properties See Add...

Page 1485: ...ped like a cloud that indicates changes in a construction document In Revit Architecture you can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views The cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched For more information see Revision Clouds on page 1014 revision schedule A list of changes made to a building design or construction document A revision schedule displays in the title block ...

Page 1486: ...s and coordinates structural design and documentation revolve Solid geometry that turns revolves around an axis For example you can use the Revolve tool to design a dome roof a column or door knobs See Creating Solid Revolves on page 380 and Void Revolves on page 392 RFA The file format for a Revit family See family on page 1397 See Family Editor Basics on page 341 riser The vertical face of a ste...

Page 1487: ...e 1139 RTE The file type for a Revit project template See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 437 rule based filter A filter with user defined rules that determines the visibility graphics settings for model elements in a particular view For example you can create a rule based filter that displays all fire rated walls as solid red in a plan view to distinguish them from non fire rated walls...

Page 1488: ...ents in a project It is displayed in a schedule view Using Revit Architecture you can create many types of schedules including quantities material takeoffs annotation schedules revision schedules view lists and drawing lists See Schedule Views on page 124 scope box A user interface mechanism that controls the visibility of datum planes levels reference lines and grids in views When you add grids l...

Page 1489: ...when an element is selected In Revit Architecture a selected element displays in the selection color red by default and controls or handles indicate how the element can be manipulated or modified See Selecting Elements on page 269 selection box A user interface mechanism that you use to select elements within a defined area by dragging the cursor around them To create a selection box place the cur...

Page 1490: ...rsecting wall inserts The setback value allows you to place sweeps or reveals properly near window or door trims You can define a default setback for wall sweeps and wall reveals in their type properties setback 2 The legally required distance between the property line and buildings For example in the following site plan a red dashed line indicates the zoning setback setback 3 The distance from th...

Page 1491: ...aces shaded according to their material color settings and project light locations and with all non occluded edges drawn A default light source provides illumination for the shaded elements See Shading with Edges Model Graphics Style on page 203 shadow study See solar study on page 1458 shaft An opening that extends the entire height or through specified levels of a building cutting through floors...

Page 1492: ...d families Revit Architecture treats an instance of the nested family as a single item for selecting tagging and scheduling See also nested family on page 1428 For more information see Shared Families on page 410 shared parameters User defined fields that you add to families or projects and then share with other families and projects They are stored in a file independently of a family file or Revi...

Page 1493: ...e Applying or Removing a Line Style for a Silhouette Edge on page 205 sill The horizontal member at the bottom of a door or window frame In Revit Architecture you can specify a default sill height for a window type or a specific sill height for a window instance or door instance The sill height is the measurement from the floor up to the sill site The location or defined plot of ground for a build...

Page 1494: ... ceiling SKP The file format for projects created using Google SketchUp a general purpose modeling and visualization tool You can import SKP files into a Revit project See Importing SKP Files on page 1309 slab A section of solid concrete pavement roof or floor Slabs can be used as a combined floor and foundation system See Structural Slabs on page 864 slope An angled surface such as a roof or ramp...

Page 1495: ...ich Revit Architecture will jump when you are placing a component or sketching a line When you place a model element or sketch a line in a drawing Revit Architecture displays snap points and snap lines to assist in aligning elements or lines with existing geometry Snap points display in the drawing area as triangles squares and diamonds depending on the snap type Snap lines display as dashed green...

Page 1496: ...pact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site For more information see Solar Studies on page 1179 solid geometry A 3 dimensional shape used in a building model You can use the Family Editor to create solid geometry shapes to build families of model elements See Solid Geometry Tools on page 380 span direction The orientation of a structural slab 1458 Glossary ...

Page 1497: ...nd commands spot coordinate The North South and East West coordinates of an individual point with respect to the shared coordinate system for a group of linked Revit projects See Reporting North South East and West Spot Coordinates on page 230 spot elevation dimension The elevation of a selected point Use spot elevation dimensions to determine a point of elevation for ramps roads toposurfaces and ...

Page 1498: ... supports a vertical load in addition to its own weight Compare with architectural column on page 1371 For more information see Structural Columns on page 755 subcategory For a subcomponent of a family a property that defines its display the line weight line color and line pattern For example you can assign one subcategory to the wood trim of a window and another subcategory to the glass See Creat...

Page 1499: ...design The art of planning physical objects so they can be created and maintained in a way that supports the longevity of natural ecosystems and reserves It ranges from designing small objects for everyday use to designing buildings cities and the physical surface of the earth Revit Architecture provides predefined families of model elements that promote sustainable design including water tanks so...

Page 1500: ...to represent a door swing Symbolic lines are visible parallel to the view in which you sketch them You can control the visibility of symbolic lines on cut instances You can also control the visibility of symbolic lines based on the detail level of the view See Family Editor Commands on page 377 system family A Revit family that can be used as a building block for creating families Revit Architectu...

Page 1501: ...he distance at which a camera is aimed or directed See camera on page 1377 template A collection of settings that you can use as a starting point for projects families views and more See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 437 Family Templates on page 342 and View Templates on page 498 temporary dimension A dimension that Revit Architecture displays as you draw or place elements in a view T...

Page 1502: ...tation that consists of text and may include a leader line and arrow You can add text notes to a detail view drafting view or a sheet For more information see Text Notes on page 1027 tick mark The graphic shape used to represent the end of a dimension such as an arrow or a slash See Changing the Dimension Line Tick Mark on page 236 A floor plan that uses 2 types of tick marks title block A templat...

Page 1503: ...al surface of a step in a set of stairs triangulation The process of dividing a shape into triangles to determine its area as for a room or to approximate a curved surface as for a 3D shape See also tessellation on page 1464 For more information see Creating Room Area Reports on page 1290 and Toposurfaces on page 893 trim To shorten selected elements to meet a specified boundary See Trimming and E...

Page 1504: ...at you need By using the type catalog to load selected items from a family type you can reduce project size and limit the number of items listed in the Type Selector for that family which in turn improves productivity See Using Type Catalogs on page 376 Type catalog for a lumber family type parameters Settings that control the appearance or behavior of all elements of a particular family type Type...

Page 1505: ... the rate at which one shape is blended to another shape See Editing Vertex Connections on page 385 view See project view on page 1440 View Control Bar A panel of buttons providing quick access to functions that control the current view Use the View Control Bar to change the scale detail level model graphics style shadowing crop views and display of elements or categories in the view The View Cont...

Page 1506: ...emplates to different floor plans to display information in each plan according to its purpose See View Templates on page 498 view specific The characteristic of being visible in one project view only viewport A user interface mechanism that allows you to manipulate and activate a view that has been placed on a sheet When you activate a view through a viewport you can edit the model directly on th...

Page 1507: ... more walls In Revit Architecture you can specify the type of join between walls For more information see Wall Joins on page 580 wall reveal A decorative cutout in a wall For more information see Wall Reveals on page 599 Glossary 1469 ...

Page 1508: ...annotation elements See Opening Files from the Web Library on page 68 wireframe A model graphics style in which Revit Architecture displays the image of the model with all edges and lines drawn but no surfaces See Wireframe Model Graphics Style on page 201 witness line An annotation that indicates the distance between 2 points or elements in a building model In Revit Architecture you can change th...

Page 1509: ... a discrete functional area such as interior exterior or site When you enable worksharing you can divide a project into worksets with different team members responsible for each workset For more information see Setting Up Worksets on page 1191 worksharing A design method in which different team members are responsible for designing different functional areas of the same project file See Working in...

Page 1510: ...eringWheels zoom moves up and down perpendicular to the view To zoom in is to increase the magnification making the building appear larger To zoom out is to decrease the magnification making the building appear smaller Zoom commands are available on the View menu 2d and 3D SteeringWheels and the View toolbar shown below See Zooming Project Views on page 193 1472 Glossary ...

Page 1511: ...ng model displayed in the Revit interface For example floor plans and elevations are 2D views Compare with 3D view on page 1369 See Project Views on page 79 3D model A 3 dimensional 3D representation of a building or other design See also building information modelling BIM on page 1376 3D view A 3 dimensional 3D representation of a building model displayed in the Revit interface Compare with 2D vi...

Page 1512: ...with 6 sides Compare with polymesh on page 1439 Revit Architecture can import ACIS objects contained in DWG DXF and SAT files See Importing ACIS Objects on page 1311 Revit Architecture can export 3D shapes as ACIS solids See Solids 3D Views Only on page 1282 annotation A 2D view specific element that you use to document a building or design For example symbols tags keynotes and dimensions are anno...

Page 1513: ...round structural columns and for decorative applications Compare with structural column on page 1460 For more information see Architectural Columns on page 691 area Usable space that is defined by walls or boundary lines or both In Revit Architecture you can perform an area analysis to define spatial relationships in a building model See Area Analysis on page 945 Glossary 1475 ...

Page 1514: ...sign area types to individual areas in an area plan For more information see Area Schemes on page 945 array An arrangement of elements in a building model For example in a large office you can create an array of desks and chairs In a structural design you can create an array of beams or columns You can create a linear array in which the elements are distributed evenly along a line or a radial arra...

Page 1515: ...2 The following image shows a floor attached to the structural layer of a wall attached detail group A group of view specific elements that are associated with a model group For example an attached detail group may be comprised of door tags and window tags See Editing Elements in Groups on page 284 AutoCAD An Autodesk product AutoCAD enables you to create visualize document and share your ideas fr...

Page 1516: ...nformation see Beams on page 768 bearing wall A wall that supports a vertical load in addition to its own weight Compare with non bearing wall on page 1429 For more information see Structural Walls on page 839 BIM See building information modelling BIM on page 1376 blend A combination blending of 2 shapes to create a 3D shape You can create blends using solid geometry and void geometry For example...

Page 1517: ...iple sections or break a crop region into sections In the following elevation view the blue Z shaped break controls allow you to break the crop region into sections break line The Z shaped line used in a drafting view or detail view to obscure parts of the drawing to focus the drawing on a particular area The following drafting view uses break lines above and below the section to obscure less intr...

Page 1518: ...tation of information from the same underlying building model database For more information see What Is a Project on page 73 Building Maker A conceptual design and modeling environment that takes any overall building form described conceptually and maps it to building elements such as roofs curtain walls floors and walls See Massing Studies and Building Maker on page 518 building model A design cr...

Page 1519: ...ecture the callout appears in a separate view In the callout you can add annotations and detail which will not display in the parent view In the parent view the callout area is marked with a callout tag The following views show a callout tag in a section view and the detail view for the callout For more information see Callout Views on page 98 camera A visualization tool that you use to create a 3...

Page 1520: ...group of elements that you use to model or document a building design For example categories of model elements include walls windows columns and beams Categories of annotation elements include dimensions tags and text notes Categories are organized into families of elements with similar purposes and characteristics Families are further organized into types as shown ceiling plan A drawing that show...

Page 1521: ...entral file so that other users can see their work For more information see Working in a Team on page 1189 chain A linked set of lines or walls When drawing walls or lines in a building model you can simplify the process by drawing a chain You can also select a chain of lines or walls to manipulate them simultaneously clean To resolve joins between 2 or more host elements that share a common face ...

Page 1522: ...otted lines define the clip planes for an elevation view closed loop A sketched line that connects to itself creating a 2 dimensional shape A closed loop cannot contain coincident or intersecting segments In Revit Architecture you sketch closed loops to create floors ceilings plan regions openings in walls and roofs solid extrusions and other parts of a building design In the following sketch a cl...

Page 1523: ...y department set the Department parameter for each room to the desired value and create a color scheme based on the values of the Department parameter You can then add a color scheme legend to identify the department that each color represents For more information see Color Schemes on page 956 column A vertical element in a building Architectural columns add visual interest to a design See Archite...

Page 1524: ...ivered and installed on site rather than built in place Also referred to as a hosted component For example windows doors and furniture are components In contrast walls floors and roofs are built in place these are called hosts or host elements See Hosted Components on page 731 compound wall A wall that consists of multiple vertical layers Each layer can use a different material such as concrete in...

Page 1525: ...ors so they can create the building Revit Architecture generates construction documents using the information about the building model stored in the project file along with user added annotation detailing and layout information For more information see Preparing Construction Documents on page 967 Construction Specifications Institute CSI An association that provides technical information standards...

Page 1526: ...ch a control to change the shape of the walls Other controls allows you to flip lock rotate view and change the shape or size of elements See Controls and Shape Handles on page 279 coping 1 In structural design the process of cutting a piece of steel from a beam to fit it to a column Beam before coping is applied left and after coping is applied right coping 2 In architectural design a finishing o...

Page 1527: ... core or from the interior face or exterior face of the core See Vertically Compound Walls on page 567 and Dimensioning to Core in Compound Structures on page 226 crop To limit the boundaries of a view omitting parts of the building model from the view See also crop region crop region A user interface mechanism that defines the boundaries of a view Elements in the building model that are outside t...

Page 1528: ...e made of glass brick or other materials See Curtain Walls Curtain Grids and Mullions on page 700 cut line style A graphic style applied to an element when a view such as a section view cuts through the element so that you are seeing a representation of its interior surface Compare with projection line style on page 1440 For the cut line style of an element you can specify the line weight color an...

Page 1529: ...t a join This is the visible gap seen in a steel beam connection within the Revit project See Beam Cutback on page 782 datum A non physical item that is used to establish project context Also called a datum element Datum elements include levels grids and reference planes For example the following image shows a grid which is used for the placement of columns and other model elements The grid is not...

Page 1530: ...view scale and annotations are made in one view they are reflected in all views For more information see Duplicate Dependent Views on page 144 Design Bar A part of the Revit user interface that contains tools for designing a building model The Design Bar appears in the left pane of the Revit window Click a tab such as Drafting or Modelling to see tools for that design function Right click the Desi...

Page 1531: ...l level A Revit setting that determines the amount of geometry displayed in a view Detail level settings include coarse medium and fine where coarse shows the least detail and fine shows the most detail The following image illustrates the 3 detail levels for a desk For more information see Detail Level on page 503 Glossary 1493 ...

Page 1532: ...n page 1094 detail view A view of a model that displays as a callout or section in other views This type of view typically represents the model in finer detail than shown in the parent view It is used to add more information to specific parts of the model A detail view reflects geometry of the building model If a related part of the building model changes the detail view updates to reflect the cha...

Page 1533: ... more information see Dimensions on page 213 discipline A functional area such as structural mechanical electrical or architectural or an area of expertise such as architecture structural engineering or construction In a Revit project you can assign disciplines to categories and to views You can then control the visibility or graphic display of elements in a view based on assigned disciplines For ...

Page 1534: ...ed on a sheet However a drafting view does not reflect the actual building model and it does not update when the model changes Compare with detail view on page 1390 The following image shows a drafting view created using the 2D detailing tools in Revit Architecture It is not a 3D view For more information see Drafting Views on page 1079 drag control A graphical icon in the Revit drawing area that ...

Page 1535: ...nts as DWF files the files can be marked up electronically using a program such as Autodesk Design Review You can link the markups back into Revit Architecture to see the desired changes See Linking DWF Markup Files on page 1321 DWG A drawing file format supported by AutoCAD and other CAD applications Revit Architecture can import and export DWG files See Interoperability on page 1273 DXF Drawing ...

Page 1536: ...permission to borrow is automatically granted See Borrowing Elements on page 1198 element properties Parameters or settings that control the appearance or behavior of elements in a project Element properties are the combination of instance parameters and type parameters To view or change element properties select the element in the drawing area and on the Options Bar click Element Properties For m...

Page 1537: ...ourage An architectural term that refers to the landscaping and other environmental features shown in a rendering of a building For example entourage can include plants trees people cars and signs Revit Architecture provides a library of entourage families and you can create or load additional entourage into a project For more information see Plants and Entourage on page 1139 and Decals on page 11...

Page 1538: ...3D geometry for a building model You begin a solid extrusion by sketching 2D shapes on a plane Revit Architecture then extrudes the sketch between a start point and an endpoint See Creating Solid Extrusions on page 386 You can also create a void extrusion by cutting a shape out of a 3D solid See Void Extrusions on page 390 face A surface of a model element or mass You can apply paint materials and...

Page 1539: ...nts and annotation elements For more information see Building with Elements on page 73 and Creating Your Own Components Families on page 341 family type Also referred to as simply a type See family on page 1397 and type on page 1466 far clip plane The clip plane that is at the side of the view farthest from the start point of an elevation view a section view a 3D view or a walkthrough view In the ...

Page 1540: ...r example in the following drawing the red area indicates the cut volume and the blue area indicates the fill volume required to level the site for a building See Reporting Cut and Fill Volumes on a Site on page 901 filled region A 2D view specific graphic You can use filled regions to represent various surfaces such as concrete or compacted earth You can add a filled region to a detail view a dra...

Page 1541: ...ters in the following ways To select or deselect elements in a view See Selecting Elements Using a Filter on page 271 To override the graphic display and control the visibility of elements in a view See Controlling Visibility and Graphic Display of Elements Using Filters on page 156 To control the display of elements based on their phase status new existing demolished or temporary See Phase Filter...

Page 1542: ...a flip control floor area face See mass floor floor plan A 2D drawing of a building model that shows the layout of walls and other building components In Revit Architecture a floor plan is also referred to as a floor plan view See Plan Views on page 79 focal point The point in the distance on which a camera is focusing See camera on page 1377 footing The base of a foundation that rests directly on...

Page 1543: ...oof on each side formula A mathematical equation used to determine the dimension of an object or a calculated value for a schedule Formulas allow you to create parameters that depend on other parameters for their values For example you can create a width parameter that equals twice the height of an object The following type properties include a formula for the sill length of a new window family Se...

Page 1544: ...tion An elevation view that shows the structural framing of a building model You can work in a framing elevation when adding vertical bracing to the model or for any task that requires quick work plane alignment to a grid or to a named reference plane See Framing Elevation Views on page 89 full explode The process of completely disassembling an import symbol which represents imported geometry into...

Page 1545: ...milies so that the annotations display in the project This is useful if you want to include a label with a model family and display that label in the project See Adding a Generic Annotation on page 423 and Loading Generic Annotations into Model Families on page 422 generic model A family of geometry that does not fit into any of the other pre defined categories such as columns roofs and floors In ...

Page 1546: ...page 1033 ground plane A horizontal plane that represents ground level in a building model In Revit Architecture you can specify the ground plane when creating a solar study for 2D and 3D views See Solar Studies on page 1179 group A defined set of elements that can be placed as a unit in a building design Grouping elements is useful when you need to create entities that represent repeating units o...

Page 1547: ...Roof Gutters on page 629 halftone A display color that blends the line color of an element half way with the background color of the view For example the following image shows some elements in halftone gray and others in black You can specify the halftone display properties using the Visibility Graphics dialog See Visibility and Graphic Display in Project Views on page 150 Glossary 1509 ...

Page 1548: ... level For example in a floor plan you can double click a section head to go to the section view In the following floor plan the blue symbol is a section head head 3 For windows and doors the piece that goes across the top of the window or door to create the rough opening head height For windows and doors a measurement from the floor to the top of the rough opening hidden element An element that y...

Page 1549: ...ht To move the cursor over an object in the drawing area so that Revit Architecture displays the object s outline in a different weight bold and color such as gray instead of black A description of the element displays on the status bar at the bottom of the Revit window After a brief delay the element description also displays in a tooltip near the cursor This highlighting indicates that the objec...

Page 1550: ... Revit Architecture See Import Link on page 1306 import symbol A Revit element that contains all objects such as blocks and xrefs from an imported drawing When you move the cursor over the imported objects Revit Architecture shows information about the import symbol You can explode an import symbol to convert it into individual Revit elements See Exploding Imported Geometry on page 1322 imported c...

Page 1551: ...tp www iai international org infill element An insert that fills patches a hole in a host element after changes are made during different phases of a building project For example if you remove a window from a wall during a demolition phase Revit Architecture fills the hole with an infill element By default the infill element has the same properties as the host element the wall The following illust...

Page 1552: ...d exporting a Revit project to a file format that can be used by other applications For more information see Interoperability on page 1273 isolate To display only a certain element or type of element so that you can work with it in a particular view without being distracted by other elements in the design See Temporarily Hiding or Isolating Elements or Element Categories on page 161 A roof that ha...

Page 1553: ... geometry joist A beam that supports a floor or ceiling Joists are generally made of wood steel or concrete They are often set parallel from wall to wall or across or abutting girders See Structural Usage of Beams on page 770 Glossary 1515 ...

Page 1554: ...on see Key Schedules on page 125 Key schedule listing finishes for different types of rooms In a room schedule assigning a room type to an individual room keynote legend A list of keynote numbers and the corresponding keynote text See keynoting If you choose to annotate model elements using keynote numbers only you can use a keynote legend to provide descriptive text for each keynote number By usi...

Page 1555: ... 2 In AutoCAD a mechanism for defining organizing and controlling the display of drawing objects When you export a Revit project to a CAD format you can create a layer mapping file to map Revit categories and subcategories to CAD layers See Exporting Layers on page 1285 layer mapping file A text file that maps each Revit category or subcategory to a preconfigured layer name for the CAD software Fo...

Page 1556: ...on documents level A finite horizontal plane that acts as a reference for level hosted elements such as roofs floors and ceilings In Revit Architecture you define a level for each vertical height or story within a building or other needed reference of the building for example first floor top of wall or bottom of foundation You can add levels in a section or elevation view For more information see ...

Page 1557: ...of templates detail components entourage materials and families of model elements and annotation elements Revit Architecture provides some libraries Other libraries are available on the Internet Family categories in the Imperial library line pattern A series of dashes or dots alternating with blank spaces Glossary 1519 ...

Page 1558: ... line of a particular pattern weight and color used to indicate different effects For example in the following site plan a red dashed line indicates the zoning setback Revit Architecture predefines several line styles and uses them for default purposes You can change these and add your own line styles to suit your needs and preferences For more information see Line Styles on page 485 line weight T...

Page 1559: ...ng with Linked Models on page 1213 listening dimensions A Revit feature that allows you to specify a value for a dimension as you sketch an element in a view You specify a start point for the element start sketching in the desired direction type the exact dimension desired and press ENTER Revit Architecture draws the element to the specified length The following image shows the text box that appea...

Page 1560: ...f the wall the wall centerline core centerline interior or exterior wall face or interior or exterior face of wall core In the following illustration the green dashed lines indicate the location line of the wall See Walls on page 561 lock To secure a dimension or the location of an element so that it cannot be changed When you select a locked dimension or element a lock control displays next to it...

Page 1561: ...chitecture to display the desired changes See Linking DWF Markup Files on page 1321 masking region A defined area that obscures elements in a view Masking regions are useful when you are creating a model family from an imported 2D DWG file and you need the model element to obscure other elements when placed in a view You can also use them to hide parts of a drawing For more information see Masking...

Page 1562: ...esign mass families or in place masses See Conceptual Design with Massing Studies on page 517 mass face See face on page 1396 mass floor An interior horizontal surface in a mass During the conceptual design stage of a building project a mass floor represents a story in the building You can divide masses into mass floors to perform various types of analysis on the design See Analyzing a Conceptual ...

Page 1563: ... conceptual design is complete you can add building elements directly to these shapes See Conceptual Design with Massing Studies on page 517 Massing study used as the basis for a building design Final building design matchline A sketch line that indicates where to split a view for a dependent view as shown See Duplicate Dependent Views on page 144 Glossary 1525 ...

Page 1564: ...ny Revit family Material takeoff schedules have all the functionality and characteristics of other schedule views but they allow you to show more detail about the assembly of a component Any material that is applied to a component within Revit Architecture can be scheduled For more information see Material Takeoff Schedules on page 127 Max See 3ds Max on page 1370 menu bar A user interface mechani...

Page 1565: ...ference plane the wall flips opposite the original wall You can pick the mirror axis or draw a temporary axis Use the Mirror tool to flip a selected element or to make a copy of an element and reverse its position in one step The following image shows the results of mirroring and copying a door using the center wall as the mirror axis See Mirroring Elements on page 310 miter A joint at a 45 degree...

Page 1566: ... following image shows only model elements It does not include annotation elements such as dimensions or text notes or datum elements such as grid lines or levels See Building with Elements on page 73 model graphics style A method of displaying model elements in views For example you can choose to display a model using wireframe hidden lines shading or shading with edges You can specify the model ...

Page 1567: ... in 3D space and is visible in all views of a Revit project You can use model lines to represent 3D geometry in a building design such as cords or cables that secure a tarp You can sketch straight curved arc circular fillet and tangent lines Compare with detail line on page 1390 and symbolic line on page 1462 The following truss uses a model line to represent the beam stick symbol For more informa...

Page 1568: ...ore information see Model Text on page 727 modelling The process of representing a design See also building information modelling BIM on page 1376 moment The amount of rotation at an axis caused by downward force applied to a beam at a distance from its supporting members A moment connection is a connection that is designed to transfer moment and other forces between a beam and its supporting memb...

Page 1569: ...ype properties You can also specify the material for monolithic stairs See Stair Type Properties on page 671 mullion In Revit Architecture a vertical or horizontal strip between panels of a curtain wall or curtain system For more information see Mullions on page 709 Glossary 1531 ...

Page 1570: ...ample various window types or different categories for example an exterior door and two lighting fixtures You create nested families using the Family Editor The following nested family includes a door 2 sidelights and 2 lighting fixtures For more information see Nested Families on page 407 See also shared family on page 1454 1532 Glossary ...

Page 1571: ... referred to as an annotation schedule Note blocks are useful for listing notes that are applied to elements in a project For more information see Annotation Schedules Note Blocks on page 127 Sample note block NURB surface Non uniform rational B spline A mathematical model commonly used in computer graphics for representing and generating curves and surfaces In Revit Architecture you can create ro...

Page 1572: ...e element or line will move or a new element or line will be created For example when creating walls you might specify an offset of 5 meters When you select an existing wall Revit Architecture draws a new wall 5 meters from the selected wall The following illustration shows that when you move the cursor near the outside of a chain of walls Revit Architecture draws a preview line to show the offset...

Page 1573: ...he orientation of a compound wall to reverse the order of its layers origin A fixed starting point or the point in a coordinate system where the axes intersect In Revit Architecture you use an origin for many functions such as positioning a linked project creating a custom fill pattern positioning a group resizing walls or sketching lines for a new family The origin of each element is defined in t...

Page 1574: ...ame and window frame are painted different colors See Applying a Material to an Element on page 338 pan In a 3D context primarily when using 3D SteeringWheels pan dollies the camera left and right In a 2D context pan scrolls the view If you are using pan with an active view on a sheet pan scrolls the sheet view not the active view on the sheet See Navigating Views on page 169 panel In Revit Archit...

Page 1575: ...ration on page 149 and Datum Extents and Visibility on page 1048 parameter A setting that determines the appearance or behavior of an element type or view Also called a property See Element Properties Dialog on page 75 and View Properties on page 210 parametric Controlled by parameters In a Revit project parameters define the relationships between elements of the building model These relationships...

Page 1576: ...ange In Revit Architecture you can print construction documents as PDF files You can then share the construction documents with team members view them online or print them See Printing to PDF on page 1024 permanent dimension A dimension that specifies a particular size for an element or a distance between elements or points Permanent dimensions always display in the view in which they are created ...

Page 1577: ...n page 109 phase A stage or time period in the construction process of a building project Typical phases include existing construction demolition remodeling and new construction Revit Architecture tracks the phase in which views or components are created or demolished and lets you apply phase specific filters to views so you can define how the project appears during various stages of work The foll...

Page 1578: ... in movement of the pinned element See Preventing Elements from Moving on page 311 plan A 2D drawing of a building model that shows the layout of walls rooms and other building components A floor plan presents a view of the building as though you are looking down on it from above with the roof and intervening levels removed A reflected ceiling plan is a drawing that shows the ceiling in a building...

Page 1579: ...see Plan Region on page 83 plan view A view of a floor plan or a reflected ceiling plan for a building model For more information see Plan Views on page 79 planting Vegetation used to create a landscape around a building design Revit Architecture provides a library of planting families You can also create or download additional plants For more information see Plants and Entourage on page 1139 Glos...

Page 1580: ...isplay in 3D views You can also specify the poche depth for a cross section of earth in topography elements In the following floor plan the poche for the walls is a solid fill pattern polyline A set of connected straight line segments Polylines typically define open loops See Export Rooms and Areas as Polylines on page 1283 1542 Glossary ...

Page 1581: ... one or more dependent views are based The dependent views remain synchronous with the primary view and other dependent views so that when view specific changes such as view scale and annotations are made in one view they are reflected in all views See Duplicate Dependent Views on page 144 profile A series of 2 dimensional lines and arcs that form a closed loop Use profiles to define cross section...

Page 1582: ...et of initial conditions for a project Revit Architecture provides several templates and you can create your own templates Any new project based on a template inherits all families settings such as units fill patterns line styles line weights and view scales and geometry from the template Templates use the file extension RTE See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 437 project view A represe...

Page 1583: ...itecture when you use the Beam tool to add beams between joists the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly In the following floor plan the dotted lines indicate purlins placed along the midpoints of the joists See Structural Usage of Beams on page 770 pushpin A user placed control that provides a quick way to allow or...

Page 1584: ...ilding radial Arranged along a radius or arc In Revit Architecture when you create a radial array the elements in the array are arranged along a curve rail A hand rail or a horizontal bar extending between posts in a railing See Railings on page 680 railing A barrier consisting of horizontal rails supported by posts and balusters In Revit Architecture you can add railings as free standing componen...

Page 1585: ...w When you add a reference elevation to a project Revit Architecture does not create a new view for it Instead the reference elevation uses an existing elevation allowing you to indicate different areas that have identical elevations You can place a reference elevation in a plan or callout view For more information see Reference Elevation on page 88 reference label Text displayed in a callout tag ...

Page 1586: ...r Geometry Creation on page 344 reference plane A 2 dimensional plane used when designing families of model elements or placing elements in a building model See also reference line on page 1444 For more information see Reference Planes on page 1046 reference point A point in the current view that you can use for positioning or dimensioning a model element When you move the cursor near a reference ...

Page 1587: ...cing sheet and referencing detail occur in view properties and sheet properties You can create labels for these values and include them in callout tags or section tags to create a cross referencing documentation system for a Revit project See Referencing a Drafting View on page 1082 and Referencing a Callout View on page 1078 referring view A view in which the annotation symbol for the current vie...

Page 1588: ...9 resize To change the size of a model element For example in Revit Architecture you can resize a wall or a foundation to adjust to changing specifications See Resizing Elements on page 312 retaining wall A wall that holds back earth for example at the edge of a terrace or excavation In Revit Architecture you can specify that a wall type functions as a retaining wall in the type properties See Add...

Page 1589: ...ped like a cloud that indicates changes in a construction document In Revit Architecture you can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views The cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched For more information see Revision Clouds on page 1014 revision schedule A list of changes made to a building design or construction document A revision schedule displays in the title block ...

Page 1590: ...s and coordinates structural design and documentation revolve Solid geometry that turns revolves around an axis For example you can use the Revolve tool to design a dome roof a column or door knobs See Creating Solid Revolves on page 380 and Void Revolves on page 392 RFA The file format for a Revit family See family on page 1397 See Family Editor Basics on page 341 riser The vertical face of a ste...

Page 1591: ...ge 1139 RTE The file type for a Revit project template See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 437 rule based filter A filter with user defined rules that determines the visibility graphics settings for model elements in a particular view For example you can create a rule based filter that displays all fire rated walls as solid red in a plan view to distinguish them from non fire rated wall...

Page 1592: ...ents in a project It is displayed in a schedule view Using Revit Architecture you can create many types of schedules including quantities material takeoffs annotation schedules revision schedules view lists and drawing lists See Schedule Views on page 124 scope box A user interface mechanism that controls the visibility of datum planes levels reference lines and grids in views When you add grids l...

Page 1593: ...when an element is selected In Revit Architecture a selected element displays in the selection color red by default and controls or handles indicate how the element can be manipulated or modified See Selecting Elements on page 269 selection box A user interface mechanism that you use to select elements within a defined area by dragging the cursor around them To create a selection box place the cur...

Page 1594: ...rsecting wall inserts The setback value allows you to place sweeps or reveals properly near window or door trims You can define a default setback for wall sweeps and wall reveals in their type properties setback 2 The legally required distance between the property line and buildings For example in the following site plan a red dashed line indicates the zoning setback setback 3 The distance from th...

Page 1595: ...aces shaded according to their material color settings and project light locations and with all non occluded edges drawn A default light source provides illumination for the shaded elements See Shading with Edges Model Graphics Style on page 203 shadow study See solar study on page 1458 shaft An opening that extends the entire height or through specified levels of a building cutting through floors...

Page 1596: ...d families Revit Architecture treats an instance of the nested family as a single item for selecting tagging and scheduling See also nested family on page 1428 For more information see Shared Families on page 410 shared parameters User defined fields that you add to families or projects and then share with other families and projects They are stored in a file independently of a family file or Revi...

Page 1597: ...e Applying or Removing a Line Style for a Silhouette Edge on page 205 sill The horizontal member at the bottom of a door or window frame In Revit Architecture you can specify a default sill height for a window type or a specific sill height for a window instance or door instance The sill height is the measurement from the floor up to the sill site The location or defined plot of ground for a build...

Page 1598: ... ceiling SKP The file format for projects created using Google SketchUp a general purpose modeling and visualization tool You can import SKP files into a Revit project See Importing SKP Files on page 1309 slab A section of solid concrete pavement roof or floor Slabs can be used as a combined floor and foundation system See Structural Slabs on page 864 slope An angled surface such as a roof or ramp...

Page 1599: ...ich Revit Architecture will jump when you are placing a component or sketching a line When you place a model element or sketch a line in a drawing Revit Architecture displays snap points and snap lines to assist in aligning elements or lines with existing geometry Snap points display in the drawing area as triangles squares and diamonds depending on the snap type Snap lines display as dashed green...

Page 1600: ...pact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site For more information see Solar Studies on page 1179 solid geometry A 3 dimensional shape used in a building model You can use the Family Editor to create solid geometry shapes to build families of model elements See Solid Geometry Tools on page 380 span direction The orientation of a structural slab 1562 Glossary ...

Page 1601: ...nd commands spot coordinate The North South and East West coordinates of an individual point with respect to the shared coordinate system for a group of linked Revit projects See Reporting North South East and West Spot Coordinates on page 230 spot elevation dimension The elevation of a selected point Use spot elevation dimensions to determine a point of elevation for ramps roads toposurfaces and ...

Page 1602: ... supports a vertical load in addition to its own weight Compare with architectural column on page 1371 For more information see Structural Columns on page 755 subcategory For a subcomponent of a family a property that defines its display the line weight line color and line pattern For example you can assign one subcategory to the wood trim of a window and another subcategory to the glass See Creat...

Page 1603: ...design The art of planning physical objects so they can be created and maintained in a way that supports the longevity of natural ecosystems and reserves It ranges from designing small objects for everyday use to designing buildings cities and the physical surface of the earth Revit Architecture provides predefined families of model elements that promote sustainable design including water tanks so...

Page 1604: ...le parallel to the view in which you sketch them You can control the visibility of symbolic lines on cut instances You can also control the visibility of symbolic lines based on the detail level of the view See Family Editor Commands on page 377 system family A Revit family that can be used as a building block for creating families Revit Architecture provides system families for floors walls ceili...

Page 1605: ...See camera on page 1377 template A collection of settings that you can use as a starting point for projects families views and more See Creating a Custom Project Template on page 437 Family Templates on page 342 and View Templates on page 498 temporary dimension A dimension that Revit Architecture displays as you draw or place elements in a view Temporary dimensions can help you to position an ele...

Page 1606: ...tation that consists of text and may include a leader line and arrow You can add text notes to a detail view drafting view or a sheet For more information see Text Notes on page 1027 tick mark The graphic shape used to represent the end of a dimension such as an arrow or a slash See Changing the Dimension Line Tick Mark on page 236 A floor plan that uses 2 types of tick marks title block A templat...

Page 1607: ...al surface of a step in a set of stairs triangulation The process of dividing a shape into triangles to determine its area as for a room or to approximate a curved surface as for a 3D shape See also tessellation on page 1464 For more information see Creating Room Area Reports on page 1290 and Toposurfaces on page 893 trim To shorten selected elements to meet a specified boundary See Trimming and E...

Page 1608: ... a family type you can reduce project size and limit the number of items listed in the Type Selector for that family which in turn improves productivity See Using Type Catalogs on page 376 Type catalog for a lumber family type parameters Settings that control the appearance or behavior of all elements of a particular family type Type parameters are also called type properties The instance paramete...

Page 1609: ...access to functions that control the current view Use the View Control Bar to change the scale detail level model graphics style shadowing crop views and display of elements or categories in the view The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit drawing area For more information see View Control Bar on page 62 view depth A horizontal plane that helps to define the view range in a floo...

Page 1610: ...ge 498 view specific The characteristic of being visible in one project view only viewport A user interface mechanism that allows you to manipulate and activate a view that has been placed on a sheet When you activate a view through a viewport you can edit the model directly on the sheet For more information see Sheets on page 968 and Viewports on page 995 VIZ An Autodesk product VIZ is a 3D model...

Page 1611: ... more walls In Revit Architecture you can specify the type of join between walls For more information see Wall Joins on page 580 wall reveal A decorative cutout in a wall For more information see Wall Reveals on page 599 Glossary 1573 ...

Page 1612: ...annotation elements See Opening Files from the Web Library on page 68 wireframe A model graphics style in which Revit Architecture displays the image of the model with all edges and lines drawn but no surfaces See Wireframe Model Graphics Style on page 201 witness line An annotation that indicates the distance between 2 points or elements in a building model In Revit Architecture you can change th...

Page 1613: ...ly a discrete functional area such as interior exterior or site When you enable worksharing you can divide a project into worksets with different team members responsible for each workset For more information see Setting Up Worksets on page 1191 worksharing A design method in which different team members are responsible for designing different functional areas of the same project file See Working ...

Page 1614: ...eringWheels zoom moves up and down perpendicular to the view To zoom in is to increase the magnification making the building appear larger To zoom out is to decrease the magnification making the building appear smaller Zoom commands are available on the View menu 2d and 3D SteeringWheels and the View toolbar shown below See Zooming Project Views on page 193 1576 Glossary ...

Page 1615: ...ent 451 alpha channel 1170 alphabetic sequence for revision numbers 1014 altitude 1182 aluminum 472 anchor symbol 223 angular dimensions 218 347 animations 1185 solar studies 1185 annotation crop regions 163 165 166 specifying offset from the model crop region 166 annotation schedules 980 sheets and 980 annotation styles 491 492 arrowheads 491 dimensions 491 loaded tags 492 text notes 491 annotati...

Page 1616: ...ificial light 1166 Artificial Lights dialog 1136 1137 Assign Layers command 571 Attach Top Base command 579 attached detail groups 284 287 291 creating 287 detaching from a model group 291 attached end leader 1064 audit option 68 AutoCAD 1273 1279 1308 1315 1318 entities 1279 formats 1273 1308 1315 drag and drop 1308 exporting to 1273 fonts 1315 importing 1308 linked files 1318 overrides 1279 auto...

Page 1617: ...ding elements 543 creating from mass instances 543 Building Maker 518 building model 73 1297 specifying building type 1297 building pads 902 905 adding 903 cut and fill volume for 902 modifying 904 properties 905 sloping 904 bump patterns 468 476 Buzzsaw publishing 1304 1305 adding a location 1305 DWF files 1305 DWG files 1305 By Host View 1219 By Linked View 1219 C C 1348 1351 macro examples 1348...

Page 1618: ...64 modifying 961 removing the display of 962 colors 463 469 476 514 1119 1126 1174 color filters 1119 color preset 1126 color temperature 469 1126 dimming lamp color temperature shift 1119 filter color 469 image files for 476 initial color of light sources 1119 1126 materials and 463 modifying 514 new 514 render appearances and 476 render performance and 1174 setting 514 colour See color colours S...

Page 1619: ...edules 138 curtain elements 277 selecting 277 curtain grids 700 704 705 placing 704 705 snapping 704 curtain host 277 278 selecting mullions 278 selecting panels 277 curtain systems 548 550 554 705 716 717 adding faces 554 by face 548 717 grid placement 705 on nurb surfaces 550 curtain wall doors 418 curtain wall panel family 416 417 starting 417 curtain wall panels 711 715 716 joining 715 merging...

Page 1620: ...iderations 1255 constraints and 1255 copying 1248 dedicated views 1241 1251 1252 deleting 1249 Design Option Edit mode 1245 detailing 1249 documenting 1249 duplicating 1248 editing 1244 elements deleted 1260 elements in 1248 errors 1260 Exclude Options 1247 groups and 1256 hosted components and 1256 1260 incorporating into main model 1251 levels and 1255 main model elements and 1246 Make Primary c...

Page 1621: ...cking 222 model pattern lines 454 modifying 235 moving temporary witness lines 233 ordinate 219 permanent 214 properties 215 238 radial 218 spot elevation 227 temporary 213 497 temporary to permanent 214 text size 238 tick marks 236 type 213 units custom 226 unlocking 222 vertical 217 witness line control 234 dimming lamp color temperature shift 1119 Dimming parameter 1134 disallow complex join 58...

Page 1622: ...hecking a request 1200 granting a request 1199 element categories 152 overriding graphic display of 152 element ID number 1332 finding 1332 locating 1332 selecting 1332 element keynote 1061 elements 65 73 76 151 160 280 281 284 300 304 309 312 461 462 917 918 1195 1217 1228 1263 1267 1270 adding to worksets 1195 classification of 73 cutting 304 demolishing 1270 editing in groups 284 flipping 280 2...

Page 1623: ...age 1289 Export Layers 1285 exposure settings 1168 1169 exterior light 1166 exterior surface area 523 525 533 540 exterior walls 562 563 603 842 properties 603 842 external references 1307 importing vs linking 1307 extruded roofs 609 611 614 aligning 614 editing the work plane 609 end point 611 plan profile 610 rehosting 609 resizing 614 start point 611 extrusion cuts 390 extrusions 386 387 396 pr...

Page 1624: ...1 creating 369 linking 421 modifying 371 family subcategory 349 setting 349 family templates 371 family types 74 76 77 348 349 355 366 adding 76 copying between projects 355 creating 366 creating within family editor 349 creating within project 349 parameters of 76 previewing 77 properties of 76 setting 366 Family Types command 377 FAQ 1364 for macros 1364 far clip plane 87 cutting by 87 far clipp...

Page 1625: ...147 framing elevation 89 bracing 89 work plane 89 free end leader 1064 frequently asked questions 1364 about macros 1364 From Room 130 full ellipse 260 furniture 1146 furniture families 424 425 creating 424 starting 425 G gable roofs 633 gbXML 1296 1297 exporting 1296 specifying building type 1297 specifying zip code 1297 gbXML settings 439 generic annotations 422 generic materials 469 475 generic...

Page 1626: ...1256 1260 changing hosts 747 design options and 1256 1260 HTML version of project 1290 I i drop 1308 IDE 1344 1348 1355 1364 1367 Application object 1351 building macros 1348 C application level examples 1348 C document level examples 1351 creating macros 1344 debugging macros 1352 frequently asked questions 1364 integrating macros 1355 related information 1367 running macros 1349 samples on SDK 1...

Page 1627: ... 76 243 246 spot coordinates 246 spot elevation 243 instances 74 76 133 parameters of 76 properties of 76 schedules and 133 insulation 1073 Integrated Development Environment See IDE interface 51 52 63 shortcuts 63 interference checking 1228 interior light 1166 interior tick marks 236 interior wall properties 842 interior walls 562 563 603 properties 603 intersecting geometry 1285 isolated footing...

Page 1628: ...tory 1041 visibility controlling 1053 library 68 351 web library 68 license plates 1145 licensing 4 14 borrowing 13 combining files 9 contact information 6 distributed license server 4 10 license file obtaining 6 license file setting up 7 license server configuring 8 license server reporting 12 LMTools 5 Network License Activation utility 6 Network License Manager 5 network licensing client setup ...

Page 1629: ...486 callout tags and 106 changing in a view 326 330 controlling appearance of 152 creating 485 dash 485 deleting 486 in the Family Editor 486 underlays 329 views and 327 line weights 486 1314 annotation lines 486 for imported files 1314 model lines 486 perspective lines 486 linear array 295 lines 66 193 195 254 303 316 335 398 741 743 744 adding 741 arc resizing 743 entering dimensions for 66 exte...

Page 1630: ...1344 overview 1339 reference documentation 1353 related information 1367 running 1349 samples on SDK 1353 Tools menu 1343 using SDK samples 1354 VB NET application level examples 1350 VB NET document level examples 1352 workflow 1340 main model 1240 1246 1247 1251 1253 1260 elements deleted 1260 incorporating a design option 1251 moving elements to design options 1246 selecting elements in 1247 vi...

Page 1631: ...ing to elements 461 462 ceramic 468 class 478 479 CMU 472 color of 463 concrete 469 cost of 479 creating 480 cut pattern 463 deleting 481 display properties 463 generic 469 glass 471 glazing 471 graphics 463 identity data 478 479 keynotes 1061 keynotes for 479 keywords for 479 manufacturers 479 masonry 472 material class 478 479 metal 472 metallic paint 473 mirror 473 overview 459 paint 473 physic...

Page 1632: ...dination 1224 N named locations 1230 natural light 1166 navigating 169 175 182 navigation tools 182 SteeringWheels 175 ViewCube 169 navigation 64 drawing area 64 nested families 1106 lighting fixtures 1106 nested family 407 409 creating 407 family type parameter 409 interchangeable subcomponents 409 visibility 408 nested linked models 1214 1215 1220 hiding 1215 showing 1215 visibility and graphics...

Page 1633: ...nd 1247 Paste from Clipboard command 321 path of linked files 1320 patina 472 pattern files 456 patterns 456 1174 creating 456 render performance and 1174 PDF 1024 1025 people 1140 1141 1147 1151 overview 1141 placing in projects 1151 properties 1147 perforations 469 472 performance 15 perimeter 523 536 540 permanent dimensions 214 perspective lines 486 perspective views 109 110 115 193 3D 109 pro...

Page 1634: ...ting 371 detail components 371 loading into project 372 using with a building element 372 profiles 373 host sweep 373 Project Browser 55 57 206 354 changing multiple items 56 filtering views 206 organizing 206 reloading a family 354 using 57 project files 287 loading as a group 287 project information 439 975 992 parameter properties 992 sheets and 975 title blocks and 992 project north 1235 rotat...

Page 1635: ...635 room tags 925 rooms 939 940 section views 1077 sheets 983 site settings 892 slab edges 646 slope arrows 635 stairs 671 structural columns 761 tags 1067 text notes 1031 toposurfaces 899 type properties 76 view 210 view range 200 view templates 501 viewports 997 wall sweeps 597 windows 739 property lines 891 899 900 angle display 891 converting to table based 900 creating with survey data 900 ex...

Page 1636: ...library 482 materials and 465 preview of 465 properties 468 469 471 475 render performance and 1174 1175 RPC families 1144 1145 searching for 482 484 shaders 468 texture alignment 465 467 render performance 1173 1175 building model and 1173 image size quality and 1175 lighting and 1173 materials and 1174 1175 render appearances and 1174 render quality 1162 1163 1172 1175 1179 advanced settings 116...

Page 1637: ...68 backup copies of 70 closing 72 opening 68 reducing size of 70 saving 69 Revit models 1215 linking 1215 revolve cuts 392 revolved geometry 380 381 396 creating 380 properties 396 tips 381 RFA files 287 loading as a group 287 risers 663 rolling back workshared projects 1208 roof inserts 418 419 creating 418 placing 419 roofs 553 554 606 607 609 611 614 616 617 621 622 626 629 632 633 635 adding b...

Page 1638: ... curtain systems 717 718 creating 717 curtain grids adding 718 mullions adding 718 RVT files 287 loading as a group 287 RVT link display settings 1219 S SAT files 1277 1282 1308 ACIS solids 1282 exporting to 1277 importing 1308 saturation 1169 Save As command 69 70 options 70 Save command 69 save options 70 reminders 70 saving to central 1204 default save options 1204 scale 194 scale factors 312 S...

Page 1639: ...and 916 rotating 168 symbols 92 sections 94 jogged 94 segmented 94 segmented sweeps 382 selecting 526 914 1247 elements in design options 1247 mass floors 526 rooms 914 selection 65 269 270 272 276 278 chain 272 count of selected elements 270 curtain elements 277 elements 65 269 mullions 278 multiple elements 65 270 removing elements from 65 278 selection count 270 shortcuts 65 walls or lines join...

Page 1640: ...view titles 997 viewports 995 shortcut menu 52 shortcuts 63 65 511 512 changing elements 65 interface 63 keyboard 511 512 navigation 64 selecting elements 65 zooming 64 Show Mass mode 519 554 shrubs 1146 1151 height 1151 placing in projects 1151 properties 1146 SHX fonts 1315 silhouette edges 205 Sim labels 108 single category schedules 447 single category tags 445 site components 891 908 site set...

Page 1641: ...vel plans 83 Split Region command 570 split surfaces 896 Split Walls and Lines command 335 spot beam angle 1119 1130 1132 spot coordinates 230 231 244 246 instance properties 246 placing 231 type properties 244 spot dimensions 227 spot elevation 227 230 241 243 800 arrowhead style 230 instance properties 243 placing 228 reporting changing 229 type properties 241 spot field angle 1119 1130 1132 spo...

Page 1642: ... sheets and 980 symbols 1071 1072 adding 1071 modifying 1072 T table of contents 978 1005 drawing list 1005 title sheet 978 tag all not tagged 1067 Tag command 1064 tag numbering 1070 tags 492 528 734 738 922 924 1016 1058 1065 1067 1069 1070 1254 aligning 1066 applying 1066 area tags 922 compared to keynotes 1058 design options and 1254 door tags 734 doors 1070 labels 1065 loading 492 mass floors...

Page 1643: ... 469 475 1170 alpha channel 1170 generic materials 469 materials and 463 trapezoid corner mullions 719 trees 908 1139 1140 1142 1146 1151 1178 height 1151 overview 1140 placing in projects 1151 properties 1146 troubleshooting problems with 1178 Trim Extend command 316 troubleshooting 542 941 1176 1260 1299 1320 1321 3ds Max export import 1299 design options 1260 layers 1320 1321 linked files 1320 ...

Page 1644: ...8 1023 1075 1078 1079 1096 1170 1241 1263 1266 1289 3D 110 activating on sheets 976 changing the names of 209 creating 80 deactivating on sheets 976 dedicated views 1241 detail 1075 displaying 83 drafting 1079 exporting as images 1289 framing elevation 89 legends 120 managing the properties of 208 orthographic 3D 109 perspective 110 phases and 1263 1266 printing 1023 reflected ceiling plans 80 ren...

Page 1645: ...m wall 600 profile 600 properties 600 type of 600 wall shapes 842 844 defining 842 wall sweeps 593 597 adding 593 dimensioning to 596 profile 594 properties 597 resizing 595 returning to wall 594 segments 595 type of 595 Wall Sweeps command 573 walls 216 303 316 335 544 561 562 564 566 567 574 575 577 579 583 588 591 593 599 601 603 659 711 748 839 841 843 845 917 928 aligning 591 arc walls 564 at...

Page 1646: ...on of 70 changing editable status 1196 considerations for 1194 constraints and 250 creating 1194 default 1193 deleting 1196 design options and 1258 detach from central 68 discarding changes 1206 distinguishing active 1203 editable only option 1195 editing 1202 gray inactive elements 1203 making editable 1201 masses and 522 opening 1201 reassigning elements 1195 relinquishing ownership 1206 renamin...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 24000-000000-9860 - Revit Architecture - PC

F-SECURE PSB Getting Started Manual preview
PSB
Brand: F-SECURE Pages: 18
Samsung Lazett Combo SCX-4116 User Manual preview
Lazett Combo SCX-4116
Brand: Samsung Pages: 165
Samsung ML 1630 - B/W Laser Printer Manual preview
ML 1630 - B/W Laser Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 18
IBM NetVista Special Instructions Manual preview
NetVista
Brand: IBM Pages: 34
Yamaha DM 1000 Manual preview
DM 1000
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 30
Crestron CRESTRON-APP-SSTV Operations & Installation Manual preview
CRESTRON-APP-SSTV
Brand: Crestron Pages: 28
Symantec 20032623 - Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition Implementation Manual preview
20032623 - Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition
Brand: Symantec Pages: 351
Novell GROUPWISE 7 - WEB ACCESS Manual preview
GROUPWISE 7 - WEB ACCESS
Brand: Novell Pages: 110
FARONICS DEEP FREEZE - INTEGRATING WITH NOVELL ZENWORKS... Manual preview
DEEP FREEZE - INTEGRATING WITH NOVELL ZENWORKS...
Brand: FARONICS Pages: 23
AVG 8.5 ANTI-VIRUS - LINUX-FREEBSD REV 85.2 User Manual preview
8.5 ANTI-VIRUS - LINUX-FREEBSD REV 85.2
Brand: AVG Pages: 234
NeatWorks NeatWorks For Mac Using Manual preview
NeatWorks For Mac
Brand: NeatWorks Pages: 33
Nokia Series 60 Manual preview
Series 60
Brand: Nokia Pages: 84
Lucent Technologies Integrated Solution II System Manager'S Manual preview
Integrated Solution II
Brand: Lucent Technologies Pages: 177
Red Hat Application Server Manual preview
Application Server
Brand: Red Hat Pages: 296
GRASS VALLEY Concerto Instruction Manual preview
Concerto
Brand: GRASS VALLEY Pages: 174
Adaptec Snap EDR Manual preview
Snap EDR
Brand: Adaptec Pages: 6
Adaptec IBM OS/2 v2.x & Warp Using Manual preview
IBM OS/2 v2.x & Warp
Brand: Adaptec Pages: 6
Cabletron Systems SSR-ATM29-02 User Manual preview
SSR-ATM29-02
Brand: Cabletron Systems Pages: 386

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands